You are on page 1of 370

ARCHITECTURAL

BUILDING
MATERIALS
THE NEW LADDER
TYPE CURRICULUM

GEORGE SALINDA SALVAN ... uap


ASSISTANT PROFESSOR
College of Engineering and Architecture
Baguio Cotleges Foundation
First and tone graduate of B.S. Archifecture, 1963
in Northern Luzon, St. Louis University Baguio City
Former instructor 196!).1969 at St. Lc;>uis Uoiversity
Recipient of various ACE certificates, Architects Continuing
Education Program
A licensed Architect, active practitioner and
a licensed building constructor, inventor and a board topnotcher.
Past president of United Architects Phils Baguio Chapter.
Elected National Director; UAP, Regional District I for the year 1987.
Member, College of Fellows, UAP 1988

JMC PRESS, INC.


388 Quezon Avenue, Quezon City

Copyright 1986 by:


JMC PRESS, INC.

and
GEORGES. SALVAN
All rights 1'9$8rved.
No part of this book ma'f be reproduced in any
manneJ without permission of the publisher.

FIRST EDITION
ISBN : 971-11-0321-4
Published and Printed by:
JMC PRESS, INC.
388 Quezon Avenue, Quezon City
Distributed by:
GOODWILL BOOKSTORE
Main Office: Rizal Avenue, Manila
P.0 . Box 2942, Manila

Dedicated to all future


Architects and Engineers
The hope for a functional, comfortable
and convenient designs for better living.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The completion of this book was made a reality through the patient and hardworking efforts
of the artist and graduate of architecture, Mr. Fermin 0 . Balangcod.
Special thanks are also acknowledged to the artists who contributed in making the drawings
notably, Clamor C. Lecitona from NU, who also helped in the cover design; Johnny Camsol,
Jeny Jun Suyat, Roy Pagador, Rev Puno, and James Fioresca, all from BCF, Baguio City.
To the ones who lent unselfishly their books, like Dean Avelino Cruz of BCF, and to the BCF
librarian Mr. Macabiog, .. to Arcnitect Rogelio Naz of St. Louis University, Companies or
~nufacturers of materials ~o a!!K> eent _broch~res, _
han<!books and catalogues.
To Mr. Luis V. Canave who guided me on the comp\ete process of publishing and printing of
books and to Mr. Francisco C. Ma6csi, Teresita G. Espinoza, Eduardo C. Villanueva and
Enrico P. Gomez for their untiring cooperation in preparing the manuscripts typewritten by
Thelma T. Viilareal in computerized typesetting.
To the many students of architecture whose curiosity about and interestin the Building
Materials and its realization in book form have been a source of inspiration.

PREFACE

Design and construction in the Philippines for the past 20 years had grown steadily and the
. continuous introduction of neW products made it-difficult for those who are-not aware of.
these new materials in the market to cope up with their specifications.
In the many years of teaching the subject of building materials and in the experience of the
author in actual practice, it was found out that there is a need to compile and arrange these
building materials in such a way that the topic is discussed with an accompanying illustrations, brief specifications and labelings for easy comprehension.
This book discusses the properties of building materials, their application and articulation,
system of construction, methods for specifying and their character in use. It is arranged in
such a manner that the reader is provided with adequate knowledge on the characteristic
uses Of building materials. It also equips the reader with sufficient skill in the selection of and
specification of building materials.
With the new curriculum revised by the Ministry of Education with the United Architects of
the Philippines, the syllabus of instruction has been changed to include practically all the materials involved in the building construction field. This book is arranged in such a manner as
to introduce to the reader the qualities of wood, concrete, stone, steel, plastic, bituminous
materials and others. After the reader is equipped with these knowledge, the author arranged
the chapters in such a way as to place the materials in its proper order as flooring materials
whether wood or concrete, walling materials for use in interiors and exteriors, and ceiling
materials and roofing materials. Another important topic included is the chapter on building
protection which include among others the waterproofing, fijtproofing, fireproofing, burglar
proofing and many other protections which is common to buildings especially when it is
already existing .. At the end of the chapter is also included the summarized form of a bill of
materials and specifications which is commonly encountered in the. actual field.

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter

Chapter

.:h3pter

Chapter

Chapter

CONCRETE AND CONCRETE PRODUCTS ..............................

CERAMICS AND CLAY PRODUCTS .......................................

BUILDING STONES, GYPSUM AND LIME ..............................

WOOD AND WOOD PRODUCTS .............................................

Chapter
Chapter

Chapter

Cements, 2
Types of Aggregates, 2
Concrete Mixes, 2
Concrete Additives, 4
Concrete Products, 9
Construction Equipments, 12
Concrete Price List, 14

15

Brick, 16
Tile, 18
Terra Cotta, 21
Ceramic Veneer, 21

23

Building Stones, 24
Stone Construction, 25
Gypsum, 29

33

Wood,34
Moisture in Wood, 35
Seasoning of Lumber, 36
Unit of Measurement, 37
Glue Laminated Timber, :rl
Glue Used in Laminating, 39

RECYCLED WASTE PRODUCTS BUILDING


BOARDS AND PAPERS ...........................................................

41

Building Boards, 42
Building Papers, 48

BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS ..............................

GLASS AND GLAZING ............................................................

..........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~

51

Bitumen, 52

55

Ferrous Metal, 56
Non Hlrrous Metal, 61

63

Glass, 64
Glass Products, 68

9
Chapter 10

...................................

71

ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS ................................................

i7

11

INSULATING MATERIALS ......... ------

Chapter

Chapter

PLASTICS AND RELATED PRODUCTS


Plastic, 72

Glues, 78
Sealers, 79
Glazing and Caulking Compounds, 81

85

Thermal Insulations, 86

ix

chapter

Chapter

12

BUILDING PROTECTION .................. .. .............. .......................

13

PAINTS AND COATINGS ................................................. .. .... 131

!n

Water Proofing , 95
Damp-Proofing, 114
Clear Silicone Water Repellant, 116
"ANAY" Proofing-soil Poisoning, 117
Wood Preservation, 119
Fire Protection, 121
Rat-proofing, 123
Rust Proofing, 123
Floor Protection and Surfacing, 126
Descalers, Paint and Chemical Strippers, 129
Chesterton Descaler and Chemical Cleaner, 129
Control, Project and Manage, 129

Paint, 132
Varnishes, 134
Enamels, 135
Shellac, 135
Lacquers, 135
Stains, 136
Fillers, 137
Sealers, 137
Silicone Water Repellant, 137
Product Names, 138
EXTERIOR WORK PAINTING
- Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete, 139
- Hollow Block Masonry, 140
- Woodsiding, Paneling, Trims, Fascias Eaves, Soffits, 141
- Galvanized Iron Sheet Roofing, Gutters, 143
- Cappings, Conductors, Flashing, 144
- Asbestos and Ceramics, 145
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR WORK PAINTING
- Metal Sash, trims, mullions, ornamental iron and
other Ferrous Metal Surfaces, 146
- All non-painted concrete, Synthetic finishes, rubble,
brick and washout, 147
INTERIOR WORK PAINTING
- Woodwork, Plywood, Wall and Ceiling, 147
- Acoustical Wall and Ceiling, 149
- Wood Paneling; D9or, Closet Gabinets, 150
- Doors, closet and Cabinet work (Kitchen subjected
to Water), 151
INTERIOR WORK
- Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete, 153
- Hollow Block Masonry, 156
- Application of Paint, 157
- Brands of Paints, 157

Chapter

14

HARDWARES ...... ..... ... .... .:....... ............ ......... ........... ......... ... . 159
Doors, 160
To Hung a Door, 164

Rough Hardware, 168


To Fix One Sash, 172
To Lock the Door, 174
Automatic Door Closer, 178
Hinges (Light), 181
Catch, 186
Knobs, 185
Pulls, 185
Hook and Eyes, 187
Screws, 169
Washers, 170
Bolts, 170
Nuts, 170
Door Stoppers, Bumpers; 188

Chapter

Chapter

Chapter

15

PLUMBING MATERIALS .... ... .. ... ........ ...... ... ... .. ... .. .. ... ..... .... .. .. 189

16

ELECTRICAL MATERIALS ...................................................... 211

17

Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings, 190


Special Cast Iron Fittings, 194
Plastic Pipes and Fittings (Drainage), 195
Asbestos Pipe and Fittings, 196
Vitrified Clay Pipes, 197
Galvanized Steel Pipe Fittings, 199
Plastic Pipes and Fittings, 201
Plumbing Fixtures, 202
Types of Convenience Outlets, 212
Types of Switches, 212
Junction Boxes, 213
Porcelain Insulators, 213
Fuses, 214
Conduit Fitting, 215
Conductors, 216
Switch Box, 216
Architectural Lamps etc., 217

.FLOORING MATERIALS
Wood Flooring, 222
Concrete FJooring, 224

221

Clay-tile Flooring, 226


Asphlat Flooring, 232
Terrazzo Flooring, 233
Plastic Flooring, 234
Magnesite Flooring, 235
Rubber Flooring, 235
Cork FloorinQ. 236
Pebble Washout, 236
Marble, 237

Crazy Cut Marble, 237

Chapter

18

WALLING MATERIALS ............................................................ 239


INTERIOR FINISHES MATERIALS:
Wood Finishes, 240
Gypsum Finishes, 241
Clay Finishes, 242
Stone Finishes, 246
Concrete Finishes, 246
Building Boards, 248
Wall, Paper, 249
Wall Coverirn:J, 24.q

xi

Glass, 251
Steel, 252
Non-Ferrous Metals, 253

Plastics, 253
Paints, 254
EXTERIOR WALL MATERIALS

Types of Walls, 256


Curtain Wall, 25e
ANISHING MATERIALS:

-Stucco, 256
- Brick Veneer, 258
-Artificial Stone Veneer, 258
-.Natural Stone Veneer, 258
- Terra-Cotta Facing, 259
- Wood Siding, 260
- Boards an<:t Battens, 260
- Aluminum Siding, 260
- Meta4, 261
- Plywood, 261
- Wood Shakes and Shingles, 262 .
- Hardboard Siding, 263
-Asbestos-Cement Siding and Siding Shingles, 263
-Brick, 264
- Tile, Ceramic, Veneer and Terra-Cotta, 264
- Stone (Marble}, 266
- Precast Concrete Slabs, 266
Washout Finishes, 267
Synthetic Adobe Brick, 2ffl
Sandblasting, E
Bush-hammered Finish, 268
Gtass, 268
Plastic, 268
Logs,

Chapter

19

269

CEILING AND ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS ...... ..... .. ... .. ........ .. ..

271

Suspended Ceiling, 272


Material$ Used for Ceiling Panels, 273
Brandfor Sprayed on Materials, 273
Acoustical Materials, 274

Chapter20 ROOFING MATERIALS ....... . .. ... ...... ..... .... . .. .. .. ... ... .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. 281
Roof Styles, 282

. Roof Slopes in Run & Rise, Pitches and Degrees, 284


ROOFING MATERIALS:
- Shingles; Wood Shakes, 286

- Roofing Tiles and Sheathing, 285, 290

-Sheet Metal Roofing, 293


-Asbestos- Cement Sheet, Roofing, 298
- Built-up Roofing, 300
- Rolled Roofing, 302
- Sprayed on asphalt Roofing, 302

-Glass Roofing, 303


- Pl'astic Roofing, 303

- Milano Design Roofing, 303


- Banaue Design, .304

Chsptel'

xii

21

SAMPLE FORMS ...................................................................... :J:TJ


Outline Estimates (Bill of Materials),
Outline Specification,

CHAPTER

CEMENTS
PORTLAND CEMENT
Made from mate.rials which must contain the proper proportions of lime, silica, alumina and
iron components.
Four parts of limestone to one part clay are the basic ingredients. These are mixed, burned
. then pulverized.
Portland cement is sold either in cement bags of 40 kilos weight or in BULK into cement
trucks.

SPECIAL CEMENTS
1. White Portlahd Cement
Same materials as normal portland except in color. The manufacturing process is controlled to produce a pure white, non-staining cement. It is used primarily for architectural
purposes such as curtain wall and facing panels, decorative concrete stucco and tile
grout, or wherever white or colored concrete or mortar is specifted.

2. Masonry Cement
Has been specially designed to produce better mortar than that made with normal portland cement or with a lime-cement combination . The mortar made with this cement has
particularly good plasticity and workability, good adhesion and bond .

3. Air-entraining Portland Cement


Small amounts of certain air-entraining agents are added to the clinker and ground with it
to produce air entraining cements, effective use for resistance to severe frost.

Oil Well Cement


This is a special portland cement used for sealing oil wells. It must be slow setting andresistant to high temperatures and pressures.

5. Waterproofed Portland Cement


Normally proauced by adding a small amount of stearate, usually calcium or aluminum to
the cement clinker during the final grinding.

TYPES OF AGGREGATES USED IN CONCRETE


Concrete can be considered to be an artificial stone made by binding together particles of
some inert material with a paste made of cement and water. These inert material are the aggregate_. Aggregates used are sand, gravel crushed stone, cinder, crushed furnace slag,
bumed clay, expanded vermiculite, and perlite.
. sand -foUnd in riVerbeds, free of salt and must b8 washed.
fine aggregate-smaller than 1/ 4" diameter scones.
course aggregate - bigger than 1/4'" diameter stones.

CONCRETE MIXES
Class "AA''
I
Class A
Class B

1:2:4
1:2 1/ 2:5

Class C

1:3:6

1:11/2:3

concrete under water, retaining walls


footings, columns beams. R.C. slabs
slab on fill, non bearing walls
concrete plant boxes, etc.

Example of Class "A" mix:


One part cement is to two parts sand plus four parts gravel.

The designing of concrete mixtures is based primarily on the water-cement ratio theory,
which states that the strength of concrete is inversely proportional to the amount of water
used per unit (1b) of cement.
This means that if. for example, 68 lb. of water per lb . of cement will produce concrete capable of developing 2,500 psi in 28 days, then less w ater per bag w ill produce stronger eoncrete and more water w ill produce concrete of lesser strength.

Compressive strength of concrete for various water-cement ratios

Water cement ratio


lb. per lb. of cement

Probable compressive at
28 days, psi
Plain concrete

0 .75

2,000
2,500

0.68
0.62

3,000

0.56
0.50
0.45
0.41
0.38
0.34

3,500
4,000
4,500
5,000
5,500
6,000

CONTROL OF CONCRETE MIXES


Slump test-When;frellhlymixed concrete is checked to ensure that the specified slump is
being attained consistently. A standard slump cc;me is 12 inches high (0.30) and 8 inches
(0.20) in diameter at the bottom and 4 inches (0.10) on top which is open on both ends.

12"

X=2'" to 4" or 0.05


to 0.10 for beam,
column, slab.

1
The cone is filled in t"ree equal layers, each being tamped or ro.dded 25 times with a
standard 5/8" bullet nosed rod . When the cone has been filled and leveled off, it is lifted
carefully and the amount of slump is measured .

Allowable Deflection 'X'


Beams and columns
Slabs and tunnel inverts
Tops and walls, pi'ers, parapet & curbs
Side walls and arch in tunnet lining
Canal lining
Heavy mass construction

7.5 em
5.0 em
5.0 em
10.0 em
7.5 em

(.075) 3"

(.05 ) 2"
(.05 ) 2"'

(.10 ) 4'"
(.075) 3"

5.0 em (.05 } 2"'

Compressive Strength Test-Common quality-control test of concrete, based on 7 and 28


day curing periods. SPecimens are usually cylindrical with a length equal to twice the
diameter. Standard size.is 12 inch high and 6 inch diameter. Filling is done the sameway
as the slump test but taken out from the mold in 24 hours. It is then sent to a compression
testing laboratory, by marking the cylinder while still wet. Some compressive stresses
are 2,000 psi, 2,500 psl, 3,000 psi.

BRANDS OF PORTLAND CEMENT


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Island cement
Continental cement
Hi-cement
Union cement
Rizal cement

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Filipinas cement
Pacific cement
Fortune cement
Republic cement
Northern cement

BRANDS OF WHITE CEMENT


1. Prime White cement
2. Keene
3. Trinity
4. Snowcrete

CONCRETE ADDITIVES
In addition to the basic ingredients of concrete. other materials are often added to the mix or
applied to the surface of freshly placed concrete to produce some special result. These materials are known as concrete additives and may be used for one of the following reasons:
1. To speed up the i ni 1ial set of concrete .
2. To retard the initial set.
3. To make the concrete more resistant to deterioration due to repeated freezing and
thawing cycles.

4. To prevent bleeding of watet to the sur:face of concrete.


5. To improve the workability of the mix.
6. To improve the hardness or denseness ot the concrete surface.
7. To render the concrete more water tight.
8. To improve the bond between two concrete surfaces.
9. To inhibit the set of cement oaste.
10. To produce a colored surface .
11. To produce a nOt tskid sur:face.
12. To prevent the evaporation ot water from thP. newly placed concrete.
13. To help develop all the potentiai strEngth of a given water -cement paste.
14. To decrease the weight of concrete per cubic foot.

,ACCELERATORS
An admixture which is used to speed up the initial set of concrete.. Such a material may be
added to the mix to increase the rate of early-strength development for several reasons. For
example, this will allow earlier removal of forms and in some cases reduce the whole curing
period.

RETARDERS
The function of a retarder is to delay or extend the setting time of the cement paste in concrete. In hot weather hydration is accelerated by the heat, thus cutting down the time avail. able to place, consolidate, and finish the concrete. High temperatures, low humidity and
wind cause rapid evaporation of water from the mix during summer. This drying of the concrete leads to cracking and crazing of the surtace.
An initial set retarder will hold back the ~ydration process, leaving more water for workability
and allowing concrete to be finished and .protected before drying out.
A retarder is usually used in bridge construction, since girders or beams are designed with a
camber and will be deflected as the load of the bridge deck is applied. The initial pours may
be partially set before paving of the bridge deck is complete if a retarderis not used. As further deflection takes place, this concrete being no longer plastic. will be subjeC?ted to stress
and may crack. It is also important to use a retarder in casting prestressed concrete.
members. Since prestress beds are usually long, up to 300ft. or more, it takes a considerable
time to place and consolidate the entire pour. It is desirable to keep the concrete plastic until
vibrating is completed to ensure a good bond between concrete and prestressed steel along
the entire length of the bed.
Retarders are also helpful for concrete that has to be hauled long distances in transit mix
trucks, to ensure that it reaches its destination in a plastic and placeable condition.
.

AIR-ENTRAINING AGENTS
Air entrained concrete contains microscopic bubbles of air formed with the aid of a group of
chemicals called surface active agents, materials that have the pro~erty of reducing the surface tension of water intended for use when be:tter resistance to frost action is concerned.

DISPERSAL AGENTS
When cement and water are mixed, the cement particles tend to gather in clumps, or to floc-

culate. As a result water does not reach some of the particles and some are only partialiy
hydrated. Sometimes only 50 percent of the cement is hydrated.
Water trapped within these clumps later bleeds to the surface of the concrete, because of the
weight of the other materials. The voids left by the forcing out of the water later become
passages through which water can penetrate the concrete.
A cement dispersal agent such as calcium lignosulfonate causes cement particles to separate by imparting like electrostatic charges to them.

CONCRETE HARDENERS
Plain concrete surfaces which are subjected to rolliog live loads, the impact action of foot
traffic, and other types of wear begin to dust and crumble at the surtace after a period of
time. This condition worsens with time, finally resulting in the destruction of the surtace.

To prevent this, two types of concrete hardeners are used.


1. Chemical hardeners-liquids containing silicoflourides or fluosilicates and a~
ting agent which reduces the surface tension of the liquid and allows it to penetrate
the pores of the concrete more easily . The silicoflourides or fluosilicates combine
chemically with the free lime and calcium carbonate which are present in the concrete .and bind the fine particles in.to a flintlike topping ; which is highly resistant to
wear and dusting.
2. Fine metallic aggregate -are specially processed and graded iron par tiel~ which
are dry-mixed with portland cement, spread evenly over the surface of freshly
ftoated concrete, and worked into the surface by floating. The result is a hard, tough
topping which is highly resistant to wear and less brittle than normal concrete.

WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURES


A material used to reduce the amount of water necessary to produce a concrete of given
consistency or to increase the slump for a given water ~ontent. A typical one is made from
the metallic. salts of figninsulfonic acids.
More water than is actually required for the hydration of the cement must be used in any
given concrete mix in order to give it placeability. Unless the water content is carefully controll~ , excess water may bleed to the surface of the concrete, causing segregation or surface laitance, or may evaporate, leaving voids which decrease strength and increase permeability. Excess water will also dilute and weaken the cement paste. Therefore an agent
which will decrease the amoung of water required while maintaining consistency and workability is a useful addition to the mix.

CONCRETE. WATERPROOFERS
Water under pressure and in contact with one surface of the concrete can be forced through
channels between th~ inner and outer surfaces. A measure of the amount of water passing
in this way is a measure of permeability; any admixture used to reduce this flow is really a
perrriea bil ity reducer.
Water also can pass through concrete by the action of capillary forces. If one side is exposed
to moisture and the other to air, the water reaching the dry side evaporates, resulting in a
flow of moisture through the concrete. Materials used to reduce or stop this type of flow are
more properly called damproofers.
Materials used to reduce permeability and also a damproofers.
a. Air-entraining agent-because it increases the plasticity of concrete and therefore
help to make placing easier and more uniform . They also reduce bleeding by holding
the water in films about the air bubbles.
As damproofer because the small disconnected voids produced by air entrainment
break up the capillaries in the concrete and therefore offer a barrier to the passage of
water by capillary action.
b. Cement dispersal agent-Since it tends to reduce voids formed when water is
trapped in groups of cement particles.
c. Water repellents- Used as damproofing. The materials used are compounds containing calcium or ammonium stearate, calcium or ammonium oleate, or butyl stearate. These substances are generally combined with lime or calcium chloride.
d. Film applied to surface-'-preferab!y the one adjacent to the water source. The
common materials are those containing asphalt or sodium silicate and one which
contains a metallic aggregate.

The asphaltic products from an impervious coatings. over the surface. The sodium silicate compounds enter the surface pores and form a gel which prevents water from
entering the concrete. The metallic aggregate type of waterproofer consists of fine
cast-iron particles, to which is added a chemical that causes them to oxidize rapidly
when mixed with portland cement.

BONDING AGENTS
When fresh concrete is poured against another' concrete surface already set and at least partially cured, it is often difficult to obtain a bond between the two surfaces unless special precautions are taken. Fresh concrete shrinks when setting, and unless there is a very good
bond th.us shrinkage makes the new concrete pull away from the old surface.
a cement - Paste slurry is often applied to such an old surface immediately prior to
pouring new -concrete to increase the amount of paste. When such a treatment cannot
be applied, bonding agents are used to"join the two surfaces.
Two Types:

1. Metallic aggregate -iron particles are larger, but with same materials as the permeability reducer. Bonding takes place through the oxidation and subsequent expansion of the
iron particles .

-2. Synthstic latex emulsion -consists of a highly polymerized synthetic liquid resin dis

,.

persed in water. When it is sprayed or painted on a concrete surface. the pores in the
concrete absorb the water and allow the resin particles to coalesce and bond .

CONCRETE COLORING AGENTS


1. Use concrete paint, applied after the concrete surface has been neutralized, either
through exposure or by using a neutralizing agent such as zinc sulfate.
2. Integrating color into the surface concrete while it is still fresh.
a. Natura= mettalic oxides of cobalt, chromium, iron etc. have distinctive colors. The
ochres and umbers are fine dry powders. They are usually mixed into a topping mix,
since this is the best way of distributing the color evenly throughout the concrete.
b. The coloring agents made with synthetic oxides are usually a mixture of the oxide with
one or more additional crying ingredients. The color is sometimes mixed with fine pure
silica sand and applied by shaking the mixture over the freshly poured and floated surface.

SET-INHIBITING AGENTS
Specifications sometimes require that concrete surfaces be produced in which the aggregates are exposed for architectural effect.,
Certain inhibiting agents will prevent the ceme.nt paste from bonding to the surface aggregates but will not interfere with the set throughout the remainder of the pour.
Two materials are used for this purpose.
a. a liquid which is applied to forms for vertical surfaces immediately before pouring
concrete and a
b. powder which is applied directly to freshly poured horizont~)l surfaces

The depth of penetrationof the innibitor depend's on the amount used per square foot. Usual
rates of application will vary from 1 1/ 2 to 3 lb. per ~00 sq . ft. of surface.
After three or four days of curing, the retarded surface concrete should be hosed or brushed
off, exposing cleanaggregate and leaving a rough cast effect.

NON-SKID SURFACES
To avoid making concrete surfaces slippery, use wood or cork floats which will leave a rough
surface instead of steel .trowelling operation during ttie floor-finishing process.
Another method is to use an abrassive material in the topping, applied as a dry shake in
much the same way as metallic-aggregate topping is applied . The abravise material is
f loated, into the top and the steel trowel operation is omitted . Materials commonly used for
this purpose are fine particles of .Flint, aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or emery.

SURFACE SEALING AGENTS


Used for two purposes.
1. To form a watertight coating which w ill prevent water from evaporating f rom a
crete surface and aiiC\111 it to be retained for hydration.

con-

2. To seal the pores of a concrete surface after it has hardened in order to prevent the
p&ssage of water and the absorption of spilled materials such as oil, grease, or paint.
Sealing agents used to prevent water evaporation are usually liquid waxes which can
be sprayed over the surface but which are easily removed after curing is complete.

GAS FORMING AGENTS


Under normal conditions concrete undergoes settlement' and drying shrinkage, which in
some situations, can result in undesirable characteristics in the hardened concrete. For
example, voids on the underneath side of forms, blockouts,. reinforcing steel , or other
embedded parts such as machinery bases may interfere wit h the bond and allow passage of
water and reduce uniform~y and strength.
One method of reducing such voids is to add an expanding agent to the concrete. Aluminum
powder, when added to .mortar or concrete, reacts with the hydroxides in hydrating cement to
produce very small bubbles of hydrogen gas. This action, when properly controlled. causes
a slight expansion in plastic concrete or mortar and thus reduces or eliminates voids caused
by settl.ement.

POZZOLANIC ADMIXTURES
Materials sometimes used in structures where it is desirable to avoid high temperature or in.
structures exposed to seawater or water containing sulfates. These pozzolanic; materials are
generally substituted for 10 to 35 percent of the cement. Po~olans may be added to concrete mixes - rather than substituting for part of the cement- to improve workability, impermeability, and resistance to chemical attack.

A number of natural materials suches diatomaceous earth, opaline cherts and shales, tuffs
and pumicites, arid some artificial materials such as fly ash are used as pozzolans. (Fly ash is
a fine residue which results from the combustion of powdered coal and may contain various
amounts of carbon, silica, sulfur, alkalies, and other ingredients).

CONCRETE PRODUCTS
Made of lightweight and heavyweight materials for use in exterior and interior load-bearing
walls, firewalls, curtain and panel walls, partitions etc.

CONCRETE BLOCK
Made with both stone and lightweight aggregates.

1: Hollow load-beari(lg concrete block-an 8 ... x 8N x 16" will approximately weigh


40 to 50 lb. made with heavyweight a99regate and 25 to 351b. when made with light
weight aggregate.

2. Solid load bearing block --defined as one having a core area of not more than 25
percent of the gross cross-sectional area.
3. Hollow; non load bearing concrete block -one in which the core area exceeds 25 .
percent of the cross sectional area.

4. Concrete building tile.


5.

Conc~ete

brick.

COMMON SIZE
4" x 8 .. x 16" -for non load bearing partitions
6" x 8,. x 16.. -for load bearing walls

QUALITY
a. Hand made -backyard i-ndustry

b. Machine ~ade -commonly sold


c: Steam cured-manufactured by big and nationalty known factories for load bearing
waifs. Usually specified for government and multi..m>rey boifdings.

Some companie~ manufacturing steam cured blocks


1.
2.
4.
5.

Ramrod
Jackbilt
Permanent
Superior

d. Lightweight blocks-when perlite is added to the aggregate to reduce the weight to


almost 50% .
#

CAST STONE
Used -to simulate stone from concrete methods.
a. By splitting a solid concrete block to expose two rough surfaces.
b. By making a mortar of cement and very high quality silica sand and casting it in molds
which produces a unit w ith the face shaped to simulate chipped sand stone, shale or slate
done either by placing coloring material on the mold or either by mixing the color to the
mortar.

c. By mixing granite or marble chips with a mortar made with white cement and cast the
mortar in a mold with a hard, smooth face. When the unit is. partially cured, it is ground
off to expose some stone in the surface, resulting in a terrazo-like appearance.

PRECAST FACING SLABS


Units that can be custom-made any size to fit a particular structure.
Facing slabs are precast with either or lightweight aggregates and
are fixed to the building by pins or dowels to a steel frame and by
metal strap anchors to a concrete or backup wall.

10

CELLULAR CONCRETE BLOCKS


A lightweight block which is outstanding in thermal and sound insulation qualities. The
basic ingredients are cement -made from silica-rich sand and lime-water, and aluminum
powder. They can be easily cut or sawed to any desired shape "Yith woodworking tools and
are laid up in masonry cement or cement-lime mortar. Stucco and plaster can be applied
directly to the face of the block, and other materials may be nailed directly to them.
Another type of lightweight block Is made by mixing chemically treated wood shavings with
cement paste and forming the resulting r.:ixture into blocks. Three types are made. a. form
blocks, b. insulation slabs, c. ceiling blocks.

OTHER PRODUCTS
1. Decorative and concrete blocks- used for sunbaffles and for fences.

2. Concrete sewer and culvert pipes


Diameter - 4"0, 6"0, 8"0, 12"0, 24"0
length - 1.00 meter
This are the reinforced except the 4"0 d.

3. ConcNte balusters

4. Cement tiles-1"

X 8H X

a..

11

CONSTRUCTION EQU IPMENTS


1. One-bagger concrete mixer
2. Two-bagger concrete mixer
3. Hoist
4. Concrete vibrator
5. Vibratory compactor
6. Conveyor
7. Porta-lift
8. Hollow block machine
9. Buggy-fixed or tiltable
10. Tamping rammer
11. Bar cutter
12. Terrazzo floor grinder
13. Concrete pipe mold
14. Decorative mold
15. Pavement breaker and drilling machine
16. Self-priming pump

1- eAGGER CONCReTE
MIXER

12

-BAGGER CONCRETE MIXER

EM~

7M-g'
10 MT<;

. GdGCUNE eNGINE"

-,.s

1."-3'!.4" PUMP

c.oNVEYOR.

TO 1G 8+-IP

I Eki?A?L> l=l.a)R
GJ.<INDER
.

13

PRICE LIST EFFECTIVE JAN. '86

'
PEBBLES:
U/COST
Black #5, '10, 16.. ... .. .... .. .. fl14.00
Buracay 16, 10 . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .
Buracay (Ml #10 .. .. .. . .. . . .
Assorted #5, 10, 15 .. . . . . . ..

Bohol Beige#5 ... ....... .....


Bohol Beige #10..... ...... ....
Quezon 16, to, 15 .. .. . . .. . . . .
Selected White #5.. ..... .... .
Selected White #tO
Selected White #20 . . . . . . . . .

36.00

28.00
18.00
60.00
50.00
25.00
90.00
75.00
45.00

SYNTHETIC ADOBE:
White or Natural ........... . , 7.00
Yellow Brown ............ .. .
8 .00
Red ............................. .
8.00
Black .. ..... .. ..... ... .... ...... .
8.00
Dark Brown ................ ..
8.00
Small Shell ... ..... .... .... .. .. . , 7.00
MARBLE CHIPS:
White 15, 10, 15.............. .
Beige #5, 10, 15 ...... .. ..... ..
Pink 15, 10, 16 ............. ..
Gray #5, 10, 15 ............. ..
Black 15. 10, 15 ............. ..
Mariposa #5, 10, 16
MARBLE DUST:
Marble Dust White
Marble Oust Beige.. ..........

P22.00
16.00

28.00
28.00
28.00
28.00

P22.00
12.00

CRAZY CUT MARBLE:


Beige ......................... .. P240.00/T
White Mindoro ............. ..
750.00/ T
Mariposa Red ................. . 750.00/T
Gray .......................... . 800.00/ T
BabyPink ...... ............. ..
no.oo!T
ADOBE RUBBLES:
4x 12..... .. .. ........ ...... . .. . P 4.00/ pc.
8x 12 ......................... ..
6.50/pc.
12x 12 ..... .......... ...... . .... .
7.00/ pc .
12x 18 ..... ~: ................... .
8.50/pc.
16.00/ pc.
16 X 24 .......................... .
6x 12 ........ .. ...... ... ....... .
7.00/pc.
10x10 .. . ....... ... ... ........ .'..
7.00/pc.
12 X 16.......................... .
8.00/pc.
12x24 ......................... ..
15.00/ pc .

Pink Teresa ............... .. .


Mindoro Flat ..... ........... ..
Red Corals ................... ..

AatStone ........... .. ....... .


Decorati.ve Shell .......... . .
Flyfly Quarry fsm) .......... ..
Petrified Rocks (sm) ..... .. . .

14

thickn~

VIGAN TJLES:
12x 12 ... :.. , 6.00/pc.
10 x 10 ..... :
5.00/ pc.
8 X 8.. ..... ..
4.00/pc,

MARBLE CUTTER:
Tylorit .. .. .. P 90 .00/pc.
Rasta ...... ...
85.00/pc.
Sait... ..... ....
85.00/pc.

WOOD STRIP:
1/4 .. . .. .. .. .. . fl 3.00/pc.

3/ 4 ........ ... .

3.30/pc.

1/2 .. .. .. .. . .. .

3.50/ pc.

3 mm .. ..... ..

tt14:00/ pc.
19!00/pc.

BRASS STRIP:

2mm .........

Flyfly Quarry ................. .

note: 3"-4"'

MARBLE ASHLAR:
4 x 8 ......... P240.00/m2
2 x 8 .. .. .. .. . 225.00/m2
2 x 12 .. .. ....
186.00/m2
3x 12 .........
200.00/m2
4 x 12 ..... .. ..
210.00/ m2

DECORATIVE ROCKS:
Coda ............. :.............
Teresa Rocks ................. .
Petrified Rocks .............. .

,16.00/lyr.
50.00/ lyr.
50.00/lyr.
53.30/lyr.
61.30/lyr.

P 11.00/pc.

4mm .........
p

25.00/ can
800.00/m3
1,400.00/mJ
1,200.00/m3
1,000.00/ mJ
1,400.00/m3
1,600.00/ m3
25.00/can
15.00/ can

75.00/can
~ . 00/can

CARBORUNDUM:
~ough Tylorit .. .. . . P210.00/ pc.
Semi Rough .. ..... . . . 210.00/pc.
Fine Carb:.. .. ... .. .. .
130.00/ pc.
Fine Czec. .... ..... ...
75.00/pc.
Carb. Czec. . .. .. . . ..
80.00/ pc.
Horshow .. ...... ....
250.00/pc.

CHAPTER

CERAMICS & CLAY PRODUCTS


BRICK
The basic ingredient of brick is clay-clay which has some specific properties. It must have
plasticity when mixed with water, so that it can be molded or shaped; it must have sufficient
tensile strength to keep its shape after forming; and clay particles must fuse together when
subjected to sufficiently high ten:tperatures .

,
Clay occurs in three principal forms.

a. surfsce clsy-found near the surface of the earth.


b. shllltiS-Ciays which have been subjected to high pressure until they have ~come
relatively hard.
~

c. fire clays -are found at deeper levels and usually have more uniform physical and
chemical qualiti~s.

'

:rwo classes of clay


1. Calcareous clays- contains about 15 percent calcium carbonate and burn to a yelloWish color.
2. Noncalcareous clsys -composed of silicate of alumina, with feldspar and iron oxide. 'These clays bum buff, red or salmon depending on the iron oxide content which
vary from 2 to 10 percent.

Standard Brick size is 2 1I 4 x 3 3/4 x 8 in.

BRICK TEXTURE
Texture are applied by attachments which cut, scratch, brush, roll, or roughen the s"'rface or
by applying or spraying glazes on the brick before or after burning.

rug~

16

matt

Typical ones are 1) ceramic glaze, consisting of spraying a coating of a mixture of mineral ingredients on one or more surfaces of the brick. The glaze melts and fuses to the brick at a
given temperature, producing a glasslike coating which is available in almost any color and
2) salt glaze, consisting of solution of sodium iron silicate. Salt glaze is transparent so the
color of the bric~ is presented under a lustruous gloss.

BRICK BOUNDS
1. The method of laying bricks in a wall in order to form some distinctive pattern or design is referred to as the pattern bond.
2. The method by which the individual units in a brick structure are tied together either
by overlapping or by metal ties is known as the structural bond.
3. The adhesion of mortar to bricks or to steel reinforcements used in conjunction with
them is called the mortar bond.

fl~r91

JOt

=:1or

J1J1Mirt 9

tmJ

:n:::u:

Jo

JCJr
JCJ..__l_
_---J:JDl.
lDl

r:.

l[

:J'-l_

1xnd

:JI
ll

_,JjfL--....14~;__-_

JJ

ll
__,][

JC.

a} PATTERN BONO

~RUGTURAL HEAOE~

~AVJTY

b) SlRUC.TURAL

WALL

BONO

BRICK VENEER a.IER A WO(.Qat.J


SACK UP

17

C.. MORTAR BOND

V-j01nt

cflll~
TILE
STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE -are hollow units as opposed to brick which is solid. Tiles are
made from the same material as brick, but all clay tile are formed by extrusion in the stiffmud process.

Types of Tiles
1. Load bearing wall tile-used for the bearing watts .of light buildings, the height
usually restricted to four stories. Struc1uralload bearing wall tile are made in 4, 6, 8,
10 and 12 in thicknesses.

18

2. Partition tile-non-load bearing ..

3. Back-up tile-intended for use in both bearing and non-bearing walls which will be
faced with brick or facing tile. The facing is bonded to the back up and the loads are
supported by both.

,,

4. Furring tile-used on the inside of extericr walls to provide air spaces for insulation
to prevent the passage of moisture an9 to provide a suitable plastering surface. Classified as non-load bearing.

,l
SPLIT FURRI~G TILE

SOLID FURRING

TILE

5. fireproofing tile-structural steel must be insulated in fireproof contructiori. One


method of doing this is to cover it with fireproofing tile.

19

SOFFIT TILE.

COLUMN

6. Roor Tile-one way nbbed concrete floor and roof slabs can be formed by
using structural clay'floor tile. They are manufactured in both load-bearing and nonload bearing grades in standard thicknesses ranging from 3 to 12 in and standard

length and widths of 12 in;

20

: . />

. ..

'

.
"'.

~A ~ a:tu:r.Bt,g and til~


.

.... ...... _.J>.


'.

L..Rihl19

7. Structural Clay Facing Tile - unglazed tile and may have either a smooth or a
rough textured finish. They are designed to be used as exposed facing material on
either exterior or interior walls and partitions.

2 Classes
a. Standard ti/e......:suitable for general use in either exterior or interior locations.
b. Specialized tile -have heavier shells and webs and are intended for greater resistance to impact and moisture penetration.
8. Structural Glazed Facing Tile -produced from high-grade light burning clay
which is suitable for the application of ceramic or salt glaze. Two types are single
faced units and two opposite faces glazed.

TERRA COTTA
Meaning "fired earth" is a clay product which has been used for architectural decorative
purposes, since ancient Greece and Rome. Modern terracotta is machine-extruded and
molded or pressed. The machine-made product is usually refered to as ceramic veneer.
and is a unit with,' flat face and flat or ribbed back.

Ceramics veneer is made in two types.


a. Adhesion type -heli::l to the wall by the bond of the mortar to the ceramic veneer
back and to the backing wan.

t>.

Anchor type - are held by mortar and by wire tiles between the terracotta and the
wall behind adhesion type ceramic veneer is available in face sizes up to 600 sq. in.
and 24 in . max. widths. Lengths can be up to 36 in. thickness limited to 1 in.

21

CERAMJC

~t~l latth
'/4 S?rt~tt.k [()4t
~:l'fk?rta- CLJ~t

l.4rattiC.

v~r

.,.

. METAL

r~L;: ::

~; ~-:-~lfl--_ ~f12a1htrtg
..

.-......,~::1+~ -- -:::... -tffi~-:--:- butldtn9 ~r

r<~~~~;
......,_~"*--Y4" nn-t.ar 6J.at
1

4. --+1-l"+t--

.~: .

~~; :
~
:~..
~..

.:t

::,:

"':.

..

woo.o

22

~+"mlTtar t..,pat

:.PLJttf1tL Y~?nna-

BRICK.

' 0 ...
.

..

:. :.

t. ;"" ~---'
..".:""t't:t:+~

...:.

~r2t.!

. : : :.....
.. :.~- ~~- 111c1rtJ"

,. . : .
'.

teramu.

CONCRETE:.

ven~

,-

CHI'PTER

:~l-:~.;:.~-

BUILDING STONES &


GYPSUM AND LIME
BUILDING STONES
Stones usually blocks or pieces of the basic material rock.

CLASSIFICATION
Rock can be divi~ed into three general categories.
1. Igneous-formed as the result of the cooling of molten matter.
2. Sedimentary -formed by the action of water either by .depositing minerals at the bot
tom of a water body _or depositing them on the earth's surface.
3. Metamorphic - rocks changed from their original structure by the action of extreme
pressure, heat, or various combinations of these forces.
Stone used for building purposes also can be classified according to form in which it is available commercially.
1. Rubble- includes rough fieldstone which may merely have been broken into suitable
sizes, or it may include irregular pieces of stone that have been roughly cut to size (usually used for and filling material) (escombro and lastillas).
2. Dimension (cut stone} -consist of pieces that have been cut or finished according to a
set or draw;ngs (For facings of walls).
3. Flagstone (Flat slabs) -consists of thin pieces (1 /2 in . and up which may or may not
have had their face dimensions cut to some particular size. (For walks and floors.)
4. Crushed rock -Stones consisting of pieces varying in size from 3/8 to 6 in . and is used
to a large extent in concreting.

BUILDING

STONE~
\ ..

1. Argillite -one formed from clay, commonly dark-blue with faint shades of green, used
for floor tile, stair treads, coping stones, interior wall base, interior window stools of exte
rior window sills.
2. Granite-is of igneous origin and composed ~f quartz, feldspar, hornblende and mica. Its
generally very hard, strong durable.and capable of taking a high polish. For use in flooring
wall paneling, column and mullion facings, stair treads or flagstone. Comes in colors of
red, pink, yellow, green, blue, white and brown.
3. limestone-is a sedimentary rock which is either oolitic, o r calcite cemented calcareous
stone formed of shells fragments, particularly non-crystalline in nature, it has no cleavage
lines and uniform in structure and composition. Dolomitic - a limestOne which is rich in
magnesium Carbonate and frequently somewhat crystalline in character and crystalline
limestone-is prodominantly composed of calcium or carbonate crystals it has high compressive and tensile strength. Very low in absorption, and has a smooth texture ..The color is a fairly uniform light gray.

24

4. Travertine-a sedimentary rock, composed mainly of calcium carbonate. It has been


formed at the earth's surface through the evaporation of water from hot springs. It is
used as an interior decorative stone because of its pleasing texture and its tendency to
show small, natural pockets on a cut surface.
5. Marble-Metamorphic rock, one that has been changed from its original structure in
this case, limestone and dolomite have been recrystallized to form marble. Famous types
are carrara parian. numidiam, onyx, vermont, colors are frQm yellow, white, shades of
gray tQ black, violet, red and green used for wall or column facing and for f loorinQ.
6. Serpentine -Igneous rock with the mineral serpentine. The mineral is olive green to
greenish black, but impurities may give the rock other colors, Used for interiors only due
to deteriotation from weathering.
7. Sandstone -a class of rock composed of cemented silica grains. Colors include gray,
buff, light brown , red. Texture range from very fi11e to very coarse and ~me are quite
porous with as much as 30 percerit of their volume composed of pores.
8. Slate rock -formed by metamorphosis of clays and shales deposited in layers. A unique
characteristic of the rock is the relative ease with which it may be separated into thin
tough sheets, called slates, 1I 4 in. or more thick. Slates are black. green, red, gray or
purple. Slate is commonly used for flooring, window sills and stools, stair treads, facing.

STONECONSTRUCTION
Stones are largely used as a facing material for large buildings with steel or concrete frames.
When used as a facing stonework may be divided into four categories.

1. Paneling - consists of using slabs of stone cut to dimension


and thickness to cover backup walls and provide a finished exterior.

2. Ashlar-work requires the use of cut stone and includes broken ashlar, irregular coursed
ashlar, regular coursed ashlar.

25

3. Rubblework - used as random when no attempt is made to produce either horizontal or


vertical course lines. Small spaces are filled with spalls, ~mall stones and used as cours:.
ed rubble work, horizontal coorse lines are maintained but no vertical course lines used.

4. Trim ...:....involves use f!llf stones cut for a SPecific purpose and include Quoin -stones laid at
the intersection of two walls. They are emphasized by using a contrasting color or type
and by projecting beyond the vertical plane of the wall. Usually they are laid so that they
appear alternately as !ong and short stones on each side of the corner.

as j11mbs-stones which form the sides of window and door openings.


as sills -stones which form the bottom of window and door openings.
as belts-special stone courses which are built into a wall for a particular purpose. One
reason is to provide architectural relief to a large wall of one material or to provide a break
in the vertical plane of the wall another reason is to hide a change in the wall thickness. All

26

Jamb stone

sills should have a wash or slope or the upper surface to provide for water run off. Sills
are also provided with a drip to prevent water from running back to the wall along the
uhderside of the sill.
11s Copings -one which

is cut to fit on tHe top of a masonry wall. It prevents the passage


of water into the wall, slieds water to either inside on outside, and gives a finished appearance to the wall.

cornices -specially cut stones which are built into and project from, a masonry wall
near the top to provide the appearance of a cave.

liS

27

as Lintels -stones which bridge the top of door and window openings.

. ~.
li"

.... . .. .. . . ..
411

II

.,

'~


..
1J

;,

'

A , .'

~ -L------~-------

as Stone Steps - made to fit over an inclined concrete slab or to cap steps cast in concrete.

as an Arch Stone - cut to form some particular type of arch over a door or window
opening.

as Stone Rooring ..... walks and patios, made by covering a base of stone concrete, brick
or tile with Flagstone. They may be random flagstones, Trimmed flagstone Trimmed rectangular and square.

28

GYPSUM
A soft mineral consisting of a hydrated calcium sulfate-from which gypsum plaster is made
(by heating); colorless when pure used as a retarder in port.land cement.

GYPSUM PRODUCTS

1. Plasters
a. Plastsr of hris-made from carefully selected white _rock ..~hen mixed with water
to form a paste, it sets in about _1~ to 20 minutes. It is used for small patching jobs on
plaster walls and for making molds; When lime putty is mixed, it makes a. plaster
finish coat which hardens fast and free from shrinkage cracks.
b . Keene's Cement -It gypsum is subjected to a temperature of 750F, it is completely
dehydrated. When this material is ground and alum added to it, it is known as keene's
cement. Used where sanitary conditions or exc~iye moisture makes it necessary to
specify a hard impervious, smooth surface since it is highly resistant to moisture penetration.
c. Casting Plaster - This plaster is made from specially selected rock and ground much
f iner than plaster of Paris. It is slower setting aOd cooler working, which make it
adaptible for ornamental molded plaster work.

d. Hard wall plsster- This is a neat gypsum plaster, containing hair or fiber, widely
used to form 'the first (scratch) coat and the second (brown) coat on plastered walls
and ceilings.

e. Cement bsnd plaster-intended for application to concrete surfaces. -Aimost any


finish plaster can be applied over th is coat.
f. Finish Plaster - This material is made specially to produce the finish (Putty) coat for
plastered surfaces. It has to be mixed with hydrated Ume putty and water.
g. Prspal'fld finish Plsster-req~ires only water. It contains no lime, so the plaster surface can be decorated as soon as it is dry.
h . Textul'fl Plster- Used when a rough surface is required.

29

i. Acoustical Plsster - calcined gypsum i~ mixed with a light weight-mineral aggre~


gate to make a type of finish plaster that has a high rate of sound absorption.
j. Joint filler- Uke texture plaster is used to make the plaster for filling nail holes and
-covering joints in gypsum wall board. Also used to make adhesive, used in laminating
two sheets of board together.
-- -

2. Gypsum Boards
a. Gypsum wsllb011rd-A fireproof sheathing for interior walls and ceilings . It is made
of a core of gypsum covered on each side by a heavy specially manufactured kraft
paper. The paper on the exposed surface is ivorycolored, while the back is gray. Used
to make partitions in which there is no framework, can also be applied directly to the
walt ffame of used over sheathing by a single or double nailing or scr8W-tastanlng
size iS 4 feet by up to 12 feet .-
-

b. Gypsum Lath - Agypsum core is covered on both sides with a heavy paper, but in
the case of lath , the same paper is used for both back and front, size 3/ 8" x 16"' x 48'"
packed in bundles. Used as a base for plaster, providing adhesion for gypsum plaster.
c. Gypsum Precsst Roof Decking - Precast from gypsum containing various types of
fiber are made in either the square-edged. plank from 4 to 6 feet or metal - edged
plank 10 feet long.

.. ... ... ___

"'!' -- 15'.

META~ EDGED G't'PSUM

PLANK

3. Gypsum Tile
a. Psrtitlon snd Furring Tile - made for specially calcined gypsum, to which is usually
add~ about 5 percent wood fiber in the form of chips and sometimes some perlite.
The wood fiber allows the tile to bind together better, while the perlite reduced the
. weight. Both solid and how tile are made, dimensions being 12 X 30 in width thickness .
from 2 to 6'".

30

b . Fireproofing Tile -made to cover steel members in a building to pro!ect them


against fire.

4. Gypaum Precast Wall Panels. -Made by casting in mold a panel consist of two outer
shells 5/ 8 in. thick reinforced with viscose fiber and separated by a core of hexagonal
cells, it is made 2 feet wide, 2 to 6 i,n. thick and up to 10ft. long. Each panel is tongue and
groove along its long edges to f9rm an interlocking wall.
LIME - Used in the making of the finish or putty coat for interior plaster. The lime used is
hydrated or slake lime which is mixed with water to form a plastic, putty like material to
which is added gauging plaster. The mixture is applied in a thin coat over the bare ~ter
and troweled to a smooth finish. The lime in the putty begins to recarbonate, and this
hardening continues slowly for a long period of time.

31

CHI' PTE~

WOOD
Wood is traditional building material, it is easily worked, has dural;)ility and beauty. It
has great ability to absot'b shocks from sudden load. In addition, wood has freedom from
rust and corrosion, is comparatively light in weight, and is adaptable to a countless variety of
purposes. .

Cl...lflcation of Trees
Trees generally f!!re.classified into two kinds:
1. Hatdwood8-'deciduous' trees that have broad leaves which are normally shed in
the winter time.

2. Softwood- 'conifers' trees that have needles rather than leaves and that bear their
seeds in cones.

Examplee of PHILIPPINE TIMBER


Four Categories:

a. First Group
Narra-,most expensive, .used for furniture and panelings, for expensive floorings,
door panels, stairs and plywood veneer or facings.
Yacal and Guijo-both hardwoods, used for posts and girders, or jambs attached tO
concrete and also for wooden decks having flooring and railings exposed to
weather.
Pine Benguet -SOftwood, used for panelings, sidings, flooring and furniture. Also
used for framings. trusses.
Tanguile and Apitong-the most common lumber in the market. Used generally for
fr:amings, joists, trusses, nailers, etc.
White and Red lauan-for framings, chests, jewel boxes
Kamagong-hardwood for chests, jewel boxes, stair ff'ames.
Oao-used for 'panelings and plywood veneer.
AJmaciga-simifar to pine for paneling.
Mahogany
lpil
Kalantas
Kalamansanai

Supa

b. Second Group
Acacia (rain tree) for wood carvings
Agoho
Oita
Oak
Phflippine Chestnut
Pili
Malabayabas
c. Third Group
Bakawan
Malakamias
Malasaging
Matamata

Nangka
Santol

d. Fourth Group

All other .....


ordinary wood s,8cies
.

MOISTURE IN WOOD
The moisture content of wood is_ usually expressed as a percentage of the oven-dry
weight and can be detennined by the oven-dry method or by an electric_.moisture meter
method.
For the oven-dry method, they should be cut the full width of the bOard and from 1/2 to
3/4 inches long. The sections should be cut at least 2 feet from the end of the board to eliminate a sample that may have end-dried: The pieces are weighed and the results recorded

as the, original weight. The samples are pfaced in an oven heated to 212F and left until all
the moisture has been removed. The weights are then checked several times until it is found
that the pieces are no longer- (osing weight, and are constant. The pieces are removed from
the oven and weighed immediately.
This result is recorded as the oven-dry weight. Then the moisture content can be cal
culated using this formula.
Moisture content

original weight - even-dry weight x 100


oven-dry weight

(tn percent)

Three (3) categories of Lumber

1-. Yard Lumber-Ufed for ordinary light construction and finishing work arid consists
of 1 and 2 in. material manufactured into common boards, shiplap, shelving dimension lumber (2 x 2 in to 2 x 12 in.) Center match, flooring, roof plank, siding, V-joint,
trim and molding of all kinds. These are usuaHy found in retail lumberyards.
Exsmples;

Tand G-tongue and groove (for flooring)


1,. X 4'", 1"' X 6" and 1'" X 8"

S- Cut -stone cut (for sidings)

1"x4", 1"x6"and 1"x8"

-,
V-cut

Lj

Bead

(for sidings)

"'51Z*(

Concave

Rizal Cut

r;J17llr?

mnf]))JD
1xs"

..._,..{ /2 tS

2'"x2"

2"x to

35

Mouldings

Convex

concav~

Quarter round

2. Shop Lumber-usually left in 1 in. and 2 in . rough thickness often containing knots
or defects not ordinarily permissible in other categories. It is intended for use in
shops or mills making sash, doors and cabinets where it will be cut into relatively
short pieces and the defective material discarded.

3. Structui'BI Lumber - is intended for use in heavy construction for load-bearing purposes and is cut into timbers of lluger size than yard lumber. 3 in. or more thick and 4
in. or more wide. It is made from the heartwood of the log.
Finishes of wood
- surfacing or planing of o.1e side
- two sides planed
- four side$ planed
- as sawn and not planed

Wood GRAIN

a . Edge grain-annual rings run approximately at right


angle to the face.

b. Flat grain-_when the annual rings run mbre or less


parallel to the surface.

c . Angle grain-when the annual rings are at about 45 to


theface.

SEASONING OF LUMBER
As clay is burned, steel is tempered, so lumb"r must be dried. Water content represents 30
to 100 percent or more of the dry weight of a b~rd . Two methods .for drying of lumber.

1. Air-drying -lumber is strip-piled at a slope on a solid foundation. This allows air to circulate around every piece while the sloping allows water to run off quickly.

36

.........

. 2. Kiln-drying IK.O.) more expensive lumber which is required for more refined uses so as
wood will not move, such as furniture. Flooring and general interior use. It must be dried
to a moisture content of not more than 5 to 10 percent. This is done in a dry kiln -a large
airtight structure, scientifically heated by steam pipes - in which the lumber is artificially
dried to the correct moisture content. K.D . takes days or weeks as opposed to sun dried
which will take months in a drying yard.

Treated Lumber

Pressure treated lumber-when lumber is subjected to pressure and injected with


chemicals or salts to insure it from rots.
a. wolmanized -wolman salt
b . tanalized
c. permanized
d. boliden
These are some patented pressurized lumber in the market.

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
The board foot, a piece of lumber 12 in. wide and 1 in. thick and one foot long is the unit of
measurement. 1" x 12"i < 1'-0" or 1 x 12/12 x 1'-0" = 1 bd. ft .

Example:

So

18 pes. - 1 " x 12" x 20 feet - 360 bd.ft.


18 pes.- 1" x 6" x 20 feet - 180 bd . ft.
Convert the width into feet by dividing into 12
18 - 2" x 8" x 24 feet
18 - 2" X 8/12 X 24 - 276 bd. ft .
22 - 3 X 10 X 18 - 990 bd. ft.

SPECIFICATION WHEN BUYING LUMBER


Indicate no. of pieces, thickness, width, length , total bd.ft . .kind of lumber and finish.
.
.
6 - 2" X 8" X 14'-0" = 112 bd. ft. tanguile S4S

Example:

GlUE lAMINATED TIMBER


Term used to describe a wooden member bu"ilt up of several layers of wood whose grain directions' are atl substantially parallel. And held together with glue as fastening commonly
used for beams, girders, posts, cOlumns, arches, bowstring truss chorps, usually softwoods
are commonly used because of their low cost, lightness and strength.

37

Advantages of Glue-laminated timbers


1. may be built up to any desired size from small components, easing up of transportation
facilities~

2. trees which are too small for production of large sawn timbers will produce material
which is perfectly satisfactory for laminated members.

3. low grade lumber can be used in sections of laminated timbers, reducing the overall
cost.
4. lumber to be used in laminating can be seasoned much more quickly and easily while in
small units .

5. laminated members are dry when erected resulting in the minimum amount of deflection
due to loading.

6. a camber or crown can be built into laminated timbers to take care of deflection due to
loading.

7. curved members such as arch ribs are easily made by bending thin sections to the reQuired curvature and laminating them.

8. it is possible to taper certain sections of a member in proportion to the diminishing


stresses, producing more graceful structure.

9. in general, variation in strength from one timber to arlother will be lela than with sawed
timbers.

10. subject to certain limitations, it is possible to use two or more speciel together combining advantages of economy of low strength species and superior qualities of highstrength wood.

Preparation and Arrangement of Laminations


Laminations should be dressed to uniform thickness to avoid thick . - ..lftes,
areas. When end joints have to be made; the e~ds should be scarfed

and end joints should be spaced

--

38

as show below.

JL+ ft.
r--.

--

'

Of

unglued

.,.

GLUE USE IN LAMINATING


a. casein glue- satisfactory for use in dry -lOcations not exposed to rain or water.
b. Ur:es-lormaldehyde resins - cheap al)d .well cure at from 70F up . Will withstand
soaking in cool water.
c. Phenol-formaldehyde-resin gfues :..... not usually recommended because of the
high temperature needed to cure them. Useful for combining timber and plywood
and are very water-resistant.
d. Resorcinol- phenol- f~rmaldehyde~- ~n _glu.es are expensive _but have excellent qualities of durability arid water resistance.

5TREG5ED Q<JN PANELS

39

BOXED BEAM

CURVED

GT~IG~T

r
TAP F-JC!ED

S"f'MM ET~\0\l..LY T~

LAMINATED BEAM5

LAMJNA'TED .ARCHES
40

:1

.CHAPTER

~ft.IILDING BOARDS
A group of sheets of building materials often faced with paper or vinyl, suitable for use as a
finished surface on walls, ceilings, etc. This group .of boards are all flat, relatively thin in section and have been made to standard sizes, usually 4 x 8ft. These building boards are made
of several materials and used for a variety of purposes.

KINDS OF BUILDING BOARDS


;~

1. Plywood

2~ 1-:fardw~oci

a: frisulating fiberboard
4. Chipboard
5. i,',article board
6. Gypsum board
7. Strawboard
8. Asbestos-cement board
9 .. Corkboard

10.

Paperboard

11 ...Mineral fiberboard
1~. Plr;~stic

foamboards

PROPERTIES OF WOOD
One of the main advantages of plywood is that it has good strength across as well as along
the panel. The more plies there are in a panel, the more nearly equal the strength in both directions will be.
The tendency to swell and shrink is neutralized to a large extent, because in plywood approximately half the wood grain runs in one direction and the other half at the right angles to
it.
Plywood has a greater r~istance to blows. than ordinary wood.
Plywood cannot be split in the plane of the panel because of its successive layers at right
angles to one another. Nails and screws can be driven very close to the edge of the panels
without danger of splitting.
Plywood can be bent more easily then ordinary wood of the same thickness. The radius of
curvature depends on the thickness of the panel and is limited by the strength of the outer
piles in tension and by the strength of the inner plies in compression.
Plywood offers innumerable possibilities for decoration because of the great variety of colors
and textures that can be produced on'the face piles.
Decorative effects also can be applied to the face ply by sandblasting, by pressure, or by
etching with wire brushes.

1. PLYWOOD
Plywood is made by bonding together thin layers of wood in a way th~t the grain of each
layer is at right angles to the grain of each adjacent laye.r.

42

"l!

t=::;::========:::::r;:~h2:.ro$b.at'ld~

Each layer of plywood is called a Veneer,and commonly made by rotary cutting-a method
of cutting wood veneer in ~hich a log is fixed in a lathe and rotated against a knife so that
the veneer is peeled from the log in a continuous sheet.

Waterproof glue is applied by machine to the face plies, core, and crossbonds. They are
assembled into plywood form and placed in hot presses which compress the veneers into
Solid.Sheela of approximately th8,;Riper thickness. At the same time the heat cures the glue,
a process whiCh takes trom 2 to 20 minutes.

TYPES OF PlYWGlOD
1. Marine plywood -absolutely waterproofed
2. Fancy plywood -non waterproofed for panellings and cabinets.
Narra bookmatched
Kalantas rotary cut
Ribbon grained tanguile
lal.Mif'l rotary cut
Dao bookmatched
Rosewood
Tanguile
3. Ordinary plywood
4. Form plywood
5. Pre-finished plywood paneling (Brand Danarra)
a. Paper-overlaid
b. Print~.:..comes in 14 color tones, no need to varnish or paint. Nailed through
V-grooves or glued. Comes in three pre-cut sizes and two series, the morocco
aeries and papyrus series.

43

bookmatched- the assembling of wood veneers from the same flitch so that successive
sheets are alternated face up and face down.

ribbon grained -a series of strips uniting several parts.


Sizes
Common size is 3 x 6 feet and 4 x 8 teet. Other panels special sizes are 3' x 7'. 4 x 6', 4 x 7'. 4'
X 9', 4' X 10', 5' X 8', 5' X 9' and 5' X 10'.
.
Thickness
6 mm
g mm
12 mm
15 mm
18 mm
25 mm

1 I 4 " - double walling


3 / 8 " - double walling
1 /2 " - drawers, shelves
5 / 8" - drawers, shelves
3 /4" - cabinet closet doors
1"
- cabinet closet doors

2. HARDBOARD
Made from processed wood chips . Chips of controlled size are subjected to high-pressure
steam in pressure vessels. When the pressure is released the chips " explode" and the cellulose and lignin are separated from the unwanted elements and then mixed into a homogenous mass and formed into a continuous board which is. cut up into convenient lengths.
These are pressed into uniform, hard, grainless sheets in heated presses. The'?'are smooth
on one side and with a overlap-like impression on the other side.
Three grades of board
a. Standard-flexible to be quite easily bent. It is light brown and is produced in thicknesses of 1/ 8, 3/ 16, 1/4, and 5/ 16 in .. Boards are 4 feet wide and are available in
lengths of 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 and 16 feet. This grade of hardboard is not suitable for
exterior work.
b. Tempered hardboard- is made by impregnated standard board with a tempering
compound of oils and resin and baking it to polymerize the tempering material.
Tempered hardboard is dark brown in color and is available in thicknesses of 1/8,
3/ 16, 1/ 4, 5/16 and 3/8 in . This board is brittle and stiff, has improved machining
qualities and much greater resistance to water penetration, making it suitable for exterior use-.
c. Low-density hardboard - Not as strong and durable as standard hardboard.
Some specially products of hard board

, . ~~~~:~?'

r:
..-::::'!
:~>~....

:_' _j
PLAIN

44

MOROCCO LEATHER

GTUCCO

r--,
~,.

:~

~1;

-..

.,

'
.

o :o o

(?. .:.. ,q'!:

''

,;

'

O:;j.o o

GROOVED BQ.o\RD

SAWALl

f='INE WEAVE

LOWER BQARO

LACE.

''

0 .Q

. o.. ?<. o o ci

'1.

.:':':t~l,
o o o .

OIAMONO~

0." 0

"

o~-to".

PERFORATED OR

DISPLAY.BOAAo

OR IF~

3. INSULATING FIBERBOARD
Made from three types of fiber-wood, sugar cane, and asbestos, and binder, formed into a
board.

a. Wood fibers are produced by pressing logs against a grindstone


which breaks down the wood into fibers or by making 5/8" chips
from logs and charging them into pressure vessels where they are
softened with live steam . They are then sheared to break chips
down into fibers.
Two basic grades of board are made :

a-1 Insulating grade -made up as insulating, decorative p(lnels, decorative ceiling tile, Vnotch plaster base, and roof insulation. Standard thicknesses are 1/2, 5/8, 3/4 and 1 in.
CAH~BOARO

a-2 Sheathing grade - Oroe having both surfaces and all edges
coated with asphalt and the other with the fibers impregnated
with asphalt during manufacture.

b. Cane fiberboards ismade by shredding cane and processing the fibers in much the same
Y"av as wood fibers.
c. Mineral fiberboard is made from asbestos fibers mixed with a cementing agent. This type
of board is used primarily for fireproofing and acoustical purposes.

45

4. CHIPBOARD
A large class of building board made from wood and particles and a binder, often faced with
veneer. Chipboard is made by binding phenolic resin or urea formaldehyde glue in the
form of a 4ft. wide ooard, length from 8to 16feet long with thicknesses 1/ 4, 5/ 16, 3/ 8, 1/ 2,
5/ 8, and 3/ 4 in.
Panefs.are made in two types, plain and pattemed. Plain panels may be unsanded, sanded
on one side, or sanded two sides. Patterned panels have one grooved surface, either evenly
spaced or random.
Chipboards are used both for interior and exterior which include sheathing for walls, and
roof, subflooring, fence panelling, and commercial exteriors and interiora. The board lends
itsetf to a range of stain and paint finishes, an advantage for interior use, while at the same
time, its weather resistance make it valuable as an outdoor material. Hardwood plywood can
also be laminated to chipboard for interior finishing panel.

5. PARTICLE BOARD
A ,hardboard made from relatively small particles. The particles are graduated from coarse at
. the center of the board to fine at the surface to help produce a product;with a smooth, dense
au~. 8oth aurfacae are sanded, and one lllrface.and the edges may be fined to provide a
still smoother denses surface for particular uses.
Common uses are floor underlay, using polyvinyl acetate adhesive-, divergent point staples
Qr annufar-grooved underlay flooring nails for fastening.
.
---~

..;.,.,.....

~-----.~ .-..;-"':.t:.'-
.-... ' ,..:

.
:P': ';..: ..,.,. .',"
~=~~}
::~~~
_,. __ : . .,.
.... .
. : ..,.,....
~

:_ , r-; ; : : '~,.:

:..:.,:_.. -' -

Also use for shelving, with fined edges, as core stoc k in


mfllwc.dt and furniture manufacturing, and as a base to which
may be applied wood veneers, plastic laminates, printed
wood grain patterns, chalkboard coating. Sizes are 4 x 8ft, 2
x 4ft, and 4 x 4ft. Thickness~ includes 1/ 4, 5/ 16,3/ 8, 1/ 2,
5/8, 1 1/16, 3/4 and 1 in .

--, "";.
-~

.-~

6. GYPSUM BOARD
A wall board having a gypsum core. One type is a pcard with a special paper face on which a
variety of wood-grain patterns may be printed. Such a board may be nailed with special colored nails, or glue laminated to an interior surface to produce a wood-grain effect.
Another type is a gypsum board faced with a vinyl sheet, made to imitate a textile surface.
This is.either glued in place or held by afuminum or plaStic moldings.

7. STRAWBOARD
A hardboard made of compressed wheat straw, processed at 350 to 400F and covered with
a tough kraft paper.

46

Two grades:

a. Structurttl boardt-is manufactured 2 in. thick, 4ft. wide and 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10ft.
long. It is used for nonbearing partitions,
exterior sheathing, roof decking, and as
wall forms.

as a plaster base, for insulating purposes

an inner form face for concret& basement

b. Insulation gl'tlde- also 2 in. thick and 4ft. wide but comes in 5 ft. lengths onty. It is
intended primarily for roof deck insulation.

8. ASBESTOS-CEMENT BOARD
A dense, rigid, board containing a high proportion of asbestos fibers bonded wiih portland
cement, resistant to fire, flame, and weathering, has low ;esistance to heat flow. Used as a
building material in sheet form and corrugated sheeting.
Flal boards are made 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. thick; 4ft: wide, and from 6 to 12 feet long.
Various types of corrugated sheets are made from the 5ame material.
All types of asbestos-cement boards must be drilled for the insertion of screws, bolts, or
other fasteners.

9. CORKBOARD
From the outer bark of the cork oaktree, cork granules is mixed with synthetic resin, compressed and formed into sheet from 1 to 6 in. thick and baked under pressure into rigid
boards.

The standard board length is 36 in. and widths are 12, 18, 24, and 36 in. Corkboard is used
almost exclusively for thermal insulating material and vibration control.

tT:'i .. ,

'

J~~;;;;::;;:::::--....

. ..
. . . .... .
...

10. PAPERBOARD
Made In two different types:
a. A paper rntfp pressed into boards 3 / 16, or 1/ 4 in. thick, 4ft. wide, and 6, 1 or 8ft.
long. Usually one surface is primed fpr ~er finishing.

b. A layer of stiff paper folded into corrugated form and faced on both sides with a
thick paper backing, cemented to the core.

zsz

:s: zI

47

11. MINERAL FIB.ERGROUND


.

Thick mats of mineral fibers, usually glass or rock wool are covered with a backing of stiff
paper on one or both sides to form rigid boards, ranging in thickness from 1/2 to 2 in . . The
usual board size is 24 x 48 in. These units are used for roofdeck insulation and are cemented
to the deck with asphalt adhe.sive.

12. PLASTIC FOAMBOARDS


Polystyrene and polyurethane P.lastics are formed by a patented process to about 40 times
their original volume. This foamed material is molded into boards fro'm 1/2 to 3 in . thick, 12
or24 in. w ide,and from 4 to 12ft. long. Used for perimeter insulation for concrete floor slabs,
for wall and roof-deck jnsulation, and for roof decks when properly supported.
These plastic boards have high insulation value and relatively high compressive strength,
and are flexiple enough to fit over curved surface.

BUILDING PAPERS
In building construction, paper is used for sheathing, roofing and insulation, in making
asphalt shingles, laminated and corrugated building products, and concrete form materials,
as a moisture and vapor barrier: as a cushioning material; as wall-paper; as an envelope or
sheathe for other materials; and as a fireproofing material.
Most paper is made from cellulose fibers which comes from w ood pulp , but wastepaper. jute
waste, Manila hemp, rags, straw and bagasse (cane and corn stalks) are also utilized.

TYPES OF WOOD PULP


produ~ed by grinding blocks of wood against a
revolving abrasive stone or by grinding steamed wood chips in a grinding mill.

a. Mechlutical Pulp -or groundwood, is

b. Chemical pulp -produced by digesting wood chips in various chemicals to free the
cellulose fibers from the liquid binding.
c. Semi-chemical pulp -wood chips are first subjected to a mild chemical treatment and
then mechanically disintegrated in rotating disk refiners.

TYPES OF PAPER
1. Sheathing paper - paper used to provide an airtight barrier over walls, floors etc .

Two Types:
a. Plain psper-either a low-cost paper made from a mixture of semichemical pulp and
waste paper or a tough paper made from kraft pulp.

b. ASfMhlllt lmpregltlltfld orcosted felt or kf'llft PllfiM-varioos amounts of asphalt


are used per hundred square feet of paper so that papers of various weights are
made, from 4 to 10 lb. per square. These are what is known as breather papers. impervious to water but not to water vapor .

..

2. Roofing Paper
a. Roofing felts-those which are used in making a built-up roof and are ~sually produced in 36 in. wide rolls, in various weights from 3 to 20 lb. per square.

48

b. Relle~ roofing -a heavy, mineral surfaced paper used as a final roof covering,
made 18 and 36 in. wide, in various weights from 45 to h20 lb. per square.

3. Insulating Paper
The primary objective in the production of this type of-paper is to secure bulk and entrapped air with as much strength as possible. Insulating papers are made both from.

a. We_a d-fiber insulating paper -- is made from groundwood or bagasse with some
wastepaper pulp added. The paper is usually gray, produced in 36 in. wide rolls,
weighing about 9 lb. per square. It is used for insulating walls, ceilings and floors.

b. Asbestos fibers -a soft, pliable paper used for insulating p1pes carrying steam ,
boilers, and other vessels w ith high temperatures. It is produced in various weights
from 5 to 10 lb. per square . a heavier asbestos-felt paper is prortuced for use as a
built-up roofing material. It is saturated with asphalt and producerl in rolls 36 in. wide
weighing approximately 15 lb .. per square.

4. Cushioning Paper
Similar to wood-fiber insulating paper, but less attention is paid to strength . Its Ghief use
is for cushioning under linoleum , carpets, or slate roofing .

5. Vapor-Barrier Paper
These paper, which are intended to prevent the passage of moisture vapor through
walls, ceilings and floors, are made in three different types.
a. Wsxf!d papsr-made from strong light kraft in three grades commonly known as x,
XX , XXX.

b. Two thicknesses of paper laminated together with a film of asphalt. Two kinds of
paper is used - One is a kraft paper, the other, a mixture of ground wood pulps,
treated by the sulfite and the kraft methods .
c. A sheet of kraft paper laminated to copper foil by an asphalt f ilm. This is a heavy duty
material used for vapor barrier and tor flashing.

6. Laminating Paper
This is a special, high strength kraft paper made for use in the production of plastic laminates. The thin, strong paper is impregnated w ith liquid _plastic resin and several sheet
are laminated together under heat and pressure to form the- base for the plastic sheet.
:...
' '

7. Concrete Form Paper

a. A form made from strong kraft paper in the form of a spiral tube . These are used as
column forms and as ducts and core forms in concrete floors.

b. A boxlike form made from corrugated container paper. This is unbleached kraft paper
sized with resin and coated with wax sizing and starch to make it abrasion resistant.
These forms are used in forming ribbed concrete slabs.

8. Wallpaper
Paper from which decorative wallpaper is made. This is produced in two grades.

a. No. 1 hanging-made from bleached sulfite or bleached soda pulp, mixed with not
more than 20 percent high-quality groundwood. Talc is used as a filler, rosin and
sodium silicate as sizing. The paper is coated with a clay film bound to the paper with
case in, and the design is printed over the clay coating.
b. No.2 hanging - from 72 to 90 percent ground wood and the rest unbleached sulfite.
Little filler is used, but the paper must be sufficiently sized to stand the application of
water paste without wetting or breaking through.

9. Envelope Paper
Paper is used as an outer covering or envelope for a number of building materials. One
of these is gypsum board, composed of a layer of calcined gypsum covered in both sides
by a sheet of kraft paper. A number of insulating materials are enveloped in a kra'ft paper
cover, sometimes plain , sometimes asphalted.
10. Fire Proofing Paper
Made from asbestos fibers, since this is an incombustible material. The material maybe
in the form of matted paper, similar to asbestos insulating or roofing paper, or it may be
in the form of a bloth woven from thread spun from asbestos fibers.

50

CHAPTER

BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
BITUMEN

A generic name applied to a semisolid mixture of complex hydrocarbons, derived from coal
or petroleum, as a coal-tar pTtch or a~phalt.
Tar - the resulting condensate when destructive distillation is carried out on sikh materials as wood coal, shale, peat or bone.

r:

Pitch -a solid or semi-solid residue produced from partial evaporation or fractional dis. tillation of tar.
Coal-tar
common material of this kind of pitch.
,..... .. . pitch-most
. r
~~phal~s - dark

brown or black solids or ~emi -solids which are found in the natural
state and are also produced by the refming of petroleum.

Bitumens are useful in construction industry since it has the tendency to adhere to a
solid surface. It has good water resistance.

TYPES OF BITUMENS
1. Tar and Pitch - made by the distillation of coal. Tar is used to saturate felt paper and to
coat kraft paper to render it waterproof. The coal -tar pitch is used in making pitch and
gravel built-up roofs.

2. Asphalt-asphalt used results from the refining of naphtha crude oils. which produce
aviation grade gasoline, fuel oil, cold test lubricating oils. and asphalt. The properties of
this residual , known as straight run asphalt, depend on the nature of the crude oil from
which it was refined and the conditions of refining.
Three main gro!JpS of asphalt products produced from straight-run asphalts.

1. hot asphalts, those softened by heat.

2. Cutback asphalts, 'those dissolved in mineral solvents.

3. emulsion asphalts-those dispersed or suspended in a water base.

USES OF BITUMENS
.. ,. Adhesiveness and water proofing qualities, along with IQ$f cost, make bitumens useful as a
protective agent in built-up roofing, prepared roofing, and prepared siding. They are used as
water proofing and damproofing agents and as vapor barriers. In addition, they are widely
used as adhesives and Sealants.

The forms in which bitumen is used for any of these purposes depends on the quality and
characteristics d~sired.
a. ~a!urated felts:-used in built-up roofing, as a base for prepared roofings and
stdr~gs, as a membr_ane for ~ater proofing, and as underlays for floors-require a
parttcular grade of bttumen. The asphalt commonly used in the preparation of such
felts has a softening point of approximately 140F and a penetration value of 50.
b. ~repared roofing products are coated with asphalt after being saturated. The coattng grade asphalts used are generally no. 1 cutbacks with softening point of from 200
to 240F.

52

.. ......
c. As waterproof coating for walls and to make waterproof membranes in buildings and
other structures.
d. Used in the manufacture of sealants, acoustical coatings paints, floor tile and mastic
flooring, wt)erein mineral matter is added.
e.. Used as a binder for aggregates in pavements, the asphalt is made into liquid by
heating, cutting with sotvent, or by emulsifying with water and in its capacity as a
cement, mixed with gravel , crushed stone and sand.
Liquid Paving Asphalts-liquid asphalts used for paving are cutbacks. When gasoline is
used as a solvent, a rapid curing liquid .asphalt is the result; kerosene, medium curing
asphalt; a heavier fuel oils produce a slow-curing asphalt.
Asphalt paving cements -used as binders for more expensive asphalt pavements.

53

CHAPTER

FERROUS AND NONFERROUS METALS


FERROUS-metal in which iron is the principal element.
NONFERROUS -containing no, or very little iron.

I. FERROUS METAL
Steel - a malleable alloy of iron and carbon produced by melting and refining pig iron and / or
scrap steel, graded according to. the carbon content. Other elements such as manganese and
silicon may be included to provide special properties.
Produce by three basic raw materials, iron ore, and limestone. (coal is converted into coke in
coke ovens} Five particles of all three basic ingredients of steel, which otherwise would be
waste, are blended and burned on a moving gate to cause the formation of clinkers. These
are catted sinter, a high-grade blast-furnace charge material.
From These, raw materials which is melted into ingots place in molds, a great variety of products used .in construction are made. They include:

.1. Rolled structural shapes


2. Rods
3. Bars
4. Plates
5. Pipe
6. Wire

7. Bolts

8. Rivets
9. Nails
10. Sheet Steel
11 Others

Cold - rolled sheets are glavanized (given a zinc coating). Pig iron is used to make cas1
iron which is high in compressive strength but low in tensile strength, and has little use for
construction. However since it is cheap and easy to cast, it is used for pumps, motors,
c;ngines and because of its corrosion resistance it is used for pipes to some extent.
Wrought iron is produced when pig iron is metted in such a way as to remove nearly all of
the carbon and other impurities. It is eaily worked and is tough and ductile. It's main use~
are for roofing sheets, wire and metal ornaments.
Alloy steels are made by combining others elements with the molten steel. Nickel,
chromium copper and manganese are used.
Nickel steel is stronger than carbon steel and is used to make structural members for
buildings chromium steel is very hard and corrosion-resistant.
Stainless steels are made with chromium or a combination of nickel and chromium used in
buildings for exterior wall panels, frames for doors, expansion joints, flashings, copings,
fascia and gravel stops.
Copper - bearing steel has high resistance to corrosion and is used for making sheet steel
and metal lath.
Manganese steel -offers great resistance to abrasion and finds important use in the cutting edges of heavy digging tools.
Weathering steel-recently developed grade of steel. It forms its own protection against
atmospheric corrosion and thus requires no painting. It also undergoes a unique color
transformation during the weathering process, from orange to brown and finally to blUegray. This is used on bridges, buildings and other applications.

56

STEEL PRODUCTS
1. Rolled Structural shapes

wrre FLANGr!
/10.:

T
T

L
ANGLE

J: -BEAM

2. Sheet pifing -sections are made to interlock and are available in several

shape~

3. Steel pipe -seamless or welded. small diameter pipe and electrically welded large dia
meter pipe.
*seamless pipe made by forcing a solid hot rod over a pointed mandrel to
form a hollow tube.
* either hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel strip called skelp, can be used to make
resistance-welded pipe or tubing. Coils of skelp are welded together end
to end, and rolls form the strip into a continuous cylinder.
A large diameter pipe is made by having plates with proper width, beveled
edges and placed in a press wl1ich forms them into cylinders. The two
edges are welded together and the pipe is brought to its final diameter by
hydraulically expanding the welded sheet against a retaining jacket .

..

4. Reinforcing steel-made from new steel or from discarded railway-car axles or rails.
ReiRforcing steel comes in plain or deformed bars, that is, bars which have lugs or deformations rolled on the surface to provide anchorage in concrete.

OR

SIZES-start with no. 2 or 1/4 in. (divide a number of bar by 8 to get the equivalent in
inch diameter).
No.2 = 2/8" or 1/4" 0
=
No. 3 = 3/ 8" - 3/ 8" 0
No.4 = 4/8" or 1/2" 0
No. 5 = 5/8" - 5/8" 0
No. 6 = 6/8" or 3/4" 0
No.7 = 7/ 8" - 7/ 8" 0 No. 8 = 8/8" or 1" C!f
=
No. 9 = 9/8" or 1 1/8" 0 =

8mm
10 mm
12 mm
16 mm
20mm
22mm
25mm
3omm

5. Welded W ire Fabric - another type of reinforcing material. lt consists of parallel, longitudinal wires welded to transv~rse wires at regular intervals. (cold drawing process)

6 in x 12 in x 1 0/4
(i>

First .Figure spacing of longitudinal bar.

Secol")d Figure spacing of transverse wire.


Third Figure gauge of16ngitudinal bar.

1
'1.''

.....,

04

cF-1

58

Fourth Figure gauge of transverse wire.


in rolls-5 to 6 feet wide and up to 200ft. long
in sheets- up to 32ft. long, not usually over 8ft. wide .

6. Steel Wire -over 150,000 uses for wire including pins, needles, nails, bolts, cables,
piano wire, fences.

7. Bolts and Nuts ..._ (either hot forged or cold-formed from wire of the appropriate diameter). For.. bolts, wire is fed in~o .an automatic bolt-makiQ..o m(!~hine which cuts to
length heads, trims, points, and, in many cases rolls the thread .

8. Steel strapping-made from high-tensile flat wire in a number of sizes. Used for banding column forms to keep them from bulging under the pressure of freshly poured concrete. A tightener tightens it and the .two lapped ends is sealed.

9. Open web steel joists -lightweight w,arren-type trusses made in several different
styles .

59

10. Sheet Steel -black and galvanized, can be used to manufacture corrugated roofing
and siding and formed steel decki'ng. Corrugated sheets have one edge turned up, one
~urned down .

Comes in 27 1/2" wide and lengths .5 ft . up to 12ft. Siding sheets are made with both
edges turned in the same direction.

il
Corrugated roofing sheets are also utilized as decking for flat roofs with light loads. In
such
the corrugated deck is used as a base on which to"pour a concrete slab oras a
base for a built-up roof.

cases

Formed-steel decking is produced in a variety of shapes and styles using various thicknesses of metal. from 12 to 22 gauge and sections are made in spans of from 4 to 36
feet.

Two basic styles are open-faced decking and cellular decking which allow easy distribution of electric systems and outlets.

J! 1

OPEN -!=AGED

CELLULAR

11 . Steel studs -lightweight, reqUirtng minimum storage space and does not warp or
shrink. Fasteners do not pop, and joints stay c~osea. Much faster to install than woodstud installation. Available in 1 5/8, 2 1/2 and l' 5/8 inches .
Plumbing stacks and electrical components fit easily into a steel-framewall.

12. Pans and domes - manufactured for use in forming one-way and two-way ribbed concrete floor systems.

60

..

..

MOULDS

HAPE OF CONCRETE CEILING


~ GEEN BELOW

II. NONFERROUS METALS


ALUMINUM -Its ore, bauxite, requires 10 kilowatt hours for each pound of metal aluminum extracted. The reddish brown ore is washed and treated in a soda solution to yield a
chalky-white powder called alumna, containing a high concentration ot aluminum.
Aluminum is a lustrous, si:ver-white. nonmagnetic: lightweight metal which is very malleable; has good thermal and electrical conductivity; a good reflector of both heat and light. In
construction, most aluminum is used in alloy form (manganese to increase strength, silicon
or magnesium producing alloy which have good corrosion resistance, also copper and zinc
to produce alloy with high strength to-weight ratios} because of added strength; further
strengthened by heat treatment; used in extrusions, castings and sheets. Excellent resistance to oxidation; often anodized for better corrosion resistance, surface hardness, and/ or
architectural color requirements.
Structural shapes are used as structural members in building construction. in the same
way that steel structural members are used.
Architectural shapes are widely used for door and window jambs, curtain-wall, panel
frames; thresholds; treads, handrails; door and window stiles, rails, muntins and bars.

DOOR RAIL

tu81NG

One of the advantages of the extr.usion fabricating process is that components for certain parts of a building may be designed to interlock.

61

Sheet aluminum, plain sheets are used for flashing, roofing, roof drains, chimney caps,
air ducts, louver blades, etc .
To improve its appearance and to increase its resistance to weather and corrosion, A
treatment called Anodizing is done. This is a combined electrical and chemical process,
which hardens anci increases the thickness of the natural oxide coating on aluminum and to
provide a ha rd, noncorrosive, electrolytic, oxide film on the surface of aluminum or other
met<Us, by electrolytic action.

Such anodized sheets are used for shingles siding, curtain wall panels, and acoustic
ceilings.

Aluminum Foil - used as a vapor barrier on w alls and ceilings and as reflective insulatiofl.

Copper ...:.. a lustrous reddish metal , highly ductile and maUeable; has high tensile strength, is
an excellent electrical and thermal conductor, is availabfe in a wide variety of shapes; widely
used for downspouts, electrical conductors, flashings, gutterS, roofing, etc.
Copper alloys are brasses, and bronzes.,which contain primarily zinc and tin, respectively, and the alloys containing nickel.
Brasses are used in architectural and hardware applications. Bronze are used rn the production of springs:
Lead -a soft, malleable, heavy metal; has low melting.point and a high coefficient of thermal expansion. Very easy to cut and work, enabling it to be fitted over 'uneven surfaces.
Used fCir roofing, flashing and spandrel wall panels.

Tin -a lustrous white, soft and malleable metal having a low melting point; relatively unaffected by exposure to air; used for making alloys and solder and in coating sheet metal.

62

CHAPTER

GLASS
A hard brittle inorganic substance, ordinarily transparent or translucent; produced by
melting a mixture of silica, a flux and a stabilizer; while molten, may be blown, drawn, rolled,
pressed or cast to a variety of shapes.
Giass has no definite melting point . When it is heated, it first softens so that it can be bent.
Further heating brings it to the point when it becomes thick, syrupy liquid, a state in which it
can be worked. Fif.!ally at still higher temperatures it becomes a thin, watery liquid .

MANUFACTURING
1. SHEET GLASS (ordinary window glass)
The raw materials, sand, soda and limestone, are first ground to a fine state and mixed in
the proper proportions. This mixture, known as frit, is tied into the filling end of a furnace
and melted. Sometimes, cullet (broken glass) is also fed in to the furnace.
To form the glass into a sheet, it first passes from the furnace tank into a drawing kiln,
from here it is drawn up in the form cif a sheet into a series of rollers. These sheets of flat
drawn glass are cooled slowly in a cooling chamber known as annealing lehr. This type of
glass is used where vision is required but where cost is an important factor. The surface is
good but never free from distortion as the two surfaces of the sheet are not perfectly parallel.

2. PLATE GLASS
A high quality glass sheet of the same chemica! composition as sheet glass. Plate glass
can be produced in thicknesses of from 1/ 8 to 1 1/ 4 in~ alth~gh the special thick glasses
ate usually cast rather than made by the continuous flow pro~ess. This is special because
both surfaces of the 100 in. wide ribbon of glass is simultaneously grinded by a twin
grinder unit, then when cut is polished w ith a jeweler's rouge to give undist.orted, clear
vision and reflection.
3. FLOAT GLASS
A f lat glass produced by a new process. It combines the fire-finish of sheet with the perfect flatness of plate frit, the usual combination of raw materials is melted in an oil or gasfired furnace. The melted glass leaves the furnace and passes to a float bath where it is
supported on molten tin. Gravity keeps the liquid tin very flat, and heat, applied from
above melts out any irregularities in the glass, which is free to conform to the perfectly
flat til). As the ribbon of glass passes through the float bath, the heat is reduced until the
glass is sufficiently hard to be fed on to the rollers of the lehr w ithout marking the
undersurface. After leaving tl)e lehr, the glass is cut into long lengths. This process is
suitable for thicknesses of 1/8, 3/16, and 1/ 4 in.

TYPES OF GLASS
1. REFLECTIVE GLASS
Used to control glare and reduce solar heat. It is the product of a glass-coating process
which is carried out in a large, rectangular vacuurri 'chamber. The glass is coated with
micro-thin layers o f metallic films which provide the performance characteristics of the
glass. It reduces solar heat gain by reflecting the sun's energy, resulting in savings in initial and operating costs of air conditioning. The reduced light transmission also diminishes interior glare and brightness . .

64

Manufactured in two types, silver and gold, the glass can be specified in any one of three
nominal light transmittances of 8, 14, or 20 percent. A chrome coating provides silvery
outdoor reflections and creates a cool effect during the ~aytime, while being neutrally
transparent from the inside. At night. the glass "reverse" itself by being transparent from
the outside and semireflective from the inside.
2. ROLLED AND ROUGH CAST GLASS
Similar to the process of making plate glass. Glass of this type is used where clear vision
s not reqUired, such as by factory roofs and walls, windows for halls and staircases, sky
lights, and partitions in offices. Cast glass diffuses light, and because of its low reflecting
and absorption index, transmits 90 to 93 percent of light rays striking it.

3. CATHEDRAL AND FIGURED GLASSES


Manufacturing is similar to rolled and rough cast glasses. However, they contain a pattern or texture impressed usually on one surface by a patterned roller. Thicknesses vary
from 1/8 to 3/8 in. stock widths, from 40 to 50 in. with lengths up to 100 in.
Example of pattern glass

WALIN6 WAL.IfiG RS

LUNINGNING R4

AURORA R1

OAHUA RZ.

5AMPAGUITA ~

4. WIRED GLASS
Simply a rolled glass into which wire mesh is inserted during the process of manufacture.
The' wire greatly inqreases the resistance to shattering through impact wired glass as
made in thicknesses of 7/32, 1/4 and 3/8 in. Stock widths 47 to 49 in. and lengths up to
178 in. are produced.

65

5. HEAT-ABSORBING PLATE GLASS


This glass is made by adding ingredients to the mix used in making regular slate glass so
that the finished product is pale bluish-green or gray. Because of its chemical composition, this glass absorbs a significant percentage of the sun's radiant energy, thus reducing the build up of heat within the building . Its color and the fact that it possesses lower
light transmission than regular plate means that glare and brightness in the room are
reduced. This type of glass is quite widely used for glazing in office buildings, schools,
and hospitals.

6. TEMPERED PLATE GLASS


Three to five times as strong as regular plate. of. the same thickness - and area in resisting
compressive forces and fracture due to strain ()r thermal shock. It is made by reheating
and suddenly .cooling plate glass . As a result, the outer surfaces are under high compressive stress, while the center portion remains in tension. This produces a condition that is
highly resistant to breakage. Tempered plate glass is used for swinging doors, sliding
patio doors. windows in gymnasiums and sports areas, skating rink enclosures, etc.
Available in thicknesses of 1/ 4, 3/ 8, 1!2, 5/ 8, 3/ 4 and 1 in.Sizes of sheets vary with the
thickness, but the normal maximum size is 96 x 120 in.

7. VITREOUS COLORED PLATE


Polished plate glass can be heat-strengthened and coated on one side with vitreous color
which is fire-fused to the surface. The result is an opaque glass which is widely used in
curtain wall construct ion, store fronts, showrooms, laboratories and industrial buildings.
It should not be used as a glazing material but instead should be applied against a backup
of masonry or have some type of insulative backing. Normal thickness is 1/4 in.; maximum standard size, 72 x 120 in.

8. LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS (Bullet proofing)


Widely used in the automotive industry and transportation, but now finding some uses in
the building industry, like glass that can withstand firearm attack and explosions. This is
made of two thicknesses of plate or sheet glass bonded by a thin, tough layer of polyviJ:~yl
butyral resin, a transparent plastic.
Safety glass made from sheet glass Is produced in thicknesses of 9/64, 7/32, 15/64, and
1/ 4, maximum size of 7 sq. ft. for 9/ 64 thickness and 15 sq. h. for the rest.
Safety glass rnade from plate glass in produced in thicknesses of 1I 4, 3/ 8, 1 / 2, 5/8, 3/4,
7/8 and 1 in. Units of all thicknesse.s are made in a miximum size of 72 x 138 in.

a r.ect~l.ar ~tal ~~r s22lRA to tkB g~~


.an.d ~ by .ac;t..31n!k6 MI fram.e . A y2'':
~~~of M1yJr~ 31r 1~ 12ft briWUI'l ~ 'V+
or 4/s 111 . ~h.,~t.

66

...... '

9. INSULATING GLASS

This consists of two sheets of plate or sheet glass, separated by an air space, and joined
around the edges to produce a hermitically sealed unit.
There are three methods of sealing and all these sealed units provide thermal insulation
and greatly restrict condensation . They reduce external noise but stilt permit the entry of
natural light.

- Fused Gitis

an electrically fused all glass edge


sheet glass 3/ 32 or 1/ 8 in thick is used
with an air space of 3/ 16 in.

--lead

use of a strip of lead sealed to the


edges of the glass.

CLASSIFICATION OF SHEET GLASS


1. Window glass - used for gtazmg w1ndows doors and storm sash in residential buildings
where good light and vision are required at moderate cost. ihicknesses are 0.085 to 0.01
in. and 0.115 to 0.133 in.
2. Heavy sheet glass - used for glazing windows and doors where greater strength is required but where slight distortion is not objectionable . Commonly used for display cases,
shelving, window ventilators furniture tops and jalousies made of two thickrlesses 3/ 6
and 7/ 32.

3. Picture glass -used for covering pictures, photographs, maps, charts projector slides
and instrument dials. Thickness vary from .043 to 0.053 in., O.o58 to 0.068 in. and 0.07 to
0.08 in.

JALOUSIE

67

...
GLASS PRODUCTS
I. GLASS BLOCKS
Compa_rable in many ways to unit masonry bi.Jt have the
added feature of transmitting light. They are made into
separate halves, which are heat-sealed together to
form a hollow unit with reasonably high thermal efficiency
and sound insulation. The edge surfaces of the block are
coated with a gritty mortar bond.

two

Two types:
1. Functional blocks -direct or diffuse the daylight which passes through them to improve the illumination of the building interior.

Three styles of functional blocks:


a. A light directing block-directs incoming light upward toward the ceiling. Used
always above eye level.
b. A light diffusing block -diffuses incoming light evenly throughout the interior of
the room.

c. General purposes block


Size-S x 8 in. and 12 x 12 in. 4 in. thick

2. Decorative or architectural glass -available in a wide range of styles and patterns.


These glass masonry units provide almost unlimited design versatility when used in
window, openings and facades, as interior walls and divider paneling. Also used for
ceilings. Method of attachment is by gluing to a plywood background using rugby.
II. SOLID GLASS BRICK
Also made to admit light into a building, because of its solid construction, it offers greater
protection against vandalism than conventional window glass or glass blocks. The ability
of the brick is to allow undistorted passage of light.
Sizes 6 x 6 in., 8 x 8 in., 12-x 12 in., and 4 x 12 in.

68

...
MILWAUKEE INTERNATIONAL MARKETING) INC .
.

"DECO-LIT~.. Ard1~r.al mtrror


Gr~ :. 11 Yz''x 11 1/~"
AVail a~ 1t1 it!b foUOwtt1g ~IQMG :

NSI! 105

N~ 303

Net 501

StU: z4x ~,. (t'x3') pia111

Two

ty~ .
69

BJ:atk :arzhlt&.turJI m1rrZJr

Whlt~ :arLhrtAt:furJjf
>IU : 11Vi'x 11Y2.'' .

mtrmr

~50 2JV211~fk Z4''x 36'' (.~ox .go) p/21n wrthout


k~1gn

A 21 8t US. JALOUSIE- GRILL


JALOUSIES
MQOF SlATS

STANOARO HEIGHT GLASS

OR WOOD
4

s
6

7
8
9

10
If
12

14"7/8 10
,. .. 3/8..
21 7/811
2&11a
28- 718.
:a- 3/8.
357/8"
31318"
42-ue

TWO LEVERS

.,;

13
14
15

..a-~18

16
17
18

K-718 11

as-w

soMt'

21

a - 718..
7-v8
70-'t/811
74- lf8.

22

77"718

18

20

70

718 11

23

81"3/8.

24
25

847/8 11

26
21'
28

lt-7/Jr
H-v8

ee-318"

ue

CHAPTER
..

o -~~@J~~~(~ ~rm~

~(~@J'ir~[Q) [p~(Q)~ (W(blr~

PLASTICS
A large group of synthetic materials which are made from a number of common sub
stances such as coal, salt, oil, natural gas, cotton; wood and water. From these, relatively
simple chemicals known as monomers, which are capable or reacting with Qne another are
produced . These are then builtup into chainlike molecules of high molecular weight called
polymers.
These polymers has low extensibility, can be molded, extruded cut, or worked into a
great variety of objects, rigid or non rigid, relatively light, whi~h are formed by condensatiQO
polymerization and py vinyl polymerization.
Plastic can be hard-soft, clear or opague., light or heavy, some are heat resistant and
some softened by hot water.
Two general classifications
1. Thermoplastics...: become soft when heated and hard when cooled. regardless of
the number of times .the process is repeated. Included in the thermoplastics are
acrylics cellulosis~ polyethylene, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) polysterene, polyallomers
polycarbonates, polyimide, polypropylene, polysulfone, phenylene oxide, nylons,
methyl pertenes,Jonomer;fluoroplastics,acetal and acryonitrilebutaqieniene sly_rene
lABS).
2. Thermosetting Plastics -set into a permanent shape when heat and pressure are
applied to them during the forming stage. Thermosetting group includes phenolics,
aminos (urea and melamine) epoxies, polyesters, polyurethane, alkyd silicones and
diallyl phthalate (OAP).

PRODUCTION
Plastic.products are formed by a number of methods which include:
a. Injection Molding Process - measured amount of powder or granules is heated
and when flowing forced through. the nozzle of the barrel into a shaped cavity,
Where it cools of solidities. (gears, knobs, wastebaskets)
b. Blow-Molding Process-an extruder extrudes a hollow tube which is captured
between the two halves. of a hollow mold. As the mold closes, air is blown into the
tube and expand it t o tit the inside surface of the mold. (water cans and bottles}
c. Rotational Molding -Used to form hollow units with complex shapes and heavy
walls, a premeasured amount of powder or liquid resin is placed at the bottom
half of a cold mold which is then closed. The mold is rotated horizontally and vertically to distribute the material evenly over the inner mold surfaces, passed through
an over to heat and cure the plastic cooled, and finally opened to eject the product.
(Typical products are tanks and heater ducts).

d. Expandable Bead Molding -a process used to produce light weight products of


polysterene foam, small granules of polysterene with a small amount of an expanding agent are praced in a rolling dtum and steam heated. heat softens the granules,
and the expanding agent enlarges their size. When they reached their required size,
they are cooled, apd the expanded beads are transferred to a closed mold where
they are heated by steam. This softens them again, and they fuse together into a
block tFlotation equipment,. shipping containers and insula~ions are typical products).

72

e. Compression Molding-A measured quantity of powder is placed in a heated


mold, which is then closed. Heat and pressure are applied to the powder which
melts and flows to all parts of the mold.
There it sets and is removed from the mold to cool. Thermosetting plastics are formed by this method, tand radio, television chassis, handles and knobs are typical products).
f. Transfer Molding-similar to compression .molding except that the powder is
heated and liquified outside the mold and injected into the mol.d under heat and
pressure, where the forming and setting takes place. Phenolic is the most common
used plastic.
g. Foamed Plastics -are made by expanding agent with either granules or powder
and then heating it. Heat melts the plastic and causes the formation of a. gas which
expands the molten material into a foamed structure. It is quickly cooled to set the
material in its expanded state (upholstery, insulation and packaging fill}.
h. Thermoset Foam- Made by mixing the appropriate resin with a curing agent and an
.expanding agent and then heating them in a mold. The heat activates the expanding
agent and subsequently the cuFing agent so that the expanded material is set in that
state. (Usual products are thermal insulation shock absorbing pads, mattress pads
and furniture curshions).

i. Extrusion Forming- Used for mass-produced materials which have a constant


cross section, and it is done in two ways by forcing of semiliquid plastic through a
die of the proper size and shape in a manner similar to that used for forming brick by
extrusion. (Tubes, rods, water hose, drainpipes house siding and molding trim are
formed in this way}.
The other extrusion method involves forcing wire, cable or cord through a die
along with the plastic so that the material emerges with a plastic coating.
j. Thermoforming process-sheet plastic is heated until soft and then forced by air
pressure against a cold and hardens in shape (typical products include domed skylights, refrigerator liners, cups etc.t

k. laminating Process-consists of impregnating sheets of paper, glass fiber, or


cloth with a thermosetting liquid resin and then applying heat and pressure to a
number of sheets to form a laminated product. (Plain and patterned wall paneling,
table top material and industrial laminate board)

I. Casting -a simple proc~ss in which liquid plastics, with their appropriate curing
agents, are poured into molds and set, with or without heat. (typical casting products are pipes, rods, sheets).
m. Calendaring Process -plastic is fed to revolving rollers which turn out a thin sheet
or film the thickness of the product is dete~mined by the roller spacing, and-the surface of the sheet may be smooth or matted, depending on the roller surface.
In a somewhat similar process paper, metal, fabric, ceramics or other plastics
are passed between roller which apply a plastic coating to one or both surface.

USES IN CONSTRUCtfON
Some plastic products are used as structural or semi-structural components, some as
auxiliarv materials and some as one of the components of a composite material.
a. Structural-a common plastic product used for this purpose is a glass. fiber reinf?rced corrugated sheet, made from acrylic, polyvinyl chloride, or p01yester. These
plastics are not only transparent but also highly resistant to discoloration. They have
good resistance to weather, breakage and chemicals. Good for roliing .material
made in a variety of colors, sheets are normally 18 or 24 in. wide and up to 14ft.
long.

73

The 5arrie plastic materials are used to produce flat sheets, with or without
glass fiber reinforcing. In flat form the sheets may be used to replace glass in wind~
ows or may be molded by the thermoform process into any roof shapes.
Plastic materials are widely used in the manufacture of sandwich panels used in
curtain-wall construction. In some cases only the sandwich core is a plastic material
and in some cases even the face is plastic. Other. sandwich panels are made by
bonding plastic sheets to an aluminum grid core:

One of the important reasons for using plastic in place of glass is the great difference in weight. Normally glass weighs about seven times as much per lineal foot
as the plastic substitutes.

Reinforced acrylic is used to make the dome pans employed in forming a twoway rib, or waffle-type, concrete slab.

Rigid slabs of foamed plastic are finding increasing use structural purposes
slabs of expanded polystyrene are used to form the roof deck for a hyperbolic paraboloid roof. Because of their flexibility the slabs can readily be fitted to the contours
of the roof. Later the deck will be covered by concrete.
One of the most important uses made of pla~tics is in the manufacture of insulation an standard size is 24 x 96 in., thicknesses .of 1, 2, 3 and 4 in.
On the site, foa{Tled insulation maybe produced by foaming-in -place, using polyurethane or epoxy two-par:t resins. The process consists of. injecting controlled
amounts of resin liquid, a foaming catalyst, and a curing agent into the enclosed
space to be insulated. The reaction forms a foam ..which expands and sets, filling a
certain portion of the space.

Polysterene is one material ideally suited for structural components. 1t has rigidity, lightness, good impact.resistance and structural strength. It has the ability to
be molded in any shape. It is resistant to shuttering, is weather and corrosion-resistant and is dimensionally stable.
Nonstructural m..lterials used in construction using plastics are wall and floor
coverings, vapor and moisture barriers flashing material, water stops expansion
joint material, pipe and conduit; hardware products.

74

Plastics are also used for rigid and resilient floor coverings Vinyl and vinyl-as
bestos tile are resilient type floor coverings in common use.
Plastics are used in the manufacture of plastic wall tiles, usually made from
molded styrene.
Rigid panels or sheets in color patterns are made from syrene, acrylics, and
vinyl plastic. Hardboard plasteboard and paperboard are plastic-coated or covered
with a thin film of vinyl containing a printed pattern.
Steel and aluminum -backed vinyl sheets are produced which can be formed
and shaped without damaging the vinyl covering.

Plastic lamlnatesi are. so called. because they consists of three or more layers
of material bonded or laminated together with plastic adhesive under high pressure.
The base is made up of multiple layers of strong kraft paper, impregnated with
phenolic, amino, or epoxy liquid resin. This is covered with a printed pattern sheet
saturated with melamine resin. A picture top sheet is also saturated with melamine
or pherolic resin, and in some cases a sheet of aluminum toil is inserted between the
base and the .decorative center layer to dissipate heat and prevent marring the surface with burns.
These layers are used as cabinet and tabletop. Standard thickness

are 1/32

1/16, 1/10, and 1/Sin. and widths are 24, 30, 36, 48and 60 in: Length range from
ft. to 12ft. A great variety of pattern and colors are available.

..--'?'""-'""/~

protoLtiV.B top 91~u~t

wrfh

rA~tn.

S'

~3turat~J

pnn~ ~f t;.atur2Jt/M Wtth rb!~irt


.alumnum fat (optton.al)
-lay.er t.l! of kraft p&~r
_1mpreqnatM wrth r15111.

Films used as moisture and vapor barriers are commonly made from polythylene, and polyvinyl chloride in thicknesses of 2, 4 and 6 mils.
Water stops (strips placed across construction joints in concrete walls to prevent water passage and strips to be used to form control joints in concrete block
walls are made from polyvinyl chloride.

Several types of plastic are used to produce rigid and flexible pipes due to its resistance to rust and corrosion, ease and economy of installation and long lengths
available.

75

CHAPTER

ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS


M~ly-all materials have at least two common characteristics. Cohesiveness- the abili4
tv of ~rtJcle_s ~fa material to cling t ightly to one another and adhesiveness- the ability of a matenal to frx rtself and cling to an entirely different material.

1. GLUES
a. Animal Glue -Available in either solid or liquid form . Solid glue is.melted and applied
hot. It is slow setting _,nd allows time for adjustment to the glue joint. Animal glue has excellent bonding properties with wood, leather, paper or cloth developing up to 12,000 psi
in. shear. h has moderate resistance to heat and good resistance to cold but poor resistance to water. It cures by air drying at room temperature.
b. Blood 4Aiuminum Glue-a special animal glue made for use particularly with leather
and paper. It has only very moderate bonding/power with wood. It is usually sold as a dry
powder which is mixed with water. It has fair resistance to both heat and cold but poor
resistance to w ater, will dry from 150 to 200F.
c. Casein Glue - madefrom protein materials, is a dry powder to be mixed with water. It
has good bonding powder for wood-to:wood or paper4to-wo0d applications and will
develop the full strength of the wood in most ~ituations . Casein glue has good dry heat
resistance and moderate resistance to cold. It has moderate resistance to 'J''..ter but does
not perform well when subjected to high humidity or wetting.and drying cycles. It is subject to attack from molds, fun.gi, and other wood organisms, will dry to as low as 359f
with moderate pressure.

d. Starch and Dextrin glues-available in both dry and liquid state, the dry glue being
mixed with water. They have good bond with paper or leather and fair bond with wood,
but strength does not compare with those of animal or casein glues. They have fair resistance to heat and cold but poor resistance to water. They dry at room temperature.
e. Asphalt Cements - are thermoplastic' materials made from asphalt emulsions or
asphalt cutbacks. They have a good bond to paper and concrete and are used mainly for
roofing applications and for laminating layers of wood fiberboard. Theyhave relatively
poor resistance to heat but good resistance to cold and good water resistance.
f. CelluJose Cements -are thermoplastic in nature and have good bond to wood, paper,
leather or glass, developing up to (400 psi in shear with wood. They have moderate resistance to both heat and cold and good resistance to water. A common solvent is ethyl
acetate. Cellulose cement cures by air drying and setting.
g. Chlorinated-rubber adhesive-is usually a liquid; it has good bond for paper and fair
bond with wood, metal or glass. Strength does not compare with animal or casein glues.
It has moderate resistance to heat, cold, and ~ater but poor resistance to creep. It cures
by drying at room temperature. The usual solvent is ketone.
h. Natural-rubber adhesives -are usually latex emulsions or dissolved crepe rubber. They
have a good bond with rubber or leather and fair bond with .wood; ceramics, or glas$,
_devel<;lp_!nQ strengths of _about ~ ~si -~n__~en~~~wi_!h ~ood. They haw fair resistance to
heat and cold, good resistance to water, but poor resistanee to creep.
tempera-ture is su!f_!cient fo~drying.

Room

i. Nitrile or Buna N rubber adhesive -available in both thermoplastic and thermosetting


types. It has good .bond with wood, paper, porcelain, enamel and polyester film or sheet.
The thermosetting type will develop up to 4,00 psi shear and the thermoplastic type up
to En> psi. It has good _resistance to heat a!'ld cold and excellent water resistance, while
its creep resistance is fairty good. This adhesive cures under heat.

78

j. Neoprene-rubber adhesives-are essentially thermoplastic in nature, though they may


have some _thermosetting characteristics . They have excellent bond with wood, asbestos board, metals, glass and some plastics with str~ths up to 1,200 psi in sh~ar,
They have good resistance to heat and cold and excellent resistance to water. Creep resistance is fairly good. Used to cement' plastic laminates to walls o.r flat surfaces. Aiso
used in cementing gypsum board to studs and ceiling joists and for laminating one layer
of gypsum board to another ..
~.

Urea formaldehyde resin glues -available in powder-form to be mixed with water,


and in liquid form, which requires the addition of a hardener.
They are thermosetting in nature, with excellent bond to wood, leather, or paper having
a shear strength of up to 2,800 psi. They have good resistance to heat and cold and fair
resistance to water. Creep resistance is good. Wood welding can be done by applying a
high-frequency electric current directlyto joint for rapid curing.

I. Phenolic Resin Glues-are made )n both dry and liquid form. They are thermosetting
glues with excellent bond to wood and paper. Shear strengths up to 2,800 psi are developed. They have excellent resistance to heat, cold, creep, and water. Some set at room
temperature, while others require a hot press. These hot-press glues are commonly used
in the manufacture of plywoods.
m. Melamine Resins -thermosetting glues manufactured as a powder with a separate
catalyst . They have excellent bond with wood or paper resistance to heat, cold, creep,
and water are all excellent. Melam_ine resins are cured under hot press at 300F. Melamine-formaldehyde resin glues are manufactured as a powder mixed with-water and may
be either hot setting or intermediate-temperaturesetting types.
n. Resorcinol resins-are usually made as a liquid with a separate catalyst. They have
. good bond with wood or paper, developing shear strengths up to 1,950 psi with wood.
They have very good resistance to heat, cold and creep and are generally used where a
water proof joint is required. Some cure at room temperatures, while others require_ mo;
derate heat, up to 200f.
o. Epoxy resins -are thermosetting in nature , manufactured in liquid form with a separate
catalyst. The amount of catalyst added determines the type of curing required. They
have excellent bond with wood, metal, glass and masonry and are widely used in tbe
manufacture of laminated curtain-wall panels of various kinds. They are also used in
making repairs to broken concrete. They have excellent resistance to both heat and cold,
while creep resistance and water resistance vary widely, depending upon how the glue is
compounded. Adding a regular catalyst, curing is by hot press, up to 3900f while adding
a strong catalyst results in glue which will cure at room temperature.
p. Polyvinyl-resin adhesives-in the form of an emulsion. They have good bond with
wood or paper or vinyl plastics and reasonably good bond with metal. Shear strengths
up to 1,000 psi are developed with wood. Resistance to cold is good, but heat, s;reep,
and water resistance are only fair. These glues cure at roomtemperature.
q. Sodium silicate adhesives-are liquids which have excellent bond with paper or-glass
and reasonably good bond with wood or metal. Resistance to heat, cold and creep are ..
good, but water resistance is poor. Some cure at room temperature. while other require
moderate heat, in the 200F range.

2. SEALERS
Sealirtg compounds are products which are used to seal the surface of various materials
against the penetration of water or other liquidS or in some cases to prevent the escape of
water through the surface. To do this they must have some adhesive qualities and the ability
to fiU the surface pores_and form a continuous skin on the surface to wtlich they are applied.

79

In many applications, the adhesion should be permanent, while in others it need only to be
temporary.

Types of Sealers

a. liquid asphalt - either in cutback form or as an asphalt emulsion. Uses are, to coat the
outer surface of concrete below ground level to prevent the penetration of water to the
interior through pores in the concrete.
Another similar use is to seal the inside surface of wooden or concrete water tanks.
Another

use is as a sealer or primer over a concrete slab before asphaltic tile adhe-

sive is appfled. Here, the sealer prevents liquids from being withdrqwn from the flooring
or aphesive, allowing it to become dry and hard.
In order to be effective as a wat~rproofing membrane, sealers must be elastomeric
in character. That is, they must be resilent enough to be able to expand over small cracks
in the base surface 'without losing, their effectiveness and be able to bridge joints between members without rupture, in. case of movement at the joint.
b. Polysulflde polymers -this has excellent adhesive qualities, are highly flexible, and
maybe applied either by ha_nd or by spray. They are being used in exterior wails of foundations, between two-course concrete slab floors, on roof decks, as swimming;lool
waterproofing and under roof flashing,

These polysulfide-polymer sealers are two-component, chemically curing materials


which are produced for either hand or machine mixing .

The hand-mix sealer has a work life of approximately A hours and curing time of 24 hours
at 75F.
The machine-mixed variety will have a work life of about 5 minutes and curing time of
approximately 45 -minutes.
One gallon of prepared sealer will cover approximately 25 sq. ft. or about 3 to 5 sq. m.,
with a membrane of 60 mils thickness, which wiU expand and contract the base without
cracking.
c. Solution of sodium silicate-used to seal the inside surface of concrete li!:luid containers. The sodium silicate forms a gel-like film on the surface to prevent water pemitra-

tion.
d. W.ax compounds-made in the form of emulsions to be sprayed over the surface pf.
newly placed concrete. The wax oxidizes to form a continuous film prevents the evap<iration of water from concrete in this case the adhesion is only temporary. As the ~ax contin~ to oxidize it becomes hard and brittle and flakes or is worn off the concrete by
traffic.
Other waxes are used to make sealers for concrete and terrazzo floors which prevent the
penetration of oil and grease into the floor surface.
e. liquid silicones-are used as sealers over concrete, brick and tile masonry to prevent
the penetration of water into the surface.

80

The absorption of water by masonry walls often ieads to staining and efflorescence. The
silicone sealers are particularly valuable for such applications because they are colorless
and do not affect the aPJ)eai'Snce of the waU.

f. Oits and turpentines -sealers used to seal wood surfaces before the application of
paint or varnish. They penetrate into and are absolbed by the wood fibers so th~t the
vehicle in paints and varnish will not be similarly absorbed. Similar sealers are used to
seal wood which will not be painted against moisture penetration.

g. Synthetic plastic products-sealers for wood which form a film over the surface and
allow better bonding of synthetic lacquers to wood ..
h. Thin solutions of animal and casein glues -are used to coat the surface of plaster
and gypsu.m board under paint. These products are commonly known as wall sizing.

i. Epoxy-resin formulation-used as sealers over concrete, wood, or. old terrazzo surfaces before epoxy-resin terrazzo is applied. The thin liquid adheres to and seals the okt
surf~e and provides good bond tCx- the new application. Similar sealers are used under
concrete surface repairs.

3. GLAZING AND CAULKING COMPOUNDS


These are similar materials, but difference is that when used for sealing glass they are
known as glazinij compounds.
Properties of caulking materials.
a. it must be able to adhere to the surfaces with which it comes in contact.
b. it must remain workable.ovef a considerable range of

temperat~:~re.

81

..' ,;,--~::.:~:s:::.~~t.,-.~~--j_'>.:;

c. it must be able to form a tough, elastic skin OYer the surface, while the interior of the
ITI8SS

remains flexible.

d. it must be able to stretch or elongate with changes that may occur in the width of the._
joint.

e. it must have good movement capability that is, it must have movement in either exten
sion or compression from that mean .
f. it must be able to recover well after having been extended or compressed.

g . it mllst have very low sensitivity to water.


h . it must have low volatility.

i. it must be able to provide good service performance.


Five f51 groups of caulking compounds.
a. Mastics-group of caulking compounds includes linseed-oil-putty, Hnseed-oii:isobutylene caulks, mastic glazing and caulking compounds, this has a recovery of 0 to 10 per
cent.

b. Elaatomastics ...,..includes butyl caulks having a solvent base, acrylic caulks with solvent
or emulsion base, and acrylic caulks which are 100% Solids and one part polymer captan. This has a recovery of 10 to 49 percent.

c.

Elastomen~ - include one and two part polysulfides containing 100 percent solids one
part silicone with 100 percent solids. one and two part urethanes with 100 percent solids,
vinyl chloride polymers, andlbutadiene- styrene coi:)olyme..S ~
.

d. Elastoplastics-include neoprene and hypolon caulks with a solvent base .


e. Plastics-include high-molecular weight caulking materials which are specially treated
to be extruded. as plastic or cellular sheets or strips.
Materials for caulking

a. Unseed-oil putty-most common . Used almost exclusively for glazing wooden .


sash. It is made by mixing very finely ground calcium carbonate with raw linseed oil. Putty tends to become harcl and brittle with age, but its life can be extended by priming the

sash before glazing an d by frequent painting.


Mastic glazing and caulking compounds are composed of a number of materials blend
841 to prOduce a substance which has a much long~r life than putty and which may
have an elongation rate of up to 10 percent. They are made up of:

1. drying oil-a vegetable. oil such as soya-bean or linseed oil to provide the cohesion
and absorbs oxygen from air to produce a dry film.

2. Mondrylng oil -a hydrocarbon - oil is included to plasticize and to help the


material maintain itS fle.xib ility with age..
3. A driflr-used to accelerate the formation of a.surface skin and is usually a metallic

salt.
4. Solvflllts-used to adjust workability.
5. Mineral stabilizer - often an asbestos fiber, which helps the caulking to maintain
its position or Shape prior to set.
6. R//er- usuafly a very low finely powdered limest one which gives the caulking
body, and reduces shrinkage.
The caulking materials described above are oxidizing types and are used in exposed areas
where painting aVer their surface may be desirable.

82

b. A~p-~lt and polybutene caulking compounds - are mastic materials. They are non~xidizing and set through tfle evaporation of the solvent. Both may have tmers and stabilize~ combined with them and give good results wherea skin is not required. Uke under
flashmgs, between lapped joints, and in hidden joints between wood and masonry.
c.

~olysulfide eiastomers-two types one is a two-component type of caulking, consistng of a base compound and an accelerator. It cures by polymerization . The rate of curing b~ing increased with increasing temperature and humiditY. It is normally applied by-a
caulk109 gun .

Aluminum - colored polysulfide-based caulking is also popular for use with a


aluminum-frame window units.
d. Silicone mastic caulking -one component product which cures on exposure to air . It '
has exce."ent adhesion and can be used where high elongation properties are requir8d.
This caulking is available in a num~r of colors.
e. Butyl, neoprene and hypalon mastic caulkings are solvent types made with fillers
and pigments and are thus available in a ra~ge of colors.
f. Cellular sponge sheet and strips- produced from high-molecular weight materials,
with similar properties as mastic caulkings. The disadvantage of using tt:lis is that special.
adhesives are required to join strips, and mavnot be available in the field.

Backup Materials
Are important part of a good w atertight joint.

The purpose of such a material is to control the depth. of joint, to prevent moisture frQm at
tacking the bond between caulking and the sides of the joint, and to serve as a bond breaker,
so that the material can elongate.
Backup materials are sponge rubber, nontarred oakum, fiberglass insulation, polyurethane foam, closed-cell polyethylene foam; neoprene or butyltubes and cords, fiberboard,
and corkboard strips. Do not use any oil, t8r or asphalt impregnated materials, moistureabsorbing materials and polystyrene foams.

83

CHAPTE~

.~ ~ :

INSULATING MATERIALS
THERMAL INSULATION
ll cold weather, we are interested in transferring heat from
furnaces, radiators, heating panels, into various rooms of our buildings. At the same time we are interested in preventing that heat
from being transferred from the interior of the building to the outside.
During the summer. it is important that we prevent the transfer of hot outside temperatures to the working and living space
within our buildings.
All of these are done by .the Judicious use of materials which
best prevent the transfer of heat, and this we call Thermal insulation.

There are three ways wherein heat is transferred.


a; Conduction-The insid~ of Q concrete wall which has one side exposed to outside
winter temperatures feels cold to the touch. Heat is being conducted from the side
of higher temperature to that of lower temperature.
b. Radiation-from

ltlis point, it is transferred to the outside air by radiation.

c. Convection-When air is heated, it expands and begins to circulate during the cir~
culation, it comes in contact with cooler surface, some of its heat is given up to
them. It is therefore important to try to prevent air currents (Convection Currents)
from being set up in the walls and ceilings of our buildings. This can be don~ by
keeping the layer of air relatively thin-not over lin. -and by dividing the space into
small enclosed compartments.

and

The convection currentS-set up in -the confined .spaces.are insignificant


can
causes little heat transfer to prevent heat loss by conduction, we must use the mate-
rials that ars poor conductors to prevent loss by radiation materials must be used
which will reflect rather than radiate heat.

KINDS OF THERMAL INSULATION


There are nine basic kinds of thermal insulation:
1. Loose Fill- This bulky and divided into:
a. Fibrous Type - made from mineral woolrock wool,
glass wool, or slag wool-or vegetable fiber-usually
wood 'fiber.

b. Gnmular insuliltlon -are made from expanded


minerals such as perlite and vermiculite or from ground
vegetable matter such as granulated cork.

'
86

. l .

~ -~ '- . ~ . . .

Flbmus Loose Fi/t ...:.is used to insulate walls of buildings that have been built without insulation. In such
cases holes are drilled in the wall between each pair of
studs, a hose inserted .and the insulation blown in until
the space in filled.

Granules -are graded into four sizes, 1, (3/8 in. to no.


16 sieve) and sizes 2 (no. 4 to no . 30 sieve) used as
Loose-Fill insulation for sidewalls and ceilings over
suspended ceilings, between wood sl~epers over a concrete floor slab, as fill for the cores of concrete blocks
and sizes 3 (no. 8 to no. 1.00 sieve) size 4 (no. 16 to
sieve).

100

2. Blanket Insulation - is made from some fibrous material such as mineral wool. woOd
fiber, cotton fiber, or animal hair, manufactured in the form of a mat, 16, 20 or 24 in.
width, in 8ft. lengths or put up in rolls of from 40 to 100 linear feet, with controlled thick\
nesses of 1, 1/2, 2, 3 and 4 in.
Some are made with no covering at all, some with a paper back on one side only,
some with vinyl cardboard or wire mesh one side, while others are completely enclosed in
ar:~ envelope.
Those with backing or envelopes are usually provided with a stapling flange so that
they can be stapled to the sides or edges of studs and Joists.
Blankets are used where large areas m.ust be insulated. These include such places as
sidewalls in new construction, over head in floored attics between joists in unfloored attics, in crawl spaces and over suspended ceilings.

~TAPLEO

TO
OF 5TUOf>

TABS STAPLED TO
S lOE CX: ~TU~

87

l. _Batts -similar to blankets "but they are restricted to 48 in. long or less they are always
~;overed with paper, and made especially for installation between stud spacings. Batts
usually have paper tabs along the edges for easier attachment to the frame.

4. Structural Insulation Boarit -made from organic fiber-wood, cane, straw or cork. The
wood and cane .raw material is first pulped, after which it is treated with waterproofing
chemicals. The fibers are then formed into sheets of various thicknesses in a continuing
process and cut into standard lengths. Some boards are impregnated with asphalt during
the manufacturing process, while others are given a coat of asphalt ~fter they are made.

Strawboard -is made from carefully selected straw, fused under heat and pressure
into a panel 2 in. thick and 4ft. wide. Boards are completely sealed in paper covers of
various types to provide the proper surface for painting, papering, plastering, .stucco or
roofing.
Corkboard-is made from granulated cork mixed with resin and pressed into
sheets of several thicknesses. depending on the use to which they will be put. A common
thickness is 3 in. the board being used for roof insulation. (see ceiling acoustical board)

Structural Insulation Board - is used in exterior wall sheathing roof decking, roof
insulation under built-up roofing, shingle backer. interior finish board and insulating form
board .
Sizes

Exterior Shflllthing - 1/2 in. thick, square edged sheets, 4 ft. wide and from 6 to 12ft.
long, impregnated with asphalt.
Shingle Backer -made 5/1 6 or 3/ 8 in. thick in strips 11 3/ 4, 13 1/ 2. 15, 15 1/2 in wide
and 48 in. long.

Roof Insulation- made from 1/ 2 to 3 in. thick in single or multiple layers and in several
dimensions.
Interior WallBoard - made 5/16, 3/ 8 and 1/2 in . thick in sheets of 4 x 8 and 4 x 10ft.

5. Block or Rigid Slab Insulation - This type of insulation is so called because the units
are relatively stiff and inelastic. In most cases inorganic materials are used in their manu
factures. This include mineral wool with binder, fratned plastic, cellular, glass, foamed
concrete, cellular hard rubber, shredded wood and cement. The basic material is a non
conductor and that the finished product contains millions of isolated air cells. which
makes these materials high in insulative value.
4

Mineral wool from perlite or vermiculite, when mixed with a b inder and processed or
fixed to a rigid back, sheets are produced which are -suitable for roof-deck insulation.
Foamed Plastic Insulation- is made from expanded polystyrene' and expanded
polyurethane formed into slabs of various dimensions and thicknesses_ (one popular
brand is styropor)

88

Ce/lulllr Giau Jnsullltion- is 11\ade frOm expanded molten glass cast into block
fonnand cut various s.izes and shapes, thicknesses.of 2, 2 1/2 and 3 and 4 in. are available
in 12 x 18 in. blocks, a 1112 in thickness is produced in 24 x 48 in. slabs. Method of appli-.
cation on flat surface is in bot asphalt or asphalt emulsion. For vertical surface, mastic is
Used .
Foamed Concrete as desc:ribed in chapter is an importai1t insulating material because
of its closed..cell construction. Foamed concrete precast roQf slabs are used for insulative
as well as structural purposes and can have a built-up roof applied without further roof insulation.
Cellular hard rubber is a synthetic material containing cells filled with nitrogen, It is
formed into siabs of varying sizes and thicknesses.
Shredded wood or wood Fiber by itself is a form of blanket insulation but when cement slurry or special cements are added, it sets; up into a rigid block with similar insulating qualities.

Rigid Slllb lnsul11tion -are paqicularly useful for such aP-plications as roof-deck insulation, perimeter insulation, pine i\)sulation, cold storage work, and cavity wall insulation . .It can-also insufate masonry ~ails without furring . .

buktpma01ry
t-------r-

ng1J n$Ulatltlf1

. PERIMETER INSULATICN
Rigid insul11tion -which are impervous to moisture penetration resulting from continuous contact with the earth and moisture are particula~ly useful as perimeter insulation.
6. Reflective Insulation-made from such materials as aluminum or copperJoil or sheet
metal, with bright 'surfaces that reflect heat rather than absorbing it.

Aluminum Foil- is produced 'in

she~ts or rolls and made up into blankets.

5I

CopperFoillnsulations--is commonly made in the form of a thin paper core covered on


one or both sides with copper.

..

LE'IUN& J<>

~!\

ltL\.JMINUM -fOil.. .

Bf..A'\1~
89

Rsflectiv's l~sulstion -can be used in stud!_ rafter and joist spa1:es, to insulate
walls, roofs, ceilings and _
floors.and for cold-storage ~ork
Sheet Foil-is cor.1monly made 36 in. wide and on stud walls should be installed vertically for maximum benefit. A 36 in. width will span two 16 in. stud spaces and drape back
~tween each pair of studs to form an air space between it and the inside finish.

,----- rt$UIJtl011
~l.dmq

batt

GM.afh1119

fintGh qyp.;;um )4tH


a1rs.p~

- - r~f~c.t1v..e tn5UI3t"JOI1
7. Foamed-In-Place Insulation-This is polyurethane product made by combining a poly
isocyan.ate and a ployester resin.
This type of insulation can be applied either by pouring or by spraying. The basic ingredients for both are drawn from their containers, measured, and mixed by machine.

Application by Pouring -a carefully measured amount of the mixture is deposited


in an existing cavity. The mixture reacts and foams up to fill a predetermined portion of
the space to be filled. This volume of foam is called a "LIFT", and normally Is limited to a
height of about 14 in. when the foam has set, a new rrft is poured and this process is
repeated until the space is completely Filled.
Application by Spraying -a number of thin coats of foam are applied, are over the
other, with sufficient time being left betWeen each application for the foam to set up. Bv
th~$Vsiem, any desired thickness of insulation can be applied.
ij.

Sptayed-on-lnsulations- materials used are polyurethane foam asbestos fiber mixed


with inorgan.ic binders, vermiculite aggregate with a binder such as portland cement or
gypsum and perlite aggregate using gypsum as a binder. Machines are used for blowing
t~~se insulations into place; as a result the shape or irregularity of the surface being insufated is of little consequence.

Asbestos- Fiber insulation is usually applied over a base coat of some adhesive,
often a latex-type water emulsion. The primer should be applied to only as much of the
surface as can be sprayed with fiber while the adhesive is still tacky. Application direct j.O
metal lath does not require the priming adhesive.
. This type of insulation also seals cracks a'n d crevices to prevent dust from shifting
through and eliminates joint and lap problems common to corrugated bliliding materials.
It also tends to protect' metal fro":' corrosive action :
Vermiculite and Perlite aggregate can be sprayed over a .base of gypsum lath, base
coat plaster, masonry surface or rt:~etal lath.

90

9. Corrugated Insulation-This is usually made from paper formed into shapes that produce enclosed air pockets. One type is produced by shaping heav paper into a series of
small regular semicircular corrugations and covering a both sides with a sheet of flat
paper to give strength and produce the air pockets. This can be done using either single
or multiple layers of corrugated paper.

<>IN6LE

~ORRUGAT!OI\I

MULTIPLE CLlRRUGATION

This type of insulation is produced either in sheets or rolls, depending on the thickness of the mat, and is applied in strips fitting between studs or in large sheets cemented
to a flat surface.
A more rigid type of corrugated insulation is made by forming a honey comb-shaped
mat with paper and covering both sides with flat paper sheet. The whole thing is given its
rigidity by spraying with a thin coating of portland cement slurry or other type; of stiffener.
The resulting paper mat, from 1 to 4 in. thick is quite strong and may be1tised tor nonbearing partitions. without further surport, plastered on-both sides.

91

CHAPTER . .

PREVENTIONS
1. WATERPROOFING - a method of protecting surfaces against the destructive effects
of water .
2. DAMP-PROOFING -protection from the outside is provided by water repellent materials which tum water aside and force it to return to the earth. The dampness that sometimes occurs inside the building can be caused by penetration of moisture from the outside or by condensation of water vapor generated on the inside.
3. CLEAR PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR MASONRY, CONCRETE

This is a clear, invisible silicOne water repellent specially formulated for application on
masonry and bricks (standard silicone repellant) and for limestone and concrete that
seeps much rainwater (special formula~ed silicone repellant). The silicone liquid is ap-
plied by brush or low pressure spray and does not affect ;,the color or naturalness of the
material.

4. ANAY !Termite) proofing by Soil Poisoning


It is important to poison the soil against anay (white ants) in order to stop the anay from
infesting the mainp<lsts, walls and flooring.
5. WOOD PRESERVATIVE (Powder Post Termites) a chemical liquid painted and applied
to lumber to prrve it for years. It protects wood against powder post beetles (Bukbo1d powder post termite (unos), decay causing funQi, such as sap stain and dryrot.
6. FIREPROOFING -a clear liquid applied easily on woOd, plywood, lumber and other
board that retains the natural. beauty, gives added strength and protects materials
against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping. Since the liquid penetrates into the
wood, when there is fire. tt reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progreSsive bum
ing.
7. RATPROOFING-A method of protecting rooms against the Intrusion of rats and
other small destructive animals from gnawing the wooden parts of the house, habit8ting
on ceilings and floors of. houses and buildings.
8. RUSTPROOFtNG -a method of protecting the ferrous materials like steel, iron from
rusting. or corrosion.
9. FLOOR PROTECTION -when floors are subjected to wear and tear, or from chemical
abrasions and heavy use, a special kind of material should be used to protect the flooring.
10. DESCALERS; Paint and Chemical Strippers

When an old house having old paint is in need of repainting, paint remover is appliea to
the surface which softens and lifts the paint.
For cleaning of buildings from stains, rUSt, algae or even cement build up from forms or
equ~t, etc. a chemical .stripper or desealer Is used.

11. CONTROL, PROTECT AND MANAGE


For buildings that need total control of the incoming and outgoing individuals for the
protection of the building as a whole from robbers, stealers, etc. There are so ma.nv
equipments which can be installed.

DISCUSSIONS:
1. WATERPROOFING
94

This is a.,.,Cied on the following locations:

@ WATER TANKS
(';;\CONCRE"lliR<:Jo~:
\8' . GUTTERS

M~HINE RCG'MG, AJR<VN


PUMP~~

.f-

@ REFR16ERA110N of, at.o ~


Ra:'>MG

Three ~ of waterproofint:
1. INTEGRAl TYPE~medium in powder form is added and mixed with the aggregates of
concrete. In this case, one pack usually .908 kilos is added to one bag kiios cement..
Some of the -known brands are sahara and sakura.
-

of

of

I'''

2. MEMBRANE TYPE-recommended for use where direct rain, or standing. water are
eminent, as seen in the illustrations, there are about 14 uses. The materials used depending on the manufacturer is .either asphalt paper laid with hot asphalt, impregnated asbestos felt, sometimes thick polyethylene sheeU is also used. Other materials are performed
setf sealing asphalt.

LA\0 ON CONCRET~ GLAS

3. FLUID APPLIED-a fluid applied eSastomeric coating based on heavy solids elastomer
compound formulated to waterproof and preserve the substrate, like concrete, wood,
bricks and steel. The waterproofing is monolothic, seamless, flexibte and etastic over a
wide temperature range, withstands extreme thermal movement, settling and cracking. It
resists puncture and tearing abrasive overlayments.

This e&astomeric fluid can be applied by roller, brush, spray or squeegee.

I. INTEGRAL TYPES -ul8 Sahara or Sakura brand in packs.

II. MEMBRANE TYPE


A. JOHN'S MANVILLE (Norton andHanison Inc.)
ROOFING FELTS:
The base fetts used in Built-up Roofing are available in two basic types-ASBESTOS
FELTS and ORGANIC or RAG FELTS. They look alike, superficialty, bt.rt they differ
. widely in service.

96

Comparison:

ASBESTOS

1. Asbestos Fefts -composed primarily of asbestOS fiber, a non-rotting, non-wicking inorganic mineral fiber.

2. Identical expansion and contraction properti~ to finishing fefts.


3. Minimum stretch and shrinkage or wetting or drying which meane minimum diF
tortion.
4. Loses strength stowly while aging.

5. Excellent resistance to "burnout" in hot climate.


6. Aot resistant.

ORGANIC

1. Organic Felts-composed of fibrous organic materials. Subject to deterioration


by oxid4ltion and to wicking.

2. DiffMent eKpansion and contraction properties from finishing plies.


3~ Maximum stretch and shrinkage on wetting and drying which means maximum
distortion.

4. Loses strength rapidly while aging.

5. Poor resistance to "bum out" in hot climate.


6. Poor resistance.tQ rot.

FINISHING. ~ 11LES (OPTI~L}


SAND

....: .

~SE

PLY IMPREGNAll:D ~TOS Fa.I


ROOFiNG A<iPH~LT

'~ E;:.~.!..~.~.~.~.~.. ...~~..~..~.g. .~...~. ~..-~.~,_.--.,....+ PLY I~T:~~

: ~c<W<RFre Q~ ~

. -: ! . : -~ :

~ ~.r

:'! ~. ..~:

. :... ':. ..

A.;;Be>TOS PRIMeR.

..ve

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 3-PLY 15LBS. ASBESTOS FELT


ON ASBESTILE CEMENT FOR CONCRETE ~UTTER.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Allautfaces must be smooth, clean and dry and free from foreign materials. The surface

.shall contain no projections or holes, and shall prov!de a solid base for the membrane
waterproofing. Where horizontal meets vertical wall, : a cant shall be prOvided.
MATERIALS:

1. Concrete Primer
2. 15-lb Asbestos Felt

3. Asbestile Cement.
APPLICATION:

1. Coat the entire surface with concrete primer Up to aU surrounding vertical surfaces.
2. Over this primed,' surface apply three (3) layen of JM 15-lb. asbestos felt, cemented
to each layer with asbestile cement in the following manner:
Start applying one (1) 12;. width, then over that, one (1) 24"' wide, then over both, a
fulf 36 wide. Following felts are to be applied full width, over lapping the preceding
felt by 24-2/3"'. .

3. Over the felts apply a finishing coat of asbestile cement.


4. The instaUation of the membrane wat\\rproofing shall be done by an appro.ved roof. ing contractor authorized by the manufacturer.

5. No stibstitution of materials shall be made unless .authorized in writing by the architect (or engineer) prior to starting the work of waterproofing.

TWIN 20 BUILT-UP ROOFING SPECIFICATION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The roof deck .shall be trowelled smooth; firm, dry, clean and free of rubbish, loose .or
foreign materials and obstruction9. The deck shall be properly graded to drain water freely
into gutters and downspouts. Dr$inage connections shalf be set up to permit the free flow of
water;. Installation of cut-out flashing.and cants in the angle formed by the deCk and vertical
surfaces, as well as the installation of metal fittings and similar work, shall be completed
b8fore roOfing work shall be started.

98

MATERIALS:

Materials aha~ be as follows;


1. N&H Concrete Primer
2. JM Twin~20 Asbestos, Roofing Fett, Perforated, 20 lbs. per square
3. Roofing Asphalt

4. N&H Asbestile Cement (for Flashing)


APPLICATION:
Roofing shall be applied as follows:

1. Coat the entire deck with N&H Concrete Primer up to 6" of all surrounding vertical
surfaces.

2. On slopes up to 1,. apply felts perpendicular to the ~ope starting at the low point of
. each slope.. On slopes over 1" apply felts parallel to the slope, nailing into nailing
strips at the top of each run of felt on not over 9" centers. If run of fett exceeds 20',
an additional nailing strip and line of nails shaU be used at 20' in~rvals.
3. Starting at the low edge (on slopes up to 1") apply one 18'" wide, then over that~ one
full 36'" wide JM Twin 20 Asbestos Felt. Following felts are to be applied full width
overlapping' the. preceding felt by 19"' in such manner that at least 2 plies of felt cover
the deck or insulation at any point. Broom each felt so that it shall be firmly and uniformly set without voids into hot Roofing Asphalt applied just before the felt at a minimum rate of23 lbs. per square uniformly aver the entire surface .

4. Flood the surface with Roofing Asphalt at a minimum rate of 60 lbs. per square and
while it is still hot embed therein acceptable gravel at the rate of approximately 409
lbs. per square or an acceptable slag at a rate approximately 300 lbs. per square.
FLASHING:
Where the deck meets vertical surfaces, apply a five-course Asbestile Flashing to consist of
two layers of JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt and three layers of N&H Asbestile Cement,
extending 6" high on vertical surfaces and 4" on the roof.

SPECIFICATION FOR BUILT-UP ROOFING CONSISTING OF 1 PLY JM 50 LB. BASE


FELT & 2 PUES JM 16 LB. FINISHING FELT FOR NON-NAILABLE DECKS (EXCEPT
METAL DECKS)
.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The roof. deck shall be wood-trowelled smooth, firm, dry, clean and free of rubbish, loose or
foreign materials and obstructions. The deck shall be properly graded to drain water freely
into gutters and downspouts. Drainage connections shall be set up to. permit the free flow of
water. Installation of cut-Out for flashing and cants in the angle formed by the deck and vertical surfaces, as well as instatlation of metal fittings and sim~ar work shall be completed
before built-up roofing work shall be started .
MATERIALS:
Materials shall be as follows:

. 1. N & H Concrete Primer


2. JM No. 50 Asbestos Base Felt, Perforated, 43 lbs. per square
3. JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt, Perforated, 151bs. per square
4. Roofing Asphalt
5. N & H Asbestile ~t (For Flashing)

99

:.;,

'

..

.:

... .....

~:'

.. _:.~ ..-::-_--;.,~-::...~~.~ .

APPLICATION:
Roofing shall be applied by a roofing contractor approved ~Y the manufacturer, as fol_lows:
1. Coat the entire deck with Concrete Primer up to 6'" of all surrounding vertical surfaces. (If deck is of precast units, omit the primer 4"' each side of all joints).

2. Apply one layer of JM No. 50 Asbestos finishing Felt, Perforated on Roofing Asphalt, lapping each felt 2"' over the preceding one.
3. Apply. two layers of JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt, Perforated on Roofing Asphalt, laid in shingle .fashion, lapping each feJt 19" over the preceding one.

4. Where the deck meets vertical surfaces,-apply a five-course Asbestile Flashing to


consist of two JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt and three layers of N & H Asbestile
Cement, extending 6" high on vertical surfaces and 4'" on the roof.

5. (a) For Smooth-Surfaces Roof


, Finish the entire surface with a uniform coating of Roofing Asphalt.
-- ......
.. . (b) For Gravel-Surface Roof
Finish the entire surface with a uniform coating of roofing Asphalt. While hot,
embed pea gravel or course clean sand. Broom off excess loose particles afterwards.

SPECIFICATION FOR BUILT-UP ROOFING CONSISTING OF


FIVE (5% PLIES JM 15-LB. ASBESTOS FELT)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
All surfaces must be smooth, clean and dry, free of loose materials and obstructions. The
surfaces shall contain no projections or holes, and shall provide a solid base for the membrane waterproofing. Installation of cants in the angle formed by the floor and vert}cal wall
shall be completed before roofing work shall be started.

MATERIALS:

1. N & H Concrete Primer

2. JM 15-lb. ASbestos Felt Perforated


3. Roofing Asphalt
APPLICATION:
Waterproofing shall be appHed by a roofing contractor approved by the manufacturer, as
follows:

1. Cost the entire surface with concrete primer and allow to dry.

2 .. Lay two (2) plies of JM 15-lb. Asbestos Felt over the primed surface, lapping each
sheet 13" over the preceding one on asphalt.
3. Over these fefts, lay three (3) additional pliesof JM 15-lb. Asbestos Felt on asphalt .in
the following manner: .

~~:~~-

:. . .~

..:: ..

Starting at the low edge, apply one 12'" wide, then over the one a 24N wide, then
over both a full36" wide. Following felts are to be applied full width overlapping the
preceding felt by 24-3/3".

SURFACING:

.. : , ){;;. ~/C
:

- . . .

Finish the enti~ surface with 'roofing asphalt, and while not, sprinkle clean-pea gravel. The
pa'rticl~.

pealJtavel topptng shall be broomed afterwards to remove excess loose

. ::: \ .. . .. '100 ,. . :~-j

\ \~'i:~;-.. -:.:~.-;y.,.v~/J

SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
No substitution of materials shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect (or .
Engineer) prior to starting the waterproofing.

B. CEMVATHENE BRAND-cemvathene membrane is a specially formulated water


proofing material to suit tropical weather conditions. It waterproofs, damproofs and pre
vents sepage. It is a preformed membrane made of a combination of asphalts, high
grade plasticize.rs and 0.006 inch (6 mill thick polyethylene sheet and supplied in rolls of
91.4 em. (3ft.) wide and 304.8 em (10ft.) long. The membrane is self-sticking with a
special release plastic sheet that protects the adhesive surface before installation.

reglet 4c.m deep by :4cm


w1de

cemvoseol

(11(:lS1ic

on c.onnetions

mvocoie binder

cemvoproym

.-5 G.!!lt

,nstallation Procedure

1. Surface PTfiPIJretion
a. The horizontal surface should be graded to drain water freely to gutters &
downspouts and must be smoothed and fully cured.
b. Inside colders should have a 5 em cant.
c. Provide reglets on vertical surface 20 em above of + em deep & 4 em wide.

'
2. Priming
Mr:THOO OF

Applyi cemvapraym primer to impregnate the surfaces of the base substrate by


brush at a coverage of 10 sq. meters per 4 liter container which is diluted with
50% water.

LAYJNG
3.

Membrt~ne

AppliC8tion

a. Peel off the plastic covering of the sticky side and unroll slowly into place.
Firm1y press the sheet to the surface and force out any entrapped air.
b. Install subsequent sheets with 5 em minimum overlaps on all joints. Bond all.
overlaps ~,Jsing cemvacote binder.

101

c. Corners and construction joint~ should be double covered with a strip of cemvathene. Membrane of about '30 em. wide.

an1V~~~ 111a~t1L

r.eady made

t..~tttvaLot.e ~nt~.

L_ lllJjJ .

ILJ

~v.ac.o ~

4.

bJnMr

d. All edges should be sealed with a troweled bead of cemvaseal mastr'ic.

Protectice Coating

a: Concrete topping for light walking, use concrete topping of 5 em minimum.


b. For heavy traffic or with high hydrostatic pressure reinforced conrete topping
of about 8 em. 08 m. thick is required.

Grades or Thicknesses
Description

Grade

Uses

Cemvathene 2

Preformed single 1.00 mm thick

Cemvathene 3

Preformed single 1.50 mm thick

For areas with low hydrostatic


pressure as office toilets, kitchen
floors, pantries, janitor rooms. -

Cemvathene 3A

Preformed single 2.00 mm thick

Ideal for waterproofing of defective or damaged G.l. roofing


and as water barrier between
plywood and tile roofing or wood
shingles.

Cemvathene 5

:!t?t:Z .'

zmm

Preformed double membraned


eleastic self sealing 2.15 mm.

Damproofing

For roof decks canopies, terraces, bathrooms, elevationpits,


basement refrigeration rooms.

---~~~tt1m pt1yethyl~ h.et


1nlnt

Cemvathene 5A

ha--.1 msnbr.a11e(1.s
.umv.uote mm)
1. ~ mm ~t:k

Preformed double membraned


elastic bitumen. The weatherside
consist of . 1 hard bituminous
membrane that is mineral filled
and the other side is made of
sel1 ~sealing asphalt that is capable of sealing structural cracks'
up to 1/8 in. (3.17 mm).

Ideal for- exposed applications,


that is, waterproofing with no
concrete topping like roof deck,
top layer for wooden or G.l. roof_ing water barrier between plywood on concrete and shingles
rooting.

Ill. FLUID APPLIED


A. One product is ELASTOMARK

This is fluid-applied Laradek Elastomeric coating based on heavy solids elastomer


compound 'formulated to waterproof and preserve the substrate, like concrete,
bricks, steel and wood. The waterproofing system is monolithic, seamless, flexible
and elastic ovl3r a wide temperature range, withstands extreme thermal movement,
settling and cracking, strong durable, resists puncture and tearing abrasive overlay-
ments.

102

Elastomark can be-applied by roller, brush or spray or squeegee, packing is available


in one (1) drum, 20-liter and 4-liter containers. Comes in seven different colors.
Thicknesses recommended
for' exterior walls
irregular concrete roof deck
regular concrete roof deck almost
flat, planters, toilet$
for gutters. basement and submerged areas

- 12 to 20 mils
- 20 to 30 mils

30 to 40 mils

40 to 70 mils

one mil

= l,Ooo

Qf an inch

B. Another known product is WEATHERKOTE Type 3


by Shell Phils. A generaf purpose waterproOfing material for use on concrete, roofing feet and asphalt for water and moisture barriers and for metai protection. When
diluted with water it can be used as a primer coat on permeable surfaces such as concrete, plaster, etc.
This material is a non-fibrated, stable, bitumen .emulsion. It is dark brown in colour
and dries to a black flexible coating which is odourless and non-tainting. Applied by
orush or spray.
MAIN WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

1. P,rime the surface with a 60/50 mixture of weatherkote type 3 and water using
112 gals. of type 3 per 100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry.
2. Apply a heavy brush cQJ~t of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/2 gals. per
100 sq. ft. and allow this to dry.

3. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2 gals.
per 100 sq. ft.
4. While the above is stm wet embed into it the open woven Weatherkote glass
fiber reinforcement.. Allow this to dry.
5. Apply a heavy brush coat of weatoerkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/2 gals. per 100
sq. ft. and allow this ~o dry.
6. Apply another heavy brush C04Jt of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2
gals/100 sq. ft.
7. While the above is still wet, embed the second layer of the weatherkote glass
fiber reinforcement and allow to dry.
8. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/2
gals/100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry.

103

9. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2


gals/ 100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry.
10. Trowel to about 1/4" thick the Abrasion resistant weatherkote mastic blended as
follows:

1 volume cement- 1/ 3 bag/ H)() sq . ft.


2 volume weatherkote type J .!.--5 1/ 2 gals/ 1Cl0
8 volume sand-3 cu. ft./100 sq; ft.
To expedite drying, the applicat ion of weatherkote tvi:>e 3 could be done in the
form of an emulsion cement slurry mixed as follows:
1 volume cement
1 volume water
10 volumes weatherkote type 3
. The mix shall be formed by mixing the cement and water to a smooth slurry and
t~en slowly adding this to the weatherkote type 3 until a uniform mix is achieved.

3" CEMENT FILLET

,.

104

C. WEATHERKOTE DECK ROOF WATERPROOFING

General

Introduction: The Shell Weatherkote system of roof waterproofing consist of a


builtup application of several coats of Shell Weatherkote.Bitumen Emulsions applied
by spray or brush.
Fiberglass Membrane: The inclusion of fiberglass membrane is recommended to
act as a reinforcement should fine shrinkage cracks occur in the reinforced concrete
roof. Use Weatherkote 3401 fiberglass or approved equivalent.
Falls: All roof surfaces should have adequate fall for
dance with good engineering practice.
Sub-tropical or tropical
Remainder minimum

drainag~

purposes in accor-

1:60
1:80

Dt!corative or Ught: Reflective finish- For a decorative and light reflecting finish,
allow 2 full weeks to elapse after the Bitumen Emulsion is dry, before applying Weatherkote Aluminum or alternative.
Drying Time: A Shell Weatherkote Bitumen coating can be considered sufficiently dry to proceed with the next coat when on rubbing vigorously with a wet finger no
brown stain is produced on the finger. Shell Weatherkote Bitumen coatings normally
reach this stage in 6 to 12 hours depending on atmospheric conditions. Shell Wea
therkote Bitumen coatings must not be applied if rain Is imminent before the coating
,-!
has dried.
Spraying: If spraying is preferred, Shell Weatherkote Type 3 and 5 can be sprayed
by suitable equipment at no more than 2 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. per coat. The pattern of any embedded fiber glass membrane must not be visible when the final spray
has dried.
Expansion Joints: Expansion joints must be so designed as tobe waterproofed, irrespective of the main waterproofing system.

1. Finish the concrete to a smooth surface, free from dirt, dust, etc. To a dry sur
face~pply Shell Weatherkote primer-consisting Typej mixed with equal volume
of water. Allow it to dry.

2. Apply a heavy brush coat of Shell Weatherkote Type 3 and immediately embed an
open mesh fiber glass membrane. The apPlication of the membrane should extend beyond the joints about 2 inches on bo1h sides.

Flashings:

Flashings are not normally required.

Skirting: Where skirtings occur the Shelt Weatherkote treatment should be taken
some 9" up the wall. Where there is existing metal flashing, the Shell Weatherkote
should be carried up under the flashing sufficient distance to give an adequate lap.

A Preparatory Work

1. Any roughness of the concrete should be removed from the areas to be waterproofed.

2. The concrete surface should be brushed clean and any cracks or holes in it made good
.

B. Main Waterproofing

1. Apply a brush of 50/50 mix Weatnerkote Type 3/Warer. Allow to dry (Type 3.
- 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.)

105

..

.... . . -.. .

2. Apply a heavy brush coat of neat Weatherkote Type 3 over the primed area
and immediately embed an open-mesh fiberglass membrane. Allow to dry.
(Type 3 - 1 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. ft .
Fiberglass membrane -110 sq. ft . 10% for overlaps.
3. Apply a Heavy brush coat of Weatherkote Type 3. Allow to dry. (Type 3 - 1
1/ 2 gal. per 100 sq . ft.).

4. After the application of the two coats of Weatherkote Type 3. apply a brush
coat of Weatherkote Type 7 appUed preferable in three coats (6 gals. per 100

sq. ft.).
5. For an Abraison-resistant finish, apply Weatherkote/sand mastic. The mastic
flooring consist of 1 volume Weatherkote Type 3 and 4 Volumes sand .

6. For heat reflecting and decorative finish, apply Weatherkote Bituminous Aluminum Paint (1 /2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.}.

D. ESTIMATED QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS REQUIRED


PER 100 SQ. FT. OF AREA
Weatherkote Type 3
Weatherkote Type 7
Weathorkote Aluminum
Sand
Fiberglass membrane

- 9 gallons
- 6gallons

- . 112 gallons
- 3 cu. ft.
- 110 sq. ft.
.

(10% for overlaps}

NOTE: Weatherkote Type 7 may be substituted with Weatherkote 5. However,


please consult the Spe:cial Products Dept., Pilipinas Shell Petroleum Corp. on any
substitution in the specifications.
E. ADVISORY SERVICE - Specific details regarding Shell Bituminous prOducts and
their application are available on request.

106

WEATl-IERKOT 1'YPE 1

FIBERGLASS MESH

:141,._- 50/50 WEATMERKOTE TYPE 3/WATER


..__--...-----..---~-+-- FIBERGLASS
"-----:-''--------__,~,._-50150

"--------'---f-.f-~

MESH EMSEOOEO IN WEAll1ERKOTE TYPE 3

WEATHERKOTE TYPE 3/ WATER

3" CEMENT MORTAR FILLET

SPECIFICATIONS:
D. CONCRETE TANK WATERPROOFING

Introduction:
This specification applies to the waterproofing of reinforced concrete water tank
built underground. For overhead installations, the interior waterproofing specified
herein requires further reinforcement with one extra layer of fiberglass mesh and
another coat of Weatherkote Type 3 cement slurry, before applying the last 2 coats
of Type 5 or Trowel coat of Type 7.

General

A. Preparatory Wort<.
1. Provide sand-cement fillets, about 3'" wide at all internal angles, i.e., wall to
floor, wall to wall and base slab to exterior wall .
2. Remove any projecting nibs of concrete on the surface, and holes and depressions made good using cement mortar.- The surfaces to be treated present a
smooth wood float finish.
3. Make sure, all surfaces must be free of dirt and dust before treatment !>tarts.

107

B. Treatment of Fillets
1. Prime strips approximately 11" wide, centraliy along the fillets, brushing on to
the surface a mixture of equal volumes of Weatherkote . Type 3 ancfclean
water. Allow to dry.

2. Over the primed areas, apply a heavy brush coat of Weatherkote Type 3 cement slurry~

3. Immediately _after. the above application, embed 11" wide strip of closely
woven fiberglass. Ensure that the fabric is pushed well home into the comers so
that it is in complete contact with the surface and wrinkles contact with the
surface and wrinkles eliminated. Allow at least 3" overlap at all ends.
* Mix 1 volume of portland cement to 1-volume water, then add this slowly to 10
volume of Weatherkote Emulsion stirring in thoroughly to achieve uniform dispersion. The mix must be used within an hour.

Waterproofing the Exterior


1. Apply Weatherkote Emulsion primer on all untreated areas including the top and let
dry.
2. Lay heavy brush coat of Weatherkot~ Type 3-cement slurry on all exterior areas, observing special attention to the continuity between the base slab and exterior wall.
Before application, the base has to be thoroughly cleaned to expose the waterproofing. It may be necessary to wipe off the surface with solvent soaked rag to remove
stubborn dirt.

3. Embed over the still wet coating fiberglass reinforcing mesh.


4. Apply another heav-Y brush coat of Weatherkote Type ~-cement slurry. Allow to dry.
5. Trowel to about 1/8" Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry.
6. Provide sufficient protection of the waterproofing from possible damage by the back
fill.**
.

Waterproofing the Interior***

l. Apply Weatherkote Emulsion primer on all untreated surfaces and allow to dry . .
2. Brush on a heavy coat of Weatherkote Type 3-cement slurry including previously
treated strips.
3. Immediately, lay fiberglass reinforcing mesh on the. still wet coating, observing at
least 3" over.lap on all edges. Avoid wrinkles.
4. Lay another heavy brush coat of Weatherkote type 3-cement slurry and let dry.
5. Trowel to about 1/8" thick, Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry for a tank depth of
10", and another trowel coat for every 10" additional depth~ ..

Fill the tank with water after 14 days under good ventillation conditions. Before this,
clean tank interi.or, hosing down the surfa<:e with water, then draining it off.
Where topping is reQuired, proceed as'follows:
a. Over the still wet last coating, sprinkle liberal amount of cl~n. sharp and fine
sand . Allow the waterproofing to cure for about a week so that the wet thickness is substantially reduced to its dried thickness before laying the concrete .
topping.

108

b. Install wire mesh or welded wire anchored to the waterproofed tank walls with
the use of concrete nails and Gl wire ties.
c. Seal the nail hole with W eatherkote Type 3.
d. Install 1 1/2" cement mortar plaster at the tank walls. and floor.
e. Apply the desired finish after sufficient curing .

* Buried or underground concrete tank is constructed over a lean concrete base,


poured .on compacted base course. This base slab is waterproofed with heavy
brush coat of Weatherkote Type 3 over a dried ~m ul sion primer, f inished w ith a 3
mm trowel coat of WeatherkoteType 7-cement slurry. The tank is now constructed
within the slab leaving at least 10" allowance along ~he perimeter.

** Depending on the :.everity of expected damage, such protection varies from sand
cement topping. Weatherkote-sand-cement mastic, brick
etc.

wor~,

cement blocks.

* It is recommended that the tank floor be treated last to avoid possible damage to it
while waterproofing the side

~ails.

**** Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry is prepared in the same manner as Type 3 and
Type 5 cement slurry except that the cement water ratio is 1:2.

WIATHf:RKOTE TYPE 7

."f.~J<fl-'-------------1~~~---------"-1--.f---

50150 WIATWIUII KOTE TYPE 3/ WATEA

FJ8ERGlASS WESH EMIIEOOEO IN WEATHER KOT'f TYP 3

50150 WEATH1111COTE TYP 31 WATER

"---- - ------+-+-...;._ 3* CEMENT MORTAR FILLET

Waterprooimg

Interior

109

WV.TMERI<OTE SANDI CEMENT MASTIC----.


WEATHE!AKOTE

1"'tP 1 - -- - _ _ _ ,

WEATHERI<OTE TYPE 3 - -- -- - .
FIBEROL.ASS M~>li---------.
WEATHERKOTE TYPE 3 50/SOWEATHEflKOTE TYP3/WATEA -

- -- - - - ,
-

----,

Waterproofmg

Exterior

~7"'-~~---3" CEMIHT FLLET

7"7"""--;1'9;-...--- W&\T!1EN)TE TYP 7

'7""7J:f.MCL...---

7":AJ1~~---

WEATHERt<OTE TYPE 3

Ftl!ltRGLASS MESH

tl!r"'.~~----WJ'Tl-IIERKOTE TYf'E 3

n':~:-......--- 50150 WEATWt:RKOTE TYPE 3/WATER

SPECIFICATIONS:
CONCRETE TANK WATERPROOFING
WATER CONTAINMENT
A relatively new material which is used to contain water or as a reservoir.
Some known products from Chevron S.F. U.S.A.
o~ Chevron Industrial membrane is a pourable, polymerizable black liquid
which, when properly mixed with activator CIM , becomes an elastomer which fully cures
in 24 hours. It forms a tough durable, resilient, impermeable barrier to water and most
queous reagents. It may be sprayed or squeegee applied and retains excellent physical
characteristics through hot or cold enl{ironments.

1. CIM-(Iiquid)

The material is laid directly on compacted soil.

110

OVICOI-11''~~

AGI':WT

( WH<"A E ~E'GUIRD)

\._ ~SE MAIEJML(SOUP fA&RU: LIKE


Wii"JA~L)

Ml)(: ONE

VOUIME 0:: AGIVATOR

NINE VOLUMES

a=

ffifMIX OM

SPR~YED
.. _.... . .... -

.,

saut6EI!-t; ....

From Denver, Colo. U.S.A.

..
- .. .
-- .. .
2. Water Saver-(ready made! membrane LININGS- The brand is called Hypalon (Chlorosulfunated polyethylene).
"

Provides excellent resistance to weathering and chemical attack. Hypalon is available ont
ly as a reinforced membrane and does not require a protective cover for most applications. Hypalon is approved for potable (drinking) water containment.

111

Another brand is PVC - (polyvinyl Chloride) membrane offers good chemical resistanCe,
sealabllity and serviceability is unexposed applicationt, good as a liner for recre.tional
lakes, canals, sewage lagoons, etc. It is recommended that an earthen cover be provided
for PVC to maximize its service life as a fluid barrier.

True knes5.b$

ZC!, m1l~ (. Of.O lt10t)


?JO mils( o3o 111d1)

tJ.16 M.(''').earth toiJ!!i


P.V. c.. lm.er

mils (, o~ mch)

45 rrul~ ( Oi5 H1C..h)


21

nul

~~ "/'~tW of an

u1c.h

Another brand is CPE (Chlorinated Polyethylene)-Specially formulated.for resistance to


oils. Membrane features excellent weatherability, sealability, chemical resistance anct
long ' Term durability. CPE does not require a cover material for rriost application,
3. From imper - ltalia
The brand is paralon NT4.:....a pre-fabricated waterproofing membrane having an asphaltic
base.

~JZ.A:

1'

l'tt.6S

x %.a ~t.as

WATERPLUG -this is in dry-powder form and mixes easily with water to becOme a
heavy-duty patching material and is available in 1 pint cans (1 1/2 lbs.) 1 quart cans (2 1/2 .
lbs.) 1 gallon cans (10 lbs.) and 5 gal. drums (50 lbs.) or 567 gm., 1.13 kg., 4.5 kg. and 22.7
kg. containers.

This is used to seal cracks and holes in your basement walls. Whether water is pouring in
under pressure or seeping in as slow leak, waterplug stops it. Fast! Running water is stopped
in 3 to 5 minutes. It is non-shrink -expands as it sets and won't pull away from the edges of
the patch area. It even sets up under water.

112

It's durable as the masonry concrete to which it is applied.


It's simple to mix and apply.
It requires no special skill or tools.
It's non-metallic-won't trust out or deteriorate.
You can also use Waterplug to seal cracks at the junction of your basement floors and walls,
and to anchor bolts and metal fixtures to concrete floors.
Waterplug is available in 1 pint cans (11/41bs.), 1 quart cans (2 1/21bs.), 1 gallon cans 110
lbs.) and 5 gaL drums (50 lbs.) [567 gm, 1.13 kg, 4.5 kg, and 22..7 kg containers.] Waterplug
is packaged in dry-powder form, and mixes easily with water to become a heavy-duty patching material.

THOROSEAL-a cement-based, heavy-dutY. easy-to-apply, water proof sealant and coat


ing. Thoroseal is ideal for basement.walls.

The concrete or masonry which comprises your basement is porous, permitting dampness
to enter and turn the space into a dank, unattractive void.
Thoroseal ends all that by going deep to fill and seal the pores and minor surface; imperfec-.
tions, becoming as it hardens, a totally waterproof skin; positively prohibiting moisture
penetration.
Thorosea! is not a paint. Although it comes in attractive colors, and is itself a natural painting
surface. Thoroseal is cementitious. That means it chemically combines with the concrete or
masonry surface it's applied to, to become an actual part of the wall.
~nd thoroseal is a perfect decorator surface. Normally applied by brush, it can easily be mix-

ed to troweling consistancy to achieve the popular modern textures. What all this adds up to
is no more soggy insulation. No more warped paneling. And no more flaking, peeling paint.

..

.. ... -...... ..

,....!\-,~ ~

~ :,;

.: / ! ,'

2. VAPOR INSULATION (OAMPROOFING)


The dampness that sometimes occurs inside buildings can be caused by penetration of
moiStUre from the outside or by condensation of water vapor generated on the inside.
Protection from the outside is provided by water repellent materials which tum water aside
and force it to retum to the earth down the outside of the building.
Moisture vapor on the other hand can permeate most ordinary building materials such as
wood, paper, lath plaster, untreated brick, etc. The moisture 11apor will condense v.iater
when its temperature is reduced by contact with a cool surface or cool air. Hence, high
humidity In a building may result in condensation of water not only on the inside of walls and
windows.but also on the outside or within the exterior walls, ceiling or roof.
Moisture vapor is produced by cooking occupants, laundering, earth crawl spaces, basement floors, humidifi~, etc.

VAPOR BARRIERS (Damproofing Materials)

These are materials which effectively retard or stop the flow of water vapor and normally are
produced in sheets or thin layers:
Vapor barriers should be installed on the warm side of the insulation. They should be continuous surfaces of asphalt or wax coated paper, aluminum, or other metal foil sheets or polyethylene film. They can be attached to the insulation as part of the manufactured product or
installed separately in or on the warm side of the wall, floor, or ceiling. They must be continuous and allow no openings through which vapor may pass.
Although asphalt paper is a goOd moisture barrier, it .is not a vapor barrier, and should be
used on the outside of a building for that purpose.

NO VApC>R BARRIER

WITH

VAPO~ BARRIER

Mteril Used as Vapor Berrien


1. Polye~hylflnf! Fil;,; .....:_Thus is chemically inert plastic, un-affected by acids, alkalis and
caustics, produced in rolls .of 3 to 20 ft . wide. Common thlckn8sses are 2, 3, 4 and 6 nVI (1
mil = .001 in).

114

This film is useful not only as vapor barrier for wal~, cemngs, and floors but also as a barrier to prevent the passage of moisture from the earth upward through a concrete stab
lain on the ground.
Polyethylene film can be applied vertically in 36 in. wide strips to studding on 16 in.
centers with a full overla~ on alternate studs. Films are stapled to studs. "'verlaps and ex
tensions to floors and walfings shall be 6 in .

WATER V~ WHEN IT Ret.c..HE$


wAAM tN~ER ~ce, AS l i

L.CNGRETE GLA8

Pa..'fETIfT"LENE

EVA~

.2"So\ND C.USHION

Mot sture fi"001 ear111

tour or

$IX

mll f1\m for

moJsture ~rr1er

2. Aluminum Fo//-used as vapor barrier as a single sheet, or as a thin layer of foil


laminated to a heavy backing of asphalt-impregnated Kraft paper. This is also done with
two layers of foil laminated with asphalt cement.

GINGLE SHEET

WITH I<RAFT PAPER

SA)ojDWtCH

WitH A~HALT

CEMENT

3. Kraft paper coated with asphalt or wax. Sometimes two layers of paper are cemented
with a continuous layer of asphalt.
Another materials used for damp-proofing of concrete walls is "WEATHERKOTE" Bituminous Emulsion, by SHELL.

115

These are high-grade between emulsions, which, after drying, provide pliable, fir,mly
adhered waterproof coatings over dry or de,np surfaces such as concrete, brickwork, masonry, wood, steel, etc. they are always applied cold.

All surfaces should be brushed to remove aU dust, loose particles, etc. Wash off with
water, if necessary. If cracks or unusually rough areas are present, these should be properly chipped out and brushed clean of loose'-particles and dirt. Prime such areas with
equal volume of Weatherkote type 3 and water by using a piece of sponge or similar material. Fill.these areas slightly proud of the general surface using 1:4 mastic or a Weatherkate/cement slurry of 1:1 :12 mixture. (One volume cement, one volume water, 12
volumes weatherkote type 3)
To Damp-proof tor to Waferproof)

1. Prime all untreated areas by scrubbing in a mixture of equal volume of weatherkote


type 3 and water, that is 1 gallon of mixture per 100 sq. ft. (type 3-1 /2 gal. per 100 sq.
ft.)

2. Apply a heavy brush coat


100 sq. ft.)

of weatherkote type 3, allow to dry. (type 3- 1 1/2 gal. per

3. CLEAR SILICONE WATER REPELLENT FOR


LIMESTONE, CONCRETE

a.

THOROCLEAR SPECIAL -by Jardine Davies


Description

A clear, invisible silicone water repellent, specially formulated for application on aged
limestone and horizontal concrete. Furnished in liquid form application by.brush or low
pressure spray.

APPLY BY BRUSH OR

BY SPRAY

u
For invisible protection of most limestones (slight darkening might occur on some limestone containing slate or iron teSt panels are suggested} horizontal concrete surfaces,
highways, bridge abutments, bridge decks, driveways and sidewalks. Do not use Thoro-
clear Special on brick or freshly quar:ried stone
Thoroclear mJ.

'wse.

116

Applle~~tion6

AdVImfllges

Prevents water penetration.


Nonflammable
AHows the wanto breathe.
Reduces freeze damage.
Extends life of Portland cement concrete.
. One-coat application.
Can be applied to slightly damp surfaces.
High resistance to salt.
Reduces water absorption on limestone
to less thaill% .
No objectionable chemical odor.
Preven~ darkening of "wet" concrete
highways, imp.roves night visibility.
Clean up application tools with water.

Limestone or other surfaces to be treated


should be, clean, sound, free of stains, in
good repair and flushed free of dust, etc.
New stone should age for about one year
before sealing. Completely flood entire surface with one coat of Thoroclear Special so
that there is a rundown of 6 to 12 inches
(15-30 em). Avoid longer runs. Low-pressure spray applications are preferred, but
brushing is acceptable (do not use aluminum equipment). All shrubbery and adjacent surfaces not to be treated , particularly
aluminum should be protected. Care
should be taken to t reat in one coat; :after
dfying starts T'tior.oelear special will repel itself. To remove Thoroclear Special from
surface not to be coated, use xylol or
toluol. Do not use.lf rain is expected within
8 hours or apply to water-soaked masoory
as after a heavy rain . (Prior to applying
Thoroclear Special to loose, weak, cracked
or structurally defective masonry joints,
Dryjoint pointing mortar should be used.

Umit11tion

P11ck11ging

Do not apply when temperature is below

1 and 5 gallon cans, 30 and 50 gallon


drums, (3.7 and 18.91 cans, 113.5 ;:~nd 2.aJ
drums).

40f (4.4 C) Or is expected to fall below


40F (4.4 C). Do not apply to frozen or
frostfilled surfaces.-

.t

Cover11ges

100-400 square
per gallon (2.4-9.7m211)
varies with porosity of surface.

b .. THOROCLEAR

. Clear Protective Treatments for Masonry, Concrete, Bricks, Synthetic Adobe


Silicone liquid is used to be spread around the surfaces by using paint brush. Silicone liquid is clear and does not change the natural color of the materials. One brand used is
Thoroclear by Jardine Davies.

4...ANA Y" PROOFING-SOIL POISONING


It is important to poison the soil against Anay (white ants) or termites otherwise an expensive house will be eaten away by these insects in a few years. To protect your investme~t,
soil poisoning is done. This stops the anay from infesting your main posts, walls and flooring. One known brand is ALDREX by shell which will last up to 30 years, and is not harmful
to pl~nts. This liquid can be applied with an ordinary garden water can. A gallon of Aldrex
solution made up of 1 part aldnlxand 36 parts water or a gallon of Aid rex 4 solution made up
of 1 apart Aldrex 4 and 95 part of water is enough to prot~ct a square meter Of floor area for
years and years.

117

. 0
0

~.,

. ~~:~;~~ .: . \ -., c,.... .p


b

,..

Application is made after excavation and placing of footings, after grading and leveling, after
construction and after earth filling.

2
..~--~----~------

...

fw4ui$ll4f
1 pJ)RT
1 I=RT

.
.;

~'T10N

..

RENTOKJL TERMITE PROOFING


When the subterranean termite infestation is located, Rentokil termiticide solution is introduced into live mounds found within the premises. Trenching of the ground at 15-inch depth
immediately adjaeent to the outside faces of the walls and drenching of the trenches with
Rentokil termiticide solution at .the rate of two (2} gallons per lineal meter.
Drilling 3/4 inch diameter holes .a t 18.inch (0.45 m) cel'ltres and 3~inch (0.075 m) distance
from the outside/inside faces of main walls with the use of portable automatic roto-hammer
drills. Drilling of 3/4 inch ~eter holes around the infested post areas.
Application by pressures of the solution into each drilled. hole at the rate of two (2) gallons

per hofe by means of sub-slab injectors.


Application by brush or spray of Rentokil woodworm killer and/or dusting with chlorinated
hydrocarbon powder on wooden parts attacked by subterranean termites.

5. WOOD PRESERVATIVE (termite

proofing~

wood rot, fungi)

This is a wood preservative, which when thoroughly applied protects lumber for years. It is
recommended for protection of wood against powder post beetles (BUKSOK) powder post
termites (UNO$), decay causing fungi such as sap stain and dryrot. One brand name by shell
is ALOAITE. This is applied undiluted with a paint brush (2 or 3 coatings) or a sprayer. A liter
of this preservative can treat a minimum of 10 $Q. m. of lumber per coating. This come in
two grades, clear and broWn, another brandname is XYLADECOR by Boysen. This is light
and weather resistant which protects the wood while beautifying it. Xyladecor is highly recommended for exterior use and is available in eleven colors. Other known brands are cuprinol of Dutch Boy. Solignum and many others. Cuprinol also contains water repellent additives to protect wood against weather and comes in 5 colors such as teak, nut tree, pine,
chestnut and rosewood.

i
1

'

1.19

SOLIGNUM PRODUCTS (Jardine Oaviesl


a. Exterior . Brown - (self staining external wood preseNative} a low-:cost, self staining
preservative for the treatment of alt external timbefs. It is av8Hable in three co&our
. shades, lighr medium and dark brown~

wooef

b. Colourt...-a cl8ar wood preservative fluid for the Pf8I8I'Y8tive tr8!8tment of al new and
existent external and intemal timbefs .which witt afterwai-ds be protected wtth a double
surface coating.

c. Solignum Timbertone-an organi9 solvent ~pe decorative wood preservative which


imparts colour to wood whilst allowing the grain to show through. It is of the pigmented
fungicidal type and is compatible with wood preservative treatments and most proprietary
exterior wood stairs. It is available in range of ten decorative shades for use on external
. ~nd internal timber. The timbenone colour ral)9e includes cherry red, mahogany. Birch
gray, golden oak, tea~, black, forest green haz8l, Oxford blue and walnut.
.
.
For use 011 doors and windows, sheds, fences, wooden balcony floor and balusters, panelings.

120

d. Pre-treated Lumber-are lumber that is imp{egnated vvith a preservative through


vacuum p;_.ure. One source is PACWOOD INC. which uses TANALISEO lumber,
which is treated at their factory and delivered to the site. The preservative used is
Tanalith CCA-Type C which penetrates the wood from one and a half inches and deeper.

6. FIREPROOFING
a. To prevent the fire from spreading at once, lumber, plywood, wood doors, etc. are
painted with a liquid that penetrates into the wood. When there is fire, it reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progressive burning. One brand name is RESIST-A-FlAME.
This liquid, when applied, retains tbe natural beauty, gives ad~ strength and more marketable value as it protects materials against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping
painting can be applied over this liquid. One gallon of this liquid can cover from 200 to 300
Sq. ft.

b. Another good method is by using asbestos fireproofing boards instead of plywood.

c.

Provision of the Fire Code or Fire Safety Construction, Protective and Warning System.

1. Fire protectton features. such as sprinkler systems hose boxes, hose reels or standpipe systems and other fire fighting equipment.

Sprinkler Sysjem- Automatic fire suppressiOn ~ysteinis an integrated system of un


derground or overhead piping or both connected to a .source of extinguishing agent
or medium and designed in accordance with fire protection engineering standards
which when actuated by its automatic detecting device suppresses fire within the
areas protected.

..

121

t
.
.

C::aiLI~~

~Q-=----Y~--~-v-------1
-

8E1-0W
lo()ftf.?)J

PENDANT

PP~

f>\fE$

?>

1\80 V'c

papa \.-.

1\Rf:

a__..,

f I p1 tJ Go

WHElJ

expos~

corJCEALeO ON CEIUNG

Dry Stllndpipe System -a type of standpipe system in which the pipes are normally not filled with water. Water is introduced into the system through fi~e service
connections when needed.

SIAMESE. TWIN

CCNNECfl~

fbr

f~trud~~

tla'l

2. Fire alarm systems.

3. Fire walls to separate adjoining buildings, or warehouses and storage areas from
other occupancies in the same building.

4.. Provisions for confining the fire at its source such as fire resistive floors and walls extending up to the next floor slab or roof, curtain boards and other fire containing or
stopping components.
5. Termination of all exits in an areas affording safe passage to a public way or safe dispersal area;

6. Stairways, vertical shafts, horizontal exists and other means of egress sealed from
smoke and heat.
7. A fire exit plan for each floor of the building showing th~outes from each room to
appropriate exits, displayed prominently on the door of each room.
8. Self closing fire resistive doors leading to corridors.
9. Fire dampers in centralized airconditioning ducts.
10. Roof vents for

u~

by fire fighters.

11. Properly_marked and lighted exits with provision for emergency lights to adequately
~luminate exit ways in case of power failure.

7. RATPROOFING
There are so many chemicals, powders, medicines rat food poison, that are being sold to kill
rats but these are temporary as rats proliferate in all nooks and spaces, gnaws almost-anything and moat of an which is very disturbing, they make holes on th& corners of floors and
baseboa~ds .

One way of discouraging rats and preventing them from gnawin g the wood is to put a galvanized sheet on the corners of a room. Science had proven that r.ats almost always start to
chew or gnaw only at the corners of a room and not on the midd!e . (The natives of Bontoc
had used this theory although they used thick wood t o protect their floor placed on the four
(4) postS of their~ouse as a protection from other small animals).

,_.t:---

plaw1 g .1. g,m


.r-T { 6 fla?r

HOW.THe ~Toe~
DO IT

8. RUSTPROOFING
A. GALVANIZED Iron prote-ction System
One brand name is WEATHERKOTE Type 5 by shell which is an emulsion to be applied
t~ G. I. sheets installed 6 months and more.
PREPARATION

1. The surface to be treated: shall be clean, firm and free from grease or oil. Rust, flack
ing paint, etc. shall be removed by wire brushing .
2. Treat any weak areas asf~lows:
a. Thin or weak areas, laps and nail holes shall be primed to approximately 4.. (0.10 m .l
each side of the weak area with Weatherkote block, diluted if necessary with mineral
t~.trpentine. Allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours under average outside conditions.

b. An undiklted brush coat of Wll81herkote Type 5 Bitumen ErnWsion shaD be appledover the primed area.

c. While the above coat is wet, an openly woven fiber gla~ membrane such 8S' Wea~
therKote Fiber Glass Membrane 3401 shall be embedded into and covered by thewet
film of Type 5 Emulsion, ensuring that the membrane is less
width than the film
Emulsion. Allow to dry.

in

3. After the surlace has been cleaned ohust by wire brushing, it shall be primed w ith a
brush or spray coat of Weathercote Black, diluted if necessary with Mineral Turpentine. Allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours under average out side conditions.
4. One heavy brush or spray coat of undiluted weatherkote type 5 Bitumen Emulsion
shall be applied to the whole area at the rate of 1 to 1 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. Allow
to dry.

123

5. Apply one brush or spray coat of weatherkote Aluminum at the rate of 1/3 91allons per
100 sq. ft. Other colours, green, red, and blue are available, with a spread of 25-30,
square meters per gallon.
When a colored finish is applied, sand blinding of the last coat of Weatherkote Bitumen
Emulsion (4) while still wet, is advisable. Brush off excess sand When dry and apply the
colored finish. Allow a period of two (2) weeks after drying of the Bitumen Emulsion be.fore applying Weatherkote Coloured finish.
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS REQUIRED PER 10 SQ. METERS OF

AREA.
Weatherkote Black
Weatherkote Type 5
Weatherkote Aluminum
Weatherkote Colours

1/3 gallon
1_to 11/2 gal.
1/3 gal.
25-30 sq. m. per gal.

B. COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND


Another brand name is CHESTERTON, a zinc-rich coating that protects iron, steel and
aluminum surfaces against corrosion. It also protects all iron and steel industrial equipment. piping, ducts, structural work, water tanks, automotive. marine, etc. Use indoors
or outdoors-above, around or under water. Effective to 300F 1149C).

*A

superior onepackage, smooth flowing cold galvanizing compound.

*Microscopic pure zinc particles give intimate bond to iron or-steel. Self-forming oxide
prevents rust and corrosion by galvanic action.

* Dries to a flexible,

noncracking coating that permits bending without chipping.

Protects welds on both bar metal or previously galvanized surfaces.


Use as a touchup or marred, hot-galvanized surfaces.
Forms strong base primer for painting or may be left as final protective surface.
CHESTERTON COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND is a zinc rich compound with 95%
zinc in the dried film. Unlike hot galvanizing, it well readily take a top coating. It is an ex
cellent primer for painting providing three optimum benefits: (1) bonds to metal, (2 provides rough surface allowing the paint to bond to the primer. In large scrapes, it will pre
vent rust creeping under the area still coated. In production it provides a quick, low cost
way to cold galvanize parts of finished products. In maintenance or construction, it eliminc!tes costly down time and provides years of protection for all iron and steel surfaces,
structures or equipment such as air conditioning units, agricultural machinery, automo
tive bodies, fences, _marine equipment, oil rigs, and offshore drilling structures, oma
mental iron works, pipe lines, railroad equipment, structural steel tanks, transmission
towers, underground pipe lines, etc.

124
--~-

C. ROOFING GALVANIZED IRON G.t SHEETS


To prevent rust and insure longer life to galvanized iron sheets, apply red oxide primer to.
the roofing sheets, or apply REO LEAD PRIMER. When dry, apply an all weatber .roof
paint or galvanox roofing paint. (see Chapter or paints for different brands).

D. GALVANIZED METAL WATER TANKS


A known brand used is Shell Weatherkote Bitumen Emulsions which may be used for
tanks containing drinking water without fear of contamination but complete drying of
the Bitumen Emulsion is essential before placing the vessel into service. This should not
be used in tanks where the temperature of the water is in excess of approximately 100F.
Where the entry of water would impinge directly on the bituminous surface this should
surfa~s must be
allowed to weather for approximately six months before treated as under.

be protected by setting tiles in the Bitumen Emulsion. Galvanized

PREPARATION AND TREATMENT OR SURFACE AREA


The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of light rust deposits by wire brushing or sand
blasting (or. if heavily deposited with rust or mill-scale, the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned by grit blasting, flame cleaning, mechanical chipping, etc.) and must be completely dry. Neutralizing rust solutions can be used to give satisfactory results.
1. A priming coat of Weatherkote Black shall be applied at the rate of 1 gallon per
300-400 sq. ft. Allow to dry for a minirm:.m of 24 hours under average outside weather
conditions.
Mineral Turpentine may be used cautiously to dilute shell Weatherkote black of considered necessary to facilitate ease of appiication.

Note: Oil based Primers are not suitable for this application.
2. Apply at least two heavy brush or spray coats of shell Weatheri(ote Type 3 Bitumen
Emulsion, each coat being .laid on the rate of 1 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. Each coat
shall be allowed to dry (no brown stain when rubbed with a wetted finger). Brush
coats should be applied at right angles to each other to minimize the effects of brush
marks.

Note: Where water is of neutral or alkaline reaction, a cement slurry should be


added to the Bitumen Emulsion before it is applied consisting of 1 volume
cement, 1 volume water and 10 volumes shell flintkote type 3 Bitumen
Emulsion which is added slowly to the cement slurry.

CURING: The above pr.otective coating shall be completely Clry and cured before 1he
tank is filled with water. This may take a week or more, depending on dry~
ing conditions and some form of artificial drying may be required in order
to accelerate the drying process.
Estimated Quantities of Materials Required:
1 gallon of Weatherkote Black per 30()...1100 sq. ft.
3 gallons of Shell Wea1herkote Type 3 per 100 sq. ft.

125

9. FLOOR PROTECTION AND SURFACING


A. FLOOR SEALER (Anti Skid)
By Pilipinas shell is in synth,etic resin-based coating incorporating an abrasive aggregate
to provide an anti-slip finish: Nonnally applied by tr.owel. It comes in different ~olouni like
blue, green, grey, red, yellow.
This is an anti-sUp coatjng over many types of base, especiaUy in location$ where wet or
oily conditions prevail, ex: on steps and ladder treads, around machinery, or inclined .
ramps, platforms, steel or wooden decks, around swimming pools and showers, in kitchens, garages, etc. It may also be applied to steel, wood, aluminum, filed surfaces but
should not be applied to asphaltic surface.

APPLICAt'ION
1. Always ensure that the surface of the base is clean, dry, sound and free from oil,
grease, flaking paint, etc.
2. Stir the material thoroughly before use.
3. Apply the material thinly by means of a steel float with as 1ittte trowelling as ~ble. A .
one-coat application of 1 mm (approx. 1/32") thickness is normally sufficient. (for exposed steelwork, 2 coats is nonnal).
Covemge:

5 liters per 10 sq. m. at l mfT1 thickness.

B. WEARSCREED
Wearscreed is a three-component flooring unit containing exact quantities of epoxy
resin base and hardener with specially selected aggmgates. A coloring pigment may be
used when a coloured finish is required. Priming must be carried out with Wearsereed
Primer a two-component unit containing measured quantities of epoxy resin base and
hardener, ready for mixing. Application is done by stiff bristle brush for the Primer and
steel trowel for screed mix.

The POT life for primer is approximately 1 hour and for screed mix by approximately 46
minutes curing time: after laying, a minimum of 24 hours should elapee before light traffic. is allowed. Heavy traffic only allowed after 72 hours the coverage: Primer-approximately 8 sq. m . per unit, Screed mix: approximately 1.7 sq. m. per unit at .6 mm thick-

ness.
126

C. TENNIS COURT SURFACING


This is a brand name by shell Filipinas. Weatherkote sand mastic playing surfaoe for tennis, pelota, squash, and basketbaU courts is a 12 mm thick topping laid on such base as
asphalt, concrete, asphaltic concrete, steel or anyfirm base that can withstand the load
requirements. This is a resilient, jointless and quiet surface recommended for both indoors and outdoor applications with good sufficient drainage in case of the latter.

a. Baae Preparation
1. Observe proper slope, ex: 1 inch for every 12 feet from end to end.

2. Remove all debris, dirt, dust and loose materials.


3. Repair cracks, patch up holes and uneven or broken areas.
b. Mastic Laying (on concrete base)
1. Suction: Wet out the concrete surface by hosing-down widl clean tap water. Atlow to soak overnight. Pooling of water should be removed before priming.

2. Priming: Mix thoroughly Weatherkote type 3 with equal amount of clean water,
using a suitable stirrer. Apply the primer with a stiff brush in a scrubbing action to
achieve good penetration and bonding with the surface dust. Allow the primer to
dry.

3. Bonding: :ro achieve positive bonding of the mastic on to the base, apply undiluted Weatherkote type 3 over the dry priming coat, using a soft broom or brush
just prior to laying of. the mastic. Don't lay over dry bonding coat, care must be
taken to keep the area free of all foreign matters.

4. Mixing:

The Weatherkote sand mastic comprises Weatherkote type 5, clean


fine sand, .and water in 1:4 ration. (1 part Weatherkote ahd 4 parts sand by
volume). A pan type mixer is recommended, although in its absence it could be
done manually with shovels in the following sequence:
Add one volume of weatherkote to 4 volume of sand and mix.

Add water to obtain proper consistency. 'tt is essential that the quantity of water
be established at the first and second mix . On subsequent mixes retain 10% of the
water required to adjust mixing consistency. Mixing must continue until uniform
color and homogenous mixture is attained.

5. /..Bylng: It is suggested that the mastic mix be laid in alternate bays of 2 m wide
using 12 mm screed bars. However, it has been found out that with the aid of
gauge No. 18 G:l. wire as levelling guide, the mix is poured and spread in bays' Qf
. about .SO.em. Atong the length of the court. No screed bars are used, hence no ir. regular edge. In a way this helps in minimizing directional cracks. This .could be
done as follows:
a. Over the still wet bonding coat spread themix borrowed from the mixer.
b. Level the mastic with a wooden float at the same time

comp~ cting

it.

c. After the initial set, that is from 40 to 90 minutes, after laying, finish the surface
with a steel trowel.

6. Rolling: The second stage of compaction is with the use of a 200 kg. roller,
done as soon as the surface can take the weight without pick-up .. This is done
along the whole length of the court, then across, observing an overlap of 3 .. to 4"
in each stroke. If rolling is delayed, a much heavier one is required. If the next bay
is laid to form a joint with an existing dried edge, apply a bonding coat where the
new mix lap with the old bay.

7.

P.lnting: Pri""t the rolled and cured surface with acrylic latex paint and allow to
dry. Paint the primed surface uaing two undiluted coats of filled acrylic latex observing proper color combination8.

'
D. ACRYLIC FLOOR FINISH -a brand name by CHESTERTON is a clear, high-glass, non
flammable copolymer, Chesterton Acrylic floor finish can be used as received for as
phatt, vinyl, linoleum rubber or terrazo floors. It is specially formulated for high traffic
areas such as public buildings, offices, schools, industrial plants, institutions, hospitals
and shop floors.
Chesterton Acrylic Floor finish is an effective, tetSgh, water base surface floor finish that
needs to buffing after it is applied. Acrytic floor finish is an acrylic base, self-polishing,
non-scuff, floor finish that provides a bright, durable, protective coating on all typeS of
floors. Formulat~ using an acrylic copolymer emulsion of optimum particle size to assure a dean, smooth, glossy film: .
Chesterton Acrylic Floor Finish will resist repeatesJ mopping-, scrubbing, water 8pills and
detergents, yet can be easily removed with Chesterton Ammoniated stripper and cleaner
when desired. When it is uneconomical to buff and where heavy traffic areas are subjected to frequent scrubbings, Chesterton ac.rylic floor finish, a metallic crosslinked acrylic copolymer is recommended.

E. CHESTERTON URETHANE ENAMELS -a brand name used for protective coating for
floors, walls, machinery & equipment. It is super-tough, abrasion and chemical resistent,

high-g1088 and aetf-curlng. Chesterton urethane Erlamets comes from a family of synthetic
reeana used ae protective coatings. The sing~. aelf-curing, oil modified, polyu~
rathane floor enamels are recognized for their superior toughnela, wearabilty and good
cheriicaltllilnance: Th8'v yield . . . th8t touqh, ltard end flaxi)le. They pan8ball8 andseal porous surfa~. yet retain a surfac' that gives a tough, resistant, high gloss or nevv
or old floOrl. It is excellent abrasiOn resistBnce to withstand heavy traffic in work area&.
Chemical resistance permits use' in loartions subject to spills, drips and leaks.

are

Coverage is 400 sq. ft./gal. or 37.2 aq. m/1. and comes in variety of colors like black,
clear, tile red, white, medium gray, light ,gray, medium brown, yeiiQW,. forest green, raw

lienna.

F. POLYURETHANE FLOOR .VARNI.SH


Another brand name for protection of wood floor especially gymnasiums is HUDSON
polyurethane floor varnish by century chemical corp. This is a sealer-topcoat floor finishing .system that cures to a tough, non--slip glcuy polymhane film. This is tlef'd. ~
film which does not crack, peel or chip off. Reaists staining scratches and abrasions.
Aoor washes dean ta.t and eaay with plain wet-mopping. One application works for
years. ft aa.o emphasizes woOd grain. Its cofoumess formulation enhances the natural
shede ancf beau1y of wooden .fl0of8. Wood -colour .stains accentuate wood grains. tt
adheree firmly to propelty sand&d and cleaned wood and parquet floors with ordinary

paint brush.

10. DESCALERS, PAINT & CHEMICAL STRIPPERS


.

A. CHESTERTON PAINT STRIPPER- is a brand name which is a heavy duty gel that
softens and lifts paint from wood, metal, plaster, concrete, etc. It atso removes varnishes, lacquers and industrial finishes .
All brand names in the.paint industry has also their own paint remover brands.
B. CHESTERTON DESCALER and CHEMICAL CLEANER
Another brand name which etches concrete prior to painting. It cleans stains, rust, algae
fron1 concrete buildings, walks, etc. It removes cement build-up from forms, trucks,
equipment, tools, etc. It removes hard water build-up, lime scale, corrosion from boiler
tubes. Concentrated formula may be diluted w ith water.
Chesterton Descaler and Chemical cleaner with. Metal Acid inhibitor is a strong, mutti:use, liquid a<:id , formulated with a compatible inhibitor for a wide range of applications.
In use, its dissolving action on rust and scale is fast and thorough . Its acid formulation
dissolves lime scale and rust right down to the base metal or concrete with the sel~ive
inhibitor protecting metal surfaces.

11. CONTROL. PROTECT AND MANAGEMENT


Actrol Systems PTE ltd. of Singapore is supplying and installing these systems for the.con-

trQi, protection and Management of Buildings. Some of the protective and controling items
are Architectural Hardware, Electric locks, alarmed Exit Devices, Gentral lighting control,
Central Proprietary Management System, Access Control Systems and Others.

129

CHAPTER .
.

~ ~~ ITi1 ~ ffl1 ffi1 [Q)


~cg @J~~ rnJ ~~ .

PAINTS and PROTECTIVE COATINGS


Painting is done for the reason of decoration, to be used tor sanitation, preservation, im- ~
proved lighting effects, improved heating effects, improved working conditions, safety, and
economy.

MATERIALS:
1. PAINT -a mixture consisting of vehicles or binders, with or without coloring pigments,
adjusted and diluted with correct amounts and types of additives and thinners, which
when applied on a surface, forms an adherent continuous film which provides protection,
decoration , Sl'nitation, identification and other funct ional properties.

Drying:
Paint dries by evaporation, oxidation , condensation, polymerization , or any combination
hereof.

a. Oil Paint -

The components of an oil base paint are:

1. Body - That solid, finely ground materi81 which gives a paint the power to hide, as
well as color a surface. In white paints the body is also the pigment. The products
most widely used for paint body are white lead, zinc oxide, Lithopone, and Tita
nium white .

2. Vehicle - a nonvolatile f luid in which the solid body material is suspended. The
vehicle should consist of !rom 85 to 90 percent drying oil and the remainder thinner
and drier. The drying oils include linseed oil, soya-bean oil, fish oil, dehydrated
castor oil, tung oil, perilla oil, and oiticica oil.

3. Pigment-materials which give the paint its color. In the case of white paint, the
body is the pigment. Color pigments are classified into two basic groups.
a. natural group - obtained from animal, vegetable and mineral.sources, such as
iron oxides, chrome oxide, cobalt oxide, siennas, ochres, umbers and also carbon black.
b. synthetic pigment group ...,.-phtalo-cyanines (coaltar derivatives) similar to those
used to make dyes.

Red pigments - red lead, vermilion red ochres.

Brown pigments - burnt ochre, burnt sienna, burnt umber


Yellow pigments - chromium oxide, zinc oxide, cadmium oxide
Blue pigments -cobalt blue, prussian btu~, ultramarine blue
Green pigments - chrome green, viridian and emerald green.

Black pigments - carbon black and lampblack


4 . Thinners -are volatile solvents, materials which have a natural affinity for the
vehicle in the paint. They cause the paint to flow better; They evaporate when the
paint is applied. The most common thinner is Turpentine, made from distilling gum
from a number of pine trees.

5. Driers - organic salts of various metals such as iron, zinc, cobalt, lead manganese,
and calcium, which are added to the paint to accelerate the oxidation and hardening of the vehicle.

Oil paint therefore signifies a paint in which the vehicles is a drying oil. Linseed oil is
most generally used due to its great ability to absorb oxygen and change to a solid
state. This oil vehicle is modified by the use of thinners and driers, for which the best
thinner is Turpentine .

132

'

b. Alkyd Paints-so called because of the syr:tthetic resin-alkyd resin, used in the
paint formulation. Alkyd resin is obtained by the combining of an alcohol and an acid .
Alkyd paint~ are produced by combining a drying oil, such as Linseed oil .or dehydrated castor oil with glycerine (the alcohol) and phtalic anhydride (the acid).
Styrenated oils are also used to produce paints that possess fast drying and excellent adhesion characteristics.
Alkyd paints have mild alkali resistance but excellent water resistance because of
its excellent weathering ability, alkyd paint is particularly useful for porch and deck
enamel and paints for other such exposed conditions.
With modifications, it is used in making white baking enamel, such as is used on
stoves, refrigerators, etc. Linseed alkyds give fast drying times and tougher films.
Alkyd resin may also be mixed with latex paints . They usually produce greater permanence and better adhesion properties.
c. Resin- Emulsion Paints (latex) - paints iA which the vehicle is a synthetic resin
emulsion, usually made from one of four basic resin types:

but11diene-styrene, polyvinyl acetate, epoxy resin or acrylic resin.


The body of these paints is usually titanium dioxide or lithopone, and soya bean proteins are added to the formulation using butadiene-styrene and polyvinyl acetate to increase consistency and stability.
The thinner is water. and it must be added a dispersing agent to keep the pigment and other materials suspended in the emulsion. These emulsion-based paints
tend tO foam, so as a defoaming agent, usually tributyl phosphate is added. Finally
methyl cellulose is added to improve the floor qualities of the paint.
Polyvinyl acetate emulsions produce a much tougher skin than the butadiene-styrene types and so can be used as exterior as well as interior paint. One of its most important applications is in exterior finishes for ~asonry and stucco.
Acrylic and epoxy-resin emulsion paints require no oxidation to form a film and
remain flexible after drying. They exhibit great resistance to weathering and no
tendency to lose their adhesive qualities or color with age. They contain no protein
and therefore are not subject to deterioration. However they are more costly than
other emulsion paints.
d. Metallic Paint - consist of a metallic pigment and a vehicle. The pigment is very fine
flakes of aluminum, copper, bronze, zinc, or tin. They are suspended in a vehicle
which may be a natural or synthetic varnish, a quick drying lacquer, special bronzing
lacquer, or bituminous-based vehicles, depending on where the paint is to be used.
Spraying is the best method of applying metallic paints as it permits the spreading
of a uniform film and encourages even depositing of the metallic flakes used for decorative purposes.
e. Luminescent Paint -made by adding fluorescent and phosphorescent pigments to
any one of a number of drier free vehicles. including alkyd marine varnish, spirit varnish, or quick-drying lacquers. Color also may be incorporated into luminous paints.
Luminescent paints may be used in resid~ntial buildings to produce special effects.
They are used in hospitals, schools, factories, hotels, etc.
f. Intumescent Paints (Fire-retardant) paints which retard the passage of fire to the
surfaces beneath them. When a surface coated with an intumescent (fire-retardant)
paint is exposed to heat or fire, it puffs up and forms a thick, insulating crust which
greatly retards the penetration of heat to the coated surface.
These crust is composed of tiny air cells which build up to a thickness of about 3
in. It seals out the air, or oxygen, required for combustion so that only very intense exposure to heat will result in charring the undersurface.

133

A variety of these paints are available, with a vinyl, alkyd, polyurethane, epoxy or
solvent base. Both opaque and transparent products are manufactured in flat, semigloss, gloss, or satin finishes.
They may be applied by brush, roller or.spray over a variety of surfaces such as
wood, paper, acousticaltile , concrete, stucco, plaster, conventional paint, enamel or
varnish .
Drying time to a dust free condition will vary from 30 minutes to 20 hours, coverage will vary from 150 to 500 sq. ft. per gal, depending on the particular type of paint
used and the kind of surface to which it is applied.
g. Polyester-Epoxy Coatings - a heavy-bodied paint used on concrete and masonry walls and has a higher percentage of solids than normal. The coating system consists of high - solids vinyl filler material to be applied directly over a concrete block or
other masonry surfaces, and high-solids , pigmented polyester epoxy topcoat.
The filler material may be applied by brush, roller or spray at a thicknes~ which
will give approximately 16 mils of dry film. The top coating, available in either semigloss or gloss finish in approximately 90 different colors, will add another 6 mils of dry
film to the coating.
This coating system creates a tough, long-lasting finish which is highly resistant
to water grease and many chemicals and which can be cleaned with harsh caustics.
This is suited to areas of heavy traff:ic such as schoolrooms corridors, kitchens, cafeterias, laboratories.
'
A similar top-coating material is available for a clear finish, in either gloss or semigloss. It is to be used over previously painted surfaces or to preserve the natural appearance of wood, brick or stone.
Both filler and top coating requir~ overnight drying time before applying a second
coat and approximately two weeks for complete cure.
I

2. VARNISHES
Varnishes constitute a group of more-or-less transparent liquids which are used to
provide a protective surface coating, at the sametime they allow the original surface to
show but add a lustrous and glossy finish to it.
All varnishes have basically the same components as paints, body, vehicle, thinner, and
drier. However, varnishes may be divided into three groups.
a. NaturaiResin Varnishes
Made from natural resins, or exudations from living trees, while others are fossil
resins. Some of these must be heat-treated to produce an oil-soluble gum, white
others are naturally soluble
oil.

in

Resin, a by-product from the distillation of iurpentine, is also used to make varnish. Varnishes made from a combination of oil and natural resin are known as oleoresinuous varnishes .
The best thinner for varnishes is turpentine, a distillate of gum from a group of
pine trees. It evaporates slowly and gives varnish brushing and flowing qualities that
no other solvent can give. It also aids oxidation of the drying oil by absorbing oxygen
from the air and passing it to the oil.

Marine and Spar varnish are classified as long-oil since it contains from 40 to 100
gal. of oil per 100 lb. of resin. The result Is a varnish which will produce as tougher,
more durable and elastic film.' but which takes longer to dry and produces only moderate gloss.
Floor Varnishes are classifiP.d as medium-oil varnislles. It contains 12 to 40 gat of
oil per too lb. of resin. They dry faster and have a harder film than long oil varnishes
but are not as impervious to water-.

134

Rubbing and Polishing varnishes belong to the short-varnishes. It contain from


5 to 12 gal. of oil per 100 lb. of resin. They dry quite rapidly and form a hard, brittle film
that will not stand much rough usage.
b. Modified N.a turai-Resin Varnishes
This group of varnishes is made with a natural resin which has been altered by
chemical action. Common Resin is heat treated with glycerin to form an ester gum,
and this gum is used as the body for the varnish . T-his varnish is less expensive than
oleoresinuous varnishes.

c. Synthetic-Resin Varnishes
These are varnishes produced by the plastics industry, including phenolics, nitrocellulose, amino resins, alkyd resins, vinyl resins, polyethylene, polysterene, silicone,
acrylic resins, and epoxy resins.
Some of these are thermoplastic, and some are thermosetting. Many varnishes
made with plastic resins reach their greatest potential only when baked.
3. ENAMELS - when pigment is added to a varnish, the result is an enamel. Any of the varnish types can be used, and the durability of the enamel depends to a large extent on the
quality of the pigment. Since varnishes do not contain the opaque body material which
paints do, enamels do not have high covering power for best results, they require an opaque undercoat.
Baking enamels, made with synthetic resins are used on most household appliances,
curtain -wall panels of various kinds, aluminum shinSies and sidings, and various interior
and exterior trim materials.
4. SHELLAC - shellac is the only liquid protective coating containing a resin of animal
origin. The resin is an exudationof the lac insect of India and Southeast Asia, deposited
on the branches of trees.
The resin accumulations are collected, crushed and dissolved in alcohol to produce
orange shellac, so called because of its color. By bleaching the resin, pure white shellac is
produced .
Various grades of shellac are made by varying the amount of resin dissolved in a gallon of solvent. These grades are known as cuts; a 4 lb. cut means that the shellac contains 4 lb. of lac resin per gallon of alcohol.
The alcohol used is usually special denatured alcohol or proprietary denatured alco-

hQl. Shellac dries quickly, is easy to apply, and produces a tough, elastic film on wood,
metal glass, cork, and leather. However, it should not be used on work exposed to outside conditions especially under strong sunlight since it will discolor and to water containing alkali since it causes the shellac to soften and whiten.
Shellac finds considerable use as a seal coat over stains and fillers and is sometimes
used as a complete finishk1g material by itself. This is known as french polish, using a linseed oil-soaked applicating cloth, co"nsists of many layers of shellac applied one over the
other.
5. LACQUERS -a new product made from synthetic materials to take the place of varnish
for clear finishes. Most modern lacquer is based on nitrocellulose used in combination
with natural or synthetic resins and plasticizers. There ingredients are dissolved in a mixture of volatile solvents which evaporate, leaving a film to form the protective coating.
Thinners are mixed with lacquer just prior to application to reduce the consistency
for spraying, to control the rate of drying, and to reduce the cost of lacquer. They include
a group of alcohols ethyl, butyl, amyl and isopropyl.
When another class of materials, "pigments" are added to clear lacquer, the result is
lacquer enamel, available in a w ide range of colors.

135

Eight varieties of clear and colored lacquers:

'1. clear gloss lacquer-a clear lacquer that dries to a glossy finish in one to four hours. It
1may be rubbed and polished with oil.,
2. clear flat lacquer-dries without gloss. 9ften used to produce satin effects.

3. Tinting lacquer-a concentrated colored lacquer mixed with clear lacquer to produce
lacquer enamel.

4. Brushing lacquer-a slc:>w-drying lacquer formulated specially for brush application.


5. Bronzing lacquer-a clear lacquer into which are mixed metallic pigments to produce
metallic effects.

6. Shading Lacquer - a slightly colored lacquer used to produce wood color tone effects
on furniture.

7. Water-white lacquer-this is an exceptionally clear lacquer that produces a protective


coating of greatest transparency over pale finishes.

8. Dipping lacquer-this is designed for1application by the dip-tankjmethod and is avail


able both clear and in colors.

6. STAINS-materials used to apply color to wood surfaces. They are intended to impart
color without concealing or obscuring the grain and not to provide a protective coating.
They may be used to accentuate the color contrast of a wood grain, to even up color
differences or to imitate expensive wood colors on surfaces which lack desirable color or
grain.
There are a number of types of wood stain available, based on the kind of solvent
used to dissolve the coloring mattera. Water-soluble stains -synthetic dyes, many of which are coal tar derivatives manufactured in powder form and in various strengths. They are dissolved in hot water at a
specified rate in ounces per gallon, depending on the depth of color required.
Water stain is easy to apply by brush , sponge, dipping or spray. It is nonfading
and nonbleeding, and it gives deep, even penetration. However, it has a tendency to
raise the grain of wood. thus roughening the surface and necessitating careJul sanding. Water stain will air dry in about 12 hours.
b . Spirit Stains-made from dyes which are soluble in alcohol and are manufactured
both in powder form and in ready mixed liquid form .
This type of stain produces the brightest and strongest colors but is most sus
ceptible to fading. It also tends to bleed and to raise the grain of the wood. Because
they dry rapidly spirit stains are usually applied by spray; because of their high penetration quality. they are often used for iefinishing, repair work, and for staining sap
streaks. Drying time is usually from 15 minutes to 2 hours.
c. Penetrating OU Stains -made by dissolving oil-soluble dyes in coal tar solvents such
as tolnol, benzol, or xylol and further thinning the vehicle with common petroleum solvents. Oil stains are usually produced as a ready mixed liquid.
Stain is easy to apply by the sponge, spray or dip method, but the surface must

be wiped after application to remove excess stain. Oil stains have a tendency to bleed
into finish coats and are not as light-fast as water stains but have no tendency to raise
the grain. Drying time varies from 1 to 24 hours.
d. Non Grain-Raising Stains-this type of stain is made using light-fast dyes which are
soluble in such substances as glycols, alcohols, and ketones. They are designed to
produce all the advantages of the stains previously mentioned with none of their dis-

136

advantages. They hav~ moderate penetration, do not raise the grain of wood, and dry
in from 15 minutes to 3 hours. They do not run or bleed and; because of their fastdrying properties, are usually applied by spraying.
e. Pigment Wiping Stains-this type are made from translucent mineral pigments
ground into a drying oil. They are applied by brushing or swabbing the surface with a
cotton cloth and are allowed to set for various lengths of time after application.
They have good light resistance, no tendency to raise the grain, and color uniHowever, they lack the staining capacity of many other stains, and, because
they are not as transparent as some others, tend to obscure the fine grain of wood.

formity.

7. FILLERS-finet'S are finishing materials which are used on wood surfaces, particularly
those with open grain, to fill the pores and provide a perfectly smooth, uniform surface
for varnish or lacquer. Filler is also used to impart color to the wood pores and so emphasize the grain.
Two general types of Fiii~![S:

a. Pasta fillers-used on open-grained woods. This consist of a base or body, pigment,


nonvolatile vehicle and thinner. The body is generally a translucent, inert material
{such as silica, some silicates, and carbonates of calcium and magnesium) which will
fill the pores withoufstaining the wood.
Color pigment is usually umber, sienna, or similar colors which will give the filler
the desired color. Use thinners similar to those used in varnishes:
Filler is applied by brush, by spray or by dipping and must be thinned to the proper consistency for the method of application used. It is then wiped off, acr.oss the
grain, before it sets on the surface.
b . Liquid Filler-used on closed-grained woods. Usually a varnish with a small amount
of body material added. It is used on medium, close-grained woods in essentially the
sa.me way as paste filler but has much less filling capacity.

..
8. SEALERS - the primary purpose of a sealer is to seal the surface of the wood and pre-

vent the absorption of succeeding finish coats. It may be 3pplied to bare wood that has
been sanded smooth or applied over the stain or filler:

A sealer also tends to seal in the filler, blend the stain, stiffen any raised wood grain
and thus make sanding easier, and form a bond between the wood and the finishing

coats.
Shellac is a widely used sealer. Thinned out to a 2 to 41b. cut, depending on whether
varnish or lacquer is to be used.
Varnish sealer is available for use under varnish or lacquer. It is similar to varnish cut
back until the material contains 30 to 35 percent solids . This type of sealer air-dries in
about 8 hours or may be force-dried in 1 to 2 hours at 150 F. The surface must be sanded
after the sealer is completely dry.
Lacquer sealer is the type of sealer most commonly used under lacquer finishes. It
consists of the same type of resins from which lacquer is made, with plasticizers and solvent and, in addition, solid content in the form of zinc and calcium stearates.
These are called sanding agents and increase the ease with which the sealer surface
may be sanded when dry (Sanding Sealer!:
9. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT
To be used on all non-painted concrete, synthetic finishes, rubble, brick, and wash-out
as a protection trorn absoiJ)tion of water and prevent moss, alkali, fungi to
destroy the surface.

finishes

137

PRODUCT NAMES
INTERIOR & EXTERIOR FINISHES
All of the finishing paints have different product nam~s for each brand of paint an example is
as follows:
Nalcrete flat paint is Dutch Boy
Tropicote flat paint is Sinclair
Product to use as per Location of Surface
1. For interior and exterior concrete surfaces
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

concrete sealer
stucco and concrete primer
interior flat paint
exterior gloss paint
quick dry enamel
portland cement paint-oleoresinuos base paint.
gloss or semi-gloss AQUA paint-thin with water

Note: before painting newly plastered concrete surface apply a mietralizer an alki free
concentrate (using 1/2 liter per Bottle to 10 liters of water of any brand) used to
wash unfinished interior or exterior stucco, concrete masonry, or plaster surfaces
before painting where free alkali may be present, or where moisture conditions
may cause efflorescence
2. For exterior wood.surfaces
a. Exterior Gloss House paint
b. enamelized house paint
c. latex house paint
Note: before painting exterior wood surface, apply e~terior wood primer which is fungicidal of any brand. (non-fungicide is also accepted)
3. For exterior galvanized iron roof. Tiles of asbestos
a. portland cement paint
b. tatex roofing paint
c. acrylic roof paint
Note: before applying paint. Apply red oxideprimer or red lead primer-(a high quality
rust inhibitive primer formulated to prepare iron and steel surfaces for subsequent
coats).

4. For interior wood surfaces


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

flat wall enamel


satin egg-shell semi-gloss finish
interior semi-gloss finish
interior gloss enamel finish
latex semi-gloss finish
(ideal for acoustic boards)

Note:

before applying paint, sand paper and apoly interior primer ana sealer-an alkydbased sealer for interior wood panels, cabinets. Thinner is added.

5. For interior & exterior ferrous metal surfaces


a. Quick drying enamels
b. aluminum paint
c. slow chalking tank enamel
Note: before applying paint, coat surface with red oxide. primer or red lead primer, or
zinc chromate primer.

138

6. For furniture and wood craft finishing

a. wood pasta seeler-designed to fill and seal open grain interior wood used for
paneling, ftoor, furniture it will produce an even level finish. Use thinner or oilwood
stain.
b. oilwood stains - for staining open-grained or close grained wood filler.
c. lacquer sanding sealer-a clear sealer f or wood to be finished w ith lacquer. It has
excellent holdout properties requires pess sanding.
d. clear gloss lacquer -top quality high gloss clear lacquer for cabinet fixtures, doors,
paneling and furniture. Use lacquer thinner.

e.

clear dead flat lacquer-flat finish for wood cabinets, doors and. paneling and other
surfaces requiring a flat finish thin with lacquer thinner.

f. super dead flat lacquer

g. natural finishing oil


h. polyurethane clear or pigmented finish -is a tough, floor varnish recommended
for wood tiles especially for basketball Gyms. (Hudson brand) .

i. lacquer glazing & spot putty-is a heavy-bodied putty and glaze for filling dents
and imperfections on metal or wood surface use lacquer thinner.
Gladng putty-:-a high quality alkyd resin fitler for repairing dents, holes and cracks oo
metal or wood surfaces. Use thinner and tinting colors:

EXTERIOR WORK
MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED:

1. Cement Plaster Sprayed


Cement and Concrete

SPECIFICATIONS:

MATERIAL BRAND

For FLAT, WATERBASED FINISH


First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 18 Epoprime
Sinclair's 475 Stuc-o-life

First coat

Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic


primer
Fuller's 820-Speedflo
Exterior Latex #1436
concrete white

Finish coat

First coat

Finish coat
First coat

Finish coat

First coat
Finish coat

Dutch Boy's Flat


Nalcrete Thinned with
1/2 liter water per 4
liters of paint
Dutch Boy's #55 BOO
Flat Nalcrete
Sherwin William's
No. 650 S~W House
Paint
Sherwin William's
No. 551 S-W Exterior
house paint
Boysen's Permacoat
concrete sealer
Boysen's Permacoat or
Monol(ote

139
'

First coat
Finish coat

Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies #600 Acrylic latex paint

For GLOSS, WATERBASED FINISH


First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 18 Epoprime
Sinclair's 5000 Aqua
Gloss

First coat

Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic


primer
Fuller's 3200 Gloss
Latex

Finish coat
First coat

Finish coat
. First coat

Finish coat

First coat

Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

2. Hollow Block Masonry

II

:11

II

II
II

II

II

ll

II

II

I[

For FLAT, WATERBASED FINISH


First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat
f::irst coat

140

Dutch Boy's #100x


Exterior gloss latex
house paint
Dutch Boy's #100x
Exterior gloss latex
Sherwin William's
No. 650 S-W Exterior
house paint
Sherwin William's
No. 550 S-W Exterior
house paint
Boysen's #7{E, white
permacoat concrete
sealer
Boysen's permacoat
gloss latex
Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer
Davies #525 Acrylic glass latex paint

Sinclair's 1010 HoHow


Block primer
Sinclair's 475 Stue:-o-life
Fuller's 70-W-6
Acrylic primer
Fuller's 820-Speedflo
Exterior latex
Dutch Boy's Flat
Nalcrete
Dutch Boy's #55 BOO
Flat Nalcrete
Sherwin William's
No. 650 S-W Exterior
house paint

Finish coat

Sherwin William's
No. 561 S-W Exterior
house paint

First coat

Boysen's #705 white


permacoat concrete
sealer
Boysen's permacot or
monokote

Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies #500 Acrylic latex paint

First coat
Finish coat

3. Wood Siding, Paneling, Trims,


Fascias, Eaves, Soffits

For GLOSS, OIL


FINISH
First coat

\1

H'

II

II

Finish coat

First coat
Finish coat

First coat
Finish coat

First coat

Finish coat

First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 289 Exterior


Wood primer
Sinclair's 500 SPI
Exterior House Paint or
290 100% Exterior
House Paint
Fuller's Exterior Wood
Primer No. F-3588
Fuller's 2900 Exterior
Gloss house paint or
620 Exterior Glossy
house paint or 8605
Exterior Semi-gloss or
8100411 purpose Latex
Dutch Boy's #25 F
Exterior Wood Primer
Dutch Boy's #100x
Latex house paint or
#113 Enamelized
house paint.or #10x
exterior gloss house
paint

Sherwin William's
No. 450 S-W
undercoat
Sherwin William's
SWP Gloss house
paint
Boysen's #302 white
exterior wood primer
Boysen's Exterior house
paint
Davies #1320 Exterior wood primer
Davies 1200 Exterior gloss house paint

141

Fo! CLEAR, VARNISH


FINISH
Two coats

Sinclair's 460 Varshield


Gloss Varnish or
Sinclair's 463
Varshield Flat Finish
Fuller's 17782 Sanding
Sealer

Door, Trim primer


Two coats

Fuller's #7737 Clear


dead Flat lacquer
#34-F1 Clear Flat
laquer
#34C-7F Clear gloss
lacquer
#6500.Heavy duty
varnish gloss
#6502 Heavy duty
varnish flat , #V-223
Water resistant SPAF
Varnish

Two coats

Dutch Boy's TT-V-lZC


versatile Spar Varnish

Two coats

Sherwin William's
LIN-X Clear Gloss
Varnish

Two coats

Boysen's 154 Supper


Varnish (for eaves
only)

TV'!O

coats

lJavies #68 Daxpar varnish


. or #69 Urespar

Two coats
~

For SEMI-TRANSPARENT STAIN


FINISH
One coat

Sinclair's 3900 Stainteke


semi-Transparent
stain

One coat

Fuller's Non-grains
Raising Wood stains
or (Oil woodstain)
penetrating

One coat

Dutch Boy's

One coat

Sherwin William's
penetrating oil stains

One coat

Boysen's oil W ood


Stain

One coat
One coat

142

Davies Oil woodstain

4. Galvanized, Iron Sheet


Roofing

For FLAT, OIL


FINISH
Pretreatment

First coat
Finish coat
Pretreatment
First coat

Finish coat

Pretreatment
First coat
Finish coat

Pretreatment.

First coat

Finish coat

Pretreatment
First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 12 GALVAwash
Sinclair's 26 Zinc
Chromate Primer
Sinclair's Portland
Cement Paint
Fuller's Turco prepaint ,
or Redipaint
Fuller's Red lead primer
R-4171 or 83-Y-1F Red
oxide primer
Fuller's #2200 series allweather
#1400 series Galvanox
#3001 series roof Decor
Dutch Boy's tex thin
Dutch Boy's #041 zinc
Chromate Primer
Outch Boy's Portland
Cement (3 coats)
Sherwin William's
Galvanized Iron
Primer, B50 Ax1
Ner roofl
Sherwin William's
Galvanized Iron
Primer, B50 Ax2 or
S-W Kromic Metal
primer or S-W Red
Lead Primer No. 1-A-.
Sherwin William's
S-W exterior house
paint
Boysen's
Boysen's 1009 Acrylic
Roof Paint
Boysen's 100% Acrylic

Roof Paint
Pretreatment
First coat
Finish coat
Pretreatment
First coat
Finish coat

Davies
Davies
Davies
Davies

Wash Primer
#940 Zinc chromate primer
Portland cement or
Acrylic roof paint

143

5. Galvanized Iron Gutters, Cappings Conductors, Flashing

For GLOSS, OIL


fiNISH
Pretreatment
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat
Pretreatment

First coat
Finish coat

Pretreatment
First eoat
Second coat
Finish coat
Pretreatment
First coat

Second coat

Finish coat
Pretreatment

First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Pretreatment
First coat
Second coat

144

SinClair' 12 GALVAWash
Sinclair's 26 Zinc
Chromate primer
Sinclair's 248 Sash and
Trim primer
Sinclair's Sinco lux
Quick Dry Enamel
Fuller's Turco red
paint or WO #1 or 7861
acid component
Fuller's Red oxide
primer 83-Y-1F
Fuller's 2900 or 620
Exterior Gloss house
paint or Galvanox or
roof decor Acrylic Latex
Boysen's
Boysen's 100% Acrylic
Roof Paint
Boysen's 100% Acrylic
Roof Paint
Boysen's 100% Acrytic
Roof Paint
Sherwin William's
Sherwin WiHiam's
S-W Galvanized Iron
Primer or S-W grip
primer
Sherwin William's
S-W metal tastic
S-W-P house paint or
sitver brite aluminum
paint 115
Sherwin William's
Same on 2nd coat
Dutch Boy's #61-006
metal treatment
solution mixed with
equal proportion of
tap water.
Dutch Boy's 1040-Zin
Chromate Primer
Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's exterior
house paint or
nalcrete
Davies Wash primer
Davies #940 Zinc chromate primer
Davies Exterior house paint or
Davies Roofshield

Finish coat
Pretreatment
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

6. Asbestos and Ceramics

For FLAT WATER


BASED FINISH
FirSt coat
Finish coat
First coa~
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 100% Acrylic


Roof paint
Sinclair's 100% AcryUc
Roof paint
Fuller's Roof Decor
Acrylic Latex paint
Fuller's Roof Decor
Acrylic Latex paint
Dutch Boy's Flat
Nalcrete
Dutch Boy's gloss of
Nalcrete

First coat
Finish coat

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's
Loxon's Exterior
Masonry Acrylic
Latex Paint, K12 W x7

First coat

Boysen's #705 White


Permacoat concrete

Finish coat

Boysen' s permacoat or
Monokote

First coat
Finish coat

Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies Acrylic roof paint

sealer

EXTERIOR & INTERIOR WORK


MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED:

1. Metal Sash, Trims, Mullions


Ornamental iron and other

SPECIFICATION:

MATERIAL BRAND

For FLAT, OIL


FINISH

Ferrous Met&J Sutfaces

First coat

Second coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's S-15 Chrome


oxide pnmer or
Sinclair's SP.01
Red lead primer
Sinclair's 248 Sash
and Trim primer
Sinclair's Sirico Lux
Quick dry Enamel

145

First coat
Apply
Turco WO #1

Finish coat

First coat

Second coat
Finish coat

First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Fuller's 183-R-9F Red


oxide
#R-4171 Red
Lead
#567-Y-1 Sine
Chromate
Fuller's #2900 Exterior
Glossy paint
#620 Ext. Glossy
paint
#4720 Series
Synthetic ODE
or Quick drying
Glossy
Dutch Boy's #057 Red
Lead or #056 Red
oxide #041 Zinc
Chromate Primer
Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's #6-105
silver Finish Aluminum
Paint or Quick drying
Enamel in 25 popular
colors.
Boysen's #371 P.O. Red
Lead primer
Boysen's #1070 Red
Bootoping Paint
Boysen's same as 2nd

coat
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

146

Sherwin William's
Kromik metal primer
Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's Keon
Lustral Enamel

First coat

Davies #950 Red Lead or #940 Zinc chromate


or #915 LZI or 910 Preparakote
Red Oxide

Finish coat

Davies #400 Series quick drying


Enamel or Davies ffl-00 Series
Marine Finish

2. ALL NON-PAINTED
Concrete, Synthetic Finishes,
rubble, brick and washout

INTERIOR WORK
1. WOODWORK, Plywood, Wall
and Ceiling

For FLAT, CLEAR,


FINISH
Two coats

Sinclair's 445 Watershield (Silicone Water


repellent)

Two coats

Fuller's #6610 water


repellent sealer

Two coats

Dutch Boy's #4-()45


Concrete Sealer, #103
tucco and concrete
primer," #61-198 clear
masonry water
repellent

Two coats

Boysen's #99 Aquaseal


(water repellent)

Two coats

Sherwin William's
Weather Clad
Penetrator

Two coats

Davies #400-X Silicone Water Repellent


or Davies #100-X Aqualock

For FLAT, OIL


FINISH

First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

(Use Fulatile. or

Sinclair's 975 Since


prime undercoat
Sinclair's 1900 Canyon
color Flatwall Enamel
Fuller's Sinto Seal 4789
Fuller's 420 Int. Flat
wall paint
Fuller's 4440 Flat wall
enamel
400..000 Fulcoat

Flatwall
First coat

Finish coat
First coat

Finish coat

Dutch Boy's #001


Interior primer and
sealer
Dutch Boy's #813 Flat
Wall Enamel
Sherwin William's S-W
Wall primer and
Sealer No. 25
Sherwin William's S-W .
Flat tone alkyd Flat
Enamel

First coat

Boysen's 1300 white


interior primer and

Finish coat

Boysen's Flat'Wall
Enamel

First coat
Finish coat

Davies #1360 Interior primer & sealer


Davies #3/X) Flatwall enamel

sealer

147

For SEMI-Gl:OSS OIL


FINISH
First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 975 Sinco


prime undercoat
Sinclair's 1000 Sinco
Satin

First coat
Finish coat

Fuller's Sintoseal 4789


Fuller's 520 semi-gloss
Enamel or 300-000
Fulcoat semi-gloss or
8600 ODE or 200..000
Fulcoat ODE

First coat

Dutch Boy's #001


Interior Primer and

Finish coat

butch Boy's #22-101


Interior semi-gloss
finish

First coat

Sherwin William's S-W


. Flat rite enamel
undercoat
Sherwin WiHiam's S-W
Flat rite enamel

sealer

Finish coat

Finish coat

Boysen's 1300 white


interior primer and
sealer
semi-gloss finish .

First coat
Finish coat

Davies 11360 Interior primer & seater


Davies #600 Interior Semi-gloss finish

First coat

For FLAT, TEXTURED


FINISH
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat
Finish coat

148

Sinclair's 890 Pigmented


Sealer
Sinclair's 975 Prime
undercoat
Sinclair's 515 Nusurf
Textured .Paint
Fuller's 18300-AB-02
Textured Acrylic Bond
Fuller's #8301-W-01
Gloss white
~-W-01 s~mi gloss
white
18303-W-01 Flat white
Fultex Latex Textured
. paint
Acrycast' S<;>lvent acrylic
Textured paint

First coat

Boysen's #300 white


interior primer and
sealer
Boysen's wondercoat
Boysen's same as above

Second coat
Finish coat

Sherwin William's S-W


Wall primer and

First coat

sealer
Second coat

No. 25

Sherwin William's S-W


tone alkyd Flat
Enamel
Sherwin William's same
as 2nd coat

Finish coat
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Dutch Boy'!;
Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's

First coat
Finish coat

Davies #1360 Interior primer & sealet


Davies Classitex textured coating

For BLEACH FINISH


Wear rubber gloves for
protection. May be applied either by brush or
spray. Always start with
wood;,leach No. 1 first
while it is w t, follow immediately with woodbleach No. 2. Do not
wait for woodbleach No.
1 to dry up before appl-.:ing woodbleach No.2 in
order to obtain a good
bleach.

2. ACOUSTIC WALL and


CEILING

For FLAT, WATER


BASED FINISH
Sinclair's 1100 10-sountt..

One coat
One coat

(1/4 liter
One coat
One coat

of water per
41iter can
of paint)

Dutch Boy's #88-510 x


Latex semi-gloss
finish
Sherwin William's

One coat

Boysen's

One coat

Davies #500 Series latex paints


Davies #25 Paste woodfiller natural
Davies #20-00 Series oil woodstains

One coat

149

3. Wood Paneling, door, closet


cabinets
'

Prepare sur:face with


one coat of Paste wood
Filler. If stain isrequired,
use colormat ic wood
stain

Sinclair's 50 paste wood


Filler
Sinclair's wood colormatic woodstain if required
Fuller's #1205 natural
paste wood filler
Fuller's #779 Water
clear gloss
Dutch Boy's #23-11
natural wood paste
Dutch Boy's #13-56
clear flat lacquer
Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's
Boysen's tlfl) Natural
Wood Paste Filler
Boysen's
Davies #25 Paste woodfiller
N atural, Davies 20-00 Series
Oil woodstains

For CLEAR, LACQUER


FINISH
Rrst coat
Finish coat

First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

Fuller's
Fuller's
Boysen's lacquers
primer surface
Boysen's gloss lacquer
enamel

First coat
Finish coat

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's

First coat

Dutch Boy's #23-11


Natural wood paste
filler
Dutch Boy's #13-56
clear flat lacquer

Finish coat

First coat
Rnish coat

150

Sinclair's CL-101
Sanding Sealer
Either one of the
following:
Sinclair's CL-150 High
Gloss Lacquer
Sinclair's CL-151 water
white High Gloss
Lacquer
Sinclair's CL-156 Flat
Lacquer
Sinclair's CL-157 Water
white Dead Flaat
Lacquer

Davies
Davies
or Davies
or Davies

#701 Hi-solids
#702 Hi-solids clear gloss lacquer
#703 Hi-solid dead flat lacquer
#704 Water white gloos lacquer

For FfNISHING OIL


FINISH

n7 Finishing

One or Two coats

Sinclair's
oil

One or Two coats

Fuller's

One or Two coats

Sherwin William's
penetrating oil clear,
V82 V X 50

One or Two coats

Dutch Boy's #31-001


Natural Finishing Oil

One or Two coats

Boysen's

One or Two coats

Davies #66 Finishing oil

One or Two coats


4. DOORS, CLOSET and
CABINET work (Kitchen)
Subject to water

For QUICK DRY


ENAMEL FINISH
SPRAY APPLICATION
First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Sinclair's AF-22 Sinlux


Primer Surfacer
Sinclair's AF-24 Sinlux
Glazing putty
Sinclair's AF-22 Sinlux
Primer surfacer
Sinclair's Sinco lux
Quick dry enamel

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Fuller's
Fuller's
Fuller's
Fuller's

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats
First coat

Sherwin
Sherwin
Sherwin
Sherwin

Second coat
Third coat
Finish with two or
more coats
First coat
Second coat

William's
William's
William's
William's

Dutch Boy's lnsanto


Primer surface.
Dutch Boy's lnsanto
Glazing putty
Dutch Boy's lnsanto
Enamel
Dutch Boy's lnsanto
Reducer #1 076
Boysen's #303 white
Enamel undercoat
Boysen's Quick drying

Enamel

151

Third coat
Finish w ith two or
more coats
Rrst coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Boysen's same as 2nd


coat
Boysen's
.Davies
Davies
Davies
Davies

Pro-lux primer
Pro-lux glazing putty_
Pro-lux primer
Quick-drying enamel

For DUCO FINISH


(Pigmented lacquer)
SPRAY APPLICATION
First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish w ith Two or
more coats

Rrst coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Fu~er's

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Sherwin
Sherwin
Sherwin
Sherwin

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

Dutch
Dutch
Dutch
Dutch

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two- or
more coats

Boysen;s
Boysen's
Boysen's
Boysen's

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
. more coats

152

Sinclair's LU-100 lacquer


Primer surfacer
Sinclair's LU-202 lacquer
Glazing & Spot putty
Sinclair's LU-100 lacquer
Primer surfacer
Sinclair's AL-100
Automotive lacquer
Fuller's
Fuller's
Fuller's

Davies
Davies
Davies
Davies

William's
William's
William's
William's

Boy's
Boy's
Boy's
Boy's

l1f1J LacQuer Primer surface


1700 laCQUer putty
1700 lacquer primer surface
1700 Series automotive lacquer

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats
First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Finish with Two or
more coats

INTERIOR WORK
MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED:
1. Cement Plaster Sprayed
Cement and Concrete

SPECIFICATIONS:

MATERIAL BRAND

For FLAT, WATER~

BASED FINISH
First coat
Finish

coat

First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 300 Acrylic


primer
Sinclair's 475 Stuc-o-life
or 1600 vinytife
Fuller's 70~W-6 Acrylic
primer
Fuller 88 Flat Emulsion

Latex 100-000 Fulcoat


Latex
First coat
Finish coats

First coat

Finish coats

First coat
Finish coats

Sherwin William's S-W


Wall Primer and
Sealer No. 25
Sherwin William's S-W
Flat tone alkyd Aat
Enamel

Dutch Boy's #4-046


Concrete S~ler
Dutch Boy's #105
Stucco and concrete
paint
Boysen's #700 white
permacoat
Boysen's #703 white
permacoat tinted to

desired shade.
First coat
Finish coats

Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete seater


Davies #500 Series acrylic latex paint

153

For FLAT; WATER


BASED TEXTURED
FINISH
First coat
Finish coats

Sinclair;s 300 Acrylic


primer
Sinclair's 515 Nusurf
Textured Paint

First coat
Finish coats

Fuller's
Fuller's

First coat
Finish coats

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's

First coat
Finish coats

Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's

First coat
Finish coats

Boysen's
Boysen's

First coat
Finish coats

Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies Classitex textured coating

First coat
Finish coats
For SEMI-GLOSS
WATER BASED
FINISH:
First coat

Finish coats
First coat
Finish coat
First coat

Finish coats

Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic


prir.1er
Fuller's 3400-semi-gloss
,..latex
Sherwin William's S-W
Wall Primer and
sealer No. 25
Sherwin William's SW
Semi lustre

First coat
Finish coats

Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's

First coat

Boysen's 1705 white


permacoat concrete
sealer
Boysen's permacoat
semi-gloss latex

Finish coats

First coat

154

Sinclair's 300 Acrylic


primer or SP-4000
Acrylic Emulsion clear
sealer
Sinclair's 4000 Aqua
Satin

Davies #515 Semi-gloss latex

For STIPPLE ENAMEL


FINISH
First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 890 pigmented


sealer
Sinclair's 975 Sinco
Prime undercoat
Sinclair's 782 Semigloss stipple

First coat
Second coat

Fuller's
Fuller's

Finish coat

Fuller's

First coatSecond coat


Finish coat

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's

First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's

First coat
Second coat
Finish coat

Boysen's

First coat
Second coat

Boysen's
Boysen's
Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer
Davies Classitex 155-02 semi-gloss
Davies 156-m Gloss

For STIPPLE FLAT


FINISH
First coat
Finish coat
First coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 890 Pigmented


Sealer
Sinclair's 781 Flat Style
Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic
Primer
Fuller's 8300 Series
Textured coatings

First coat
Finish coat

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's

First coat
Finish coat

Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's

First coat
Finish coat

Boysen's

First coat
Finish coat

Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies Classitex 155-01 Flat

Boysen's

155

2. HOLLOW BLOCK MASONRY

For SEMI-GLOSS OR
FLAT WATER BASED
FINISH

First coat
Semi-gloss

Finish coat

or Flat

Finish coat

First coat
Semi-gloss
or Flat

Finish coat
Finish coat

Sinclair's 1010 Hollow


block primer
Sinclair's 400 Aqua
Satin
Sinclair's 475-Stuc-o-life

Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic


Primer
Fuller's 3400 Semi-gloss
latex
Fuller's 8100 all purpose .
latex

Semi-gloss
or flat

First coat
Finish coats
Finish coats

Sherwin William's
Sherwin William's
Sherwin Wiiliam's S-W.
Flat tone alkyd Flat
Enamel

Semi-gloss
of Flat

FirSt coat
Finish coats
Finish coats

Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's
Dutch Boy's #55 BOO
Flat Nalcrete

First coat

Boysen's 1700 white


permacoat concrete
permanent semi-gloss
latex
Boysen's
Bovsen's

Semi-gloss
or Flat

Finish coats
Finish coats

Semi-gloss
of Flat

First coat
Finish coats
Finish coats

Semi-gloss
of Flat

First coat
Finish ci>ats
Finish coats

Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer


Davies 1500 Series latex paints

OTHERS

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

156

Neutralizer-for new masonry to neutralize the alkali and ensure adhesion.


Concrete putty Filler
Paste wood Filler-natural, oak, mahogany, walnut.
Sand paper
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Latex paints
Paint and varnish remover
Blackboard Slating
Steel and Water Tank-red oxide primer then chlorinated Rubber paint.
Silk-Screen paints
Acoustical Ceiling paints
Polyurethane Gloss Finish - For wood surface, Heavy duty plastic varnish .
Tinting colors-yellow ochre, lamp black, purssian blue. Bulletin red, lemon yeflow,

medium chrome yellow, dark chrome yellow, m~ium chrl;)me green, dark chrome,..,enetian red, Burnt umber, Raw umber, Raw Sienna, Bumt S~nna .
15. Bleach Finish - use woodbleach No. 1 and woodbleach No, 2.
16. Sanding Sealer-a lacquer sanding sealer composed of nitrocellulose and hard gum
resin. Airdry to recoat or to sand in one hour. Any lacquer may be used over this sealer.
F:or " Interior use only"

Application of paint

a. surfacepreparation
b. primer

c. First topcoat
d. Second topcoat

.Methods of application of paints and coatings


1. Brush
9.
2. Dip
10.
3. Handroller
11.
4. Decorative roller
12.
5. Cup Gun Spray
13.
6. Pressure fed spray
14.
7. Airless spray
15.
8 . Hot airless spray

Electrostatic Spray
Electrostatic Air1ess Spray
Utho Coating roller
Plywood coating roller
Flow coating roller
Powder Dip Coating
Electrodepositlon

Brands of Painte
1. Davies
2. Fuller
3. Dutch Boy
4. Sinclair
Boysen
Sherwin Williams
Finch
Others

5.
6.
7.
8.

PAINTS
Paints - include the many fluid materials used as thin coating on wood, metals, cement
plasters, brickwork and stucco per protect fire or decorative purposes. These materials
are classified into true paint and varnish, the distinction being that the true paint is a
mixture of a pigment with a vehicle where as varnish contains no pigment. The vehicle
is the fluid portion which is oil and water. It is used for iron sheet and metal to protect
them from corrosion and for wood to guard it from decay and warping.

011 paint -this signifies a paint in which the vehicles is a drying oil. Linseed oil is most
generally used because of its great ability to absorbed oxygen and charge to solid state.
This oil vehicle is modified by the use of thinners and driers, the best thinner is turpentine.
Water paint ...:..signifies a paint in which the vehicles is water paint includes white wash and
calcium. Water paint is made by the slaking quicklime in water, then straining to remove
the lumps and adding water. They are used in a powdered forrr t) mix with water.
Varnish '( Surface)-varnish is a solution of resin in drying oil or in a Y\.. .rtile solvent such as
alcohol in turpentine it contains no pigment and hardens a smoother, hard and gloss
coat by. oxidation of the oil or the evaporation of alcohol.

157

CHAPTER

'

HARDWARE
HARDWARE -metal products used in construction, such as bolts, hinges, locks, tools,
etc. They are classified as:

a. finishing hardware-Hardware, such as hinges locks, catches, etc. that has a finished
appearance as well as function, esp. that used with dooi'S, windows, and cabinets, maybe considered part of the decorative treatment of a room or building.
b. Rough hardware -in building construction, hardware meant to be conceafed, such as
bolts, nails, screws, spikes, rods, and other metal fittings.

Some Finishing t1ardware Brands:


;

1. Sargent
2. Stanley
3. Vale
4. Corbin
5. Schlage
6. Kwikset

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Rabbit
Universal
Eagle
Master
Alpha
Yeti

I. DOORS-an entrance way

a) TYPES

a. flush -a smooth-surfaced door having


faces which are plane which conceal
ns rails and stiles or other structure
when used inside, it Is of hollow
core, when used for exterior it is of
solid core.

160

~-

'

b. Panel door - a door having stiles. rails and sometimes muntins, which form one or more
frames around recessed thinner panels.

~~ __,- - t - - tap r~ll


r - t - - lcXk stl~

.-~-~

Jod< r.21tl

Kinds of Doors
1. Swinging Door

open to

\~t

2. Overhead swing-up garage door - a rigid overhead door which opens as an entire
unit.

. ~
161

3. Overhead roll-up garage door-a door which, when open, a8sumes a horizontal
position above the door opening, made of several leaves.

COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL

4. Roll-up door (solid or see-through aluminum shutters)


a door m<!de up of small horizontal interlocking metal slats which are guided in a track;
the configuration cDils about an overhead drum which is housed at the head of the
opening, either manual or motor-driven.

5. Accordion Door - a hinged door consisting of a system of panels which are hung from
an overhead track. When the door is open, the faces of the panels close flat against
each other. When the door is closed, the edges of adjacent panels butt against (or interlock) each other to form a solid barrier.

M*'Mf

-~

,.,:~
':J

.,
i:"
\}

ry

;I

!,'$

>C

:!

whgn do~
162

'II'J

~$!ey!~~

6. Bi-Folding door-one of two or more doors which are hinged together so that they
can open and fold in a confined space.

:DU,.~ ~~-A
wtwJ-1
~

..

op~r!A.d

""

7. Revolving Door -an exterior door consi.sting of four leaves (at 90 to each other)
which pivot about a common vertical axis within a cylindrically shaped vestibule, prevents the direct passage of air through the vestibule, thereby eliminating drafts from
outside.

8. Sliding Door -a door mounted on track which slides in a horizontal direction usually
parallel to one wall .

t--

--t

9. By-Passing sliding door~ sliding door which slides to cover a fixed door of the same
width or another sliding door .

163

10. Sliding Pocket Door - a door which slides inside a hollow of the wall.

11. Dutch Door -a hinged door which is divided into two. The upper part can be opened
while the lower portion is closed.

12. French Door

Examples of finishing Hardwares

A. To Hung a Door
HINGE -a movable joint used to attach support and tum a door about a pivot, consists of
two plates joined together by a pin which support.the door and connect it to its frame, enabling it to swing open or closed.

1. Butt Hinge-consist of two rectangular metal plates which are joined with a pin . in large
hinge, the pin is removable, in small,hin~. it is fixed .

...
.

..

.. .

,-\

,~ ': : e

164

:r- 8 , ..
...
'
J' .

e ,

dYie

of 'th2 0'ht1dnc.a/ly

~rojedlrfg fdrt~ of #Je


rnge tM>ugh wYr0J the

f'lrl po$7e~

Fllst Pfn Hlng11-a hinge in whichJhe pin is fastened permanently in place.

'"

Full Surfllce Hinge -a hinge designed for attachment on


the surface of the dOOf and jamb without mortising.

Ll

zz~zzzz,

L006 Joint Hinge -a door hinge having two knucktes,.


one of which has vertical pin that fits in a corresponding hole
in the other, by lifting the-door up, off the vertical pin, the
door may be removed withl unscreWing the hinge.

Loose Pin Hinge-a hinge having a removable pin which


\ permits its two parts to be separated.

165

Ptlume/16 Hinge - a type of door hinge having a single ;oint


of the pivot type, usually of modern design .

0/we Knuckle Hinge - a paumelle hinge with knuckles


forming an oval shape.

2 . Spring Hinges - a hinge containin~ one or more springs, when a door is opened, the
hinge returns it to. the open position automaticaUy, may act in one direction only, or in
both directions.

b. Double action
ExceUent for u5e in restaurants, hospitals, kitchens, the door opens by just pushing it
with the shoulder or feet.

166

b. Single IH:tlon

C'i,'

-r:::::?

_,:.e

..

.,

e
e

:9

3. Pivot Hin. . - the axle or pin about which a window or door rotates.

VtHtk:tll Spring Pivot Hingtt -a spring hinge for a door which is mortised into the heel
of the doOr. the door is fastened to the floor and door head with pivots.

top prvot

167

From Sunut Magazine

How to make bookshelves ves p. 30

ROUGH HARDWARES
I. NAILS
C. W -common wire nail with head and for strength
-box nail also used for strength

[!

:>

..----------

COl========;>>

FIN - finishing nail without head


-casing nail also withOut head

SIZES, 1", 1 1/2", 2", 2 1/2", 3'", 3 1/2", 4'", 6"


Masonry nails

~=======::::=->

or concrete nails
These are nails which can be driven 3/ 4 deep to concrete mortar, or brick.
NOTE: Choose a nail three times longer than the top thickness being fastened . For example, use a 1 1/2 nail when nailing 1/2 plywood to a 2 x 4 stud.
Other common Hammer- driven fasteners

br.aJ~

====-

O:D

168

.
I

,..

'T
~

II. SCREWS

Ctassified by gauge (~meter), length, head type, and metallic make-up.

:Gauge 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14

HEAD TYPES

CruNTER GlMK

FLAT HEAD ~E.W


- ~rr~

FLUSH

D.~ low woaJ~


~flt.e

ROUND. HEAO ~REW

OVAL. H E:AD SCREW

PHILIPPG f-IEAD

Sl-fEET-ME'tZ'L

~W

- 169

lagScrew

screw hooks and eyes can hang object

WASHERS

.i%14' tl4M

Flat

Counter Sunk

Tr
~lush

BOLTS
Bolts have threaded shafts that receive nuts. To use them, a hole is drilled, pushing the bolt
through and adding a nut.

bolts tightened with screw while holding the nut with

a wrench.

NUTS

Flat square nut

170

Hex nut

Square nut

Wing nut

acomnut
Hunger bolt8 - for hanging fixtures from walls.
L
2" to 6" diam. 1/ 4, 5/16", 3/ 8"

W/ll!ll/J..,. .

UDStn

to attach flat surface to round poles or pipes.

Binding Sctews-Join two $lJrf&ces and are

demountable 1/4 .. to 4" .

JOINERY BRACKETS
To form strong joints

for. decorative -Zinc-plated steel


for Hidden view . .:. . steel ones
for "chest" type - brass-plated type

T~

Pl.A"'fE

171

. : ...

L-BRACKET

Expanded Lath (HYRI8)

a IMtal lath having an open mesh


formed by t1tt1ng; metais sheet.
Used to admit mortar 0[ plastered
cement.

JAW END 'TURNBUCKLE

B. To Fix One Sash


chain. head and foot bolt

.17.2

EYE .A.NO TURN9UCKU:

'

SURFACE BOLT

Cremone Bolt fused to fasten


upper end lower door

~'
DOOR BOLT (BARREL BOLT)

FlUSH B.OLT - a door bolt so de


signed that when applied it is flush
with the face or edge of the door.

CHAIN DOOR FASTENER


A ,device attached to a door and its jamb which limits

the door opening to the tength of the chain. Usually


used in Hotel roOms.

~ C :::=..===:::l

..

173

A variation of this is a mueical chatn -door fastener when door is opened the button ac
nvat~ the battery operated button holder.

C. To Lock The Door

LOCKSET -a complete lock system including the


basic locking mechanisms and all the accessories,
such as knobs escutcheons, Plates, etc.
LATCH - a simple fastening. devi&e having a tatch

bolt, b\.lt not a dead bolt contains no previsions for


locking with a key, usually openable from both sides.

VIEW FROM

~~~

Wfta1 ~ PJn ~ tOOl.,, rt


IS~~ iheblr ar
not M ~ 6efllltf wrl1.a k.f)'.
NIGHT LATCH - Key operated Latch

174

LIFT LATCH-a type of door latch


which fastens a door by rl)eans of
a pivoted bar that engages a
hook on the door jamb. a lever
which lifts the pivoted bar used to
unfasten the door.

LATCH

for ~IA1ng

.doer

RABBETED LOCK
:a lade: or J~d1 t1 Wh1d11h2
faa ~~ fJuQ1 wrfl11t1~ r.abbet
on ;a r:abl).etAJ .&:A?r jamb

OEAO BOLT

;nner Kndl

--- -=flhRa1
'---k:aJ ~It
Button- a small rejecting member used to
fast<.:1l the frame of a door or window.

Knob -a handle. more or less spherical


usually for operating a lock.

175

Escutc/Hion -a protective plate surround-

Use a different Lockaet for each room.

ing the keyhoie of a door or a light switch


(also a Flange on a pipe) .

1. Entnmce Lockset - with a key and

Plllta -a thin flat sheet of material.

strikes -a metal plate or box whi~h is set


in

a doorjamb and is either placed or re-

universal button which when pushed


stays put and locks the door.

2. 8(JC/room Lockset - same as the entrance lockset but simpler in design.

cessed to receive the bQit or latch of a lock,

3. Toilet Lockaet-without a key has a

fixed on door.

Lip Strike ....:.The projection from the side


of a strike plate which the bolt of a lock
strikes first, when a door is closed; projects
0 ut from the side of the strike plate to protect the frame.

button that is pushed to lock inside.

lntegml Lock - a type of mordse lock


having its cylinder in the knob;

hpw-1kl

Bored Lock -a lock intended for installation in a circular hofe in a door.

Roller Latch -a type of door latch has a


roller under spring tension instead of a
bevefed spring bolt, the roJier engages a
strike plate, having a recess formed to receive.

'
Cylinder Lock- a bored lock which has a
cylindrical case into which a separate latch
case fits.

OfLINOEQ LOGK

176

Scrt~H~n

Door Llltch- a small locking or


latching device used on screen doo~ .and
generated by a knob or lever handle, some- '
times equipped with .a dead bolt.
.

Bored Llltch -a latch intended for instaDation in a circular hole in 8 door.

Hasp -a fastening device consisting of a


loop or staple and a slotted hinge plate normalty secured with 8 padlock.

Key-Ptldlock -a devjce which fastens in


position may be operated by a key.

MllgiHitlc Ptldlock -a kind of lock which


opens by using the corresponding magnet
which goes with it.

paJiod<

.H uplock-a kind of hasp that has a bt,Jift-in locking device which can be opened only with a
key.

177

D. Automatic Door Closer


1. Pneumatic Type

2. Semi-Concealed Overhead Type

~- Concealed Type

178

4. Overhead Liquid Type

'

~.

jamb -

J (' i111 I~
r j ~
('\ I I i

}i

,.i ll If :: '

': '

.door f
1.
~~

''

i
i

II

i!

I
l

! \\

\ I!/)\
j
1 iJ I .1
' I li
'

I. ! I:

1iii

I 1/il

'l I
t I

r-. '

i .

I'

II
179

SLIDING DOOR TRACKS

rdiAr

CABINET DOORS-Hinged , sliding, drop down, roll away.


a. Hinged Doors -are of 3 types, flush, overlapping and offset tlip).

180

. . _.-- .------11-.
il

up t1oor Ltm Pi? m:atd~ by


giVIng

two

p2MI~ t~tht?.r

HlNGES
a. Butt Hinges

loo.7A

p11

LOmmon butt

p121110 (tOttlnuouf;) up to~ f.B.et


181

---.

' .......... __ ,~ /

'-.._

--.--+', ____ ......


'

I
I

-.

b. Offset Hinges-used for hanging lipped or overlapping doors, available in semiconcealed and surface-mounted styles.

'\

.... ,.

__

..,..,. /

.I

c. Pivot Hinges -made for both flush and overlapping doors, come in three main
types:
1. side-frame pivot hinges that attach

to a doors top and bottom edges.

2. side - frame pivot hinges that attach intermediately along a door's side edge.
3. Top and bottom-mounted "knife" hin_ges that are quite difficult to attach.
(This is recommended for use where !he cabinet door is touching the side wall).
Sometimes called the washington hinge.

-- - --)

__"_[
'

182

.......

__ ,

/
_,1

-.----
, ____ , ,

--.:.---

II\

""
I
' , ........... _,..,.. , I

'.,

----.--'
\'\

..............

--

~"

d. Invisible Hinges -don't show from the fr.ont and is expensive. They can be used
for both flush and overlapping door.
'

___ ..._ __ =:}

r~,.,

--L\

-- ----

""",......

_"'1f" __
'

__ /
/

...... ...,.

..,./

',

I
~--.,.

//

183

e. Flush Counter Hinge - for a drop down door that can be lowered to serve as work
surfaces (level with the cabinet's bottom) require hinges that lay flush in the surface,
mortise them into both surfaces, they don't show when the door is closed. A droPdown door also requires a chain or stay supp~-rt to hold the door's weight when it's
open.

,.,--........ "'

__J=~* ______
/

-- - -~fl..__

'

>

ilu~h wunt2r Hrng~

SLIDING CABINET DOORS


Use track hardware;
CATCHES FOR CLOSING OF CABINET DOORS IN PLACE

Three Kinds of Catches


1. Friction Catch -any catch which when it engages a strike, is held in the engaged position by friction.

184

2. Magnetic Catch tion.

a door catch flat that uses a magnet to hold the door in a closed posi-

3. Bullet Catch -a fastener which holds a door in place by means of a projecting spring
arctuated steel hall which is depressed when the door is closed.

KNOB

FLUSH RING .

flush Joor pun whrth ~~ mort1~


rnto a .Jcvr; 11.a~ a n11g p~D th2t
fu!J~ fl2t 1nto the tup of 1M puR
whltl not JYI t.u.
;a

ffiowi3

eott-:_.~ l<tlO D

FIU~h KriOD
u~ fa- !1h.d1i19
.dtx>r~ P.I}SI1B.d

111to Jni!PJ

hol~

FIU~J1 Joor pulls mu~r

~ trk?rlt~M

rnfo -th~ .dotJr


185

PULLS

OTHER FINISHING ACCESSORIES

Self Bracket - any over hanging member


projecting from a wall or other body to sup-

port a weight.

Adjustable bracket comes in any width


from 4" to 1r.

Grab Br-a hand grip usually installed in


a shower, which may be used for steadying
are self.

M~tsl brckst- used to support any cabi-

net or shelf.

Spring Door Clo6w-attached above a


screoo door to automatically close it.

186

Hospital Arm Pull-a handle for opening


a hospital door without the use of. hands,
by hooking an arm over the handle.

Psnic Exit Device -Fire exit bolt a door


locking device used on exit doors; the door
latch releases when a bar, across the inside
of the door is pushed. {Convenient for use
in hospit.al theatres, Hotels, Schools, with
fire exits.

HOOk_S AND EYES

Eye Bolt - a. bott having its


head in the form of a
loop or eye.

187

co,bination Hook and Eye -Used for putting in place, a door or a window.

Hook Bolt - a bolt having one end in the


form of a hook.

Concrete Insert-a plastic, wood fiber, or


metal usually' leads plu~ either built in a

diameter 1/4" to 2"


lengths 1" io 4 "

wan or ceiling or inserted by drilling, used


as an anchor or support to hold attached
~oad .

Threaded Rod - all thread from 2, 3, 6,


and 12 feet long (0.60, 0.90, 1.80, 3.60)
1/4N to 1 ~' diameter.
DOOR STOPPERS OR 'UMPERS

ROLLER GTOP

/ -fla""J rubber
I

'--Door Stopper-to prevent the door ~ith its lockset from harming the wall or tiles ;

188

CHAPTER

PLUMBING MATERIALS
CAST IRON PIPES .AND FITTINGS

..

.,,.

,----zt-fl

'

.,

. ,..----"""---t.:

~INGLe

AND DOUQLE
COMBINATION Ye SEND

~N6LE

AND OOU9L..E

UPRIGHT WYI= ~c;;

SNGLE AND DOUBLE


\NVSRTED W~ QR.4NCH~

190

~NGLS )lND DOUBU:


.~ITAJCY'~~

451>

f''xz~y

. (.10 X lJ!5)

11

TAPP~

1?

"1"1::5

4''x '1."

C.RO.G~

ICE

(-'ANfTAR'()
4"X4''

"tAPPE=D
,, ,,1EE
2. X 2.

CR~Tee

(~NJIAIZY)

4'j(4( 1 z')( l'


GANI"V\~Y .,-,:e

~~~TSE

(TAPPED)
4'~2"

.11,: X z''
~NITARY

TEE

~
CRO~~

TEE
(TAPPED)

z'x2"

LEA() FeRRULE

"f!' x~ ,.

191

GT"RAINER
( NICKLE PLATED )

(BRAS<;)
( &TE::.e L)

LEAD
'' P'' TRAP
BRAss~

P ,.

I RAP

YENT~P

DRUM 'TRAP

RUNNING ll<AP

C'i<ON t"OOI
FtTTINGE;
192

RUNNING !RAP
DOUBLE VENT .

'5'' TRAP
WITH VENT

TYPES OF CA<;T IRON PIPE

[II
STANCl'\RD PIPE

~~J
-

DOUBLE HUB

Ill

~ub

4.SOM

]
SINGLE HUB

[
H UBLEGS PlPE

193

"'

SPECIAL CAST IRON FITTING~


( SEWs:< SY~TEM )

.l

~I=====~

f
DOUBLE HUB

REDUCER~

INCI<SA~ER

P-ll<AP W/CRWJTHOUT
VENT<; AND CLEAN OUT<;

REOUCING Q.IORT T

194

LONG TEE W'f'l:

RE:DUC.ING

+S 0 Y

REDUCING LONG Y

PLASTIC. PIPES AND FITTINGS ( DRAINAGt::)

8.7.5 for$b~
( 06f1~) IS<30

OOOBLE ~
gNGLE eRANQ1
e15 tJ 1:E=
e1.5 TSE ~ 2''
1

. +' 1<2~4''~ ?/'

REDUCER ~~z,+"xz"
~%"
.
4 ,..
-:7
1

TAPP~D11 TEE

!'X 1

1111
;-q..

z''x 1 ~

P TRAP W/ pu.JG

OIAMETERc; - 50, 75 ~ 110111tt1


LENGTHS
- 2.00M ..aHJ ~.~M.

CI...E;AN OUT
TY~5 Q=' FITTINGs; IN t11n1
)
~ J . 75 ( -5'

so ( ...

110

(+'')
'

COLOR COOING

?'tw~ wat.llr - bl u~ .
~0w. ~.llf -c::r-2k1ge or Jlfitt q;-3j
ll1dt.Jc;tnal G~mt- gray
car1 muntc.atoo c.able

~wagB ~th11

- '#JloN
or~t1qll)

~m.
195

A<58ESTO~.

PIPE AND

FITTING~

TEE
SANITARY CAOS$ TEE

CROSS TEE
75fJ ELBOW

~,4NITARY

WYE
.

8:J ELBOW

RUNNING P-TRAP

~ITARYTEE

196

:30E'L90W

VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES

..

( <S 'eWER ~~TEM )

~LANT

CUT L-

RUNNING

TEE BRANCH

CUT CURVE

"'TRAP

OFFsPET

'

TEE BRANCH .

197

GAlE

198 .

VALVE.~

GALVANIZED STEEL PIPS FITTINGS


F~ HOT AND COLD WATER Dlf.;fRIBUTJON

TEE

REOUClN6

SOCKET

:'

0
COUPLING

REOUG~G

UN\ON

TeE

BU~HlN6

REOUClNG ELBOW

PUJ6

CAP

199

ll_~l

llll
RETURN SI=ND

200 .

FLOOR FLANGE

SXTENgON PIECE

PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

ADAPTER

POLYTHYLENE

FITTINGS

I=)
90El...BOrV

COUPLIN6

POLYviNYL GHLORIOE ATTINGS (p.y.c.)

ADAPT ER

POLYBUTYLENE S:ITTINGc; ( P.B)

~TRAIGMT

COUPLING

90 E .LBOW
201

COPPER PIPE FrrTINGS


R'R ~ WATER , HOT WATER Dl~iRIOOTla-.1

6PhSOT .JOINT <:.OPPER TO


GAL.V.ANJZED STEEL

FLARED OR a:>MPRESSia-J

COPPER lOGAL.VANIZEO s;TEEL

FL.ARE.D FITTING
FLARED ~ C!M'~~ION TEE
TO THReADED FITTING

SLIP k

202

NUT FE~ULE

WATER CLOSET

VIC.TORIA FREE
PF ZJXJ0 WATERCLQ6ET

illr RXpmavA mamr izHIJrl


~.e~ac;

GYLVANA
~NAPF2~

WA.TER CLOQ;i

fa- m~#~~ totL#


01Jidrbt1~ t01Jet

PF2~

hbt~J r~

for JrNBr~
mattf~

ar.et~~~

~r~ur~

.203

flu91 valve PF 3 531-FV


l!!Dnqat~J bottom aJtl.~>t ~1phtn
~t Dt>wl.

CARMeLA

~ttl~

fm-

L.tWJm~rLt ZJI,
-tm~t~

Jn;h tu-h~Jj

Ltffimon !o!:by

FERNDALE PF ~535- W~ ~I Wli1?


~~11J.o.d

f?Jr :

b~et;M +otJ~t ra:?m~

~ 411.1~-.t:lraJniYig

nm.

ORIENTAL. ~T BOWL PF 3446

Cb1U?lV~, V N.OtJOmlt.aJ y~t -fa~tefuJ hy~U:!H.e. Wrfh


~ymmBtrttal g~ o~ fftp J~'fur .a saf.er footk&
rt!t.Ommi?J'~Jltl ~:
low 6%t aHt:J rur2J] ha7Jt1'j
- publu: t01J.et~

OJ AMANTE ~ PF 3'130
;a

oowr ihat.pwvltks a
mart; of ~na'

prat"hc.al

t;amt.atJon.

~m..BndAi

fa-:
- rural ar;ea

low Cb;f-. ~~
- publ~ todm

205

LAVATORIES

VENTURA .PF 100Z


waJIh~ lava-tz:ry WJih

r.ear OJBrflcw aid ~t

U1~Lh~\
for q~ rwm~ #:.
low ~At tc1~t

SABRINA LAVATORY PF 1005


wall~ hung l.avatry wrth rAar otJTftow

a1J ~-lt1 ~~ tJt~he;-~ ha~


and lt1tAg"al d11t1a Dr~~.
~a:mrunMtJ for boy~ ram

206

LAVATORIE~

DIANA LAVATORY

PF -100~ - waJI-h.Jn~
Javztvry WJth rs- OJJr
flow aid at7t"1H ~ap~

~m~ -fur qrl~ r~

aJN'TESSA PF 5105 -

nm a1A ~JTAY
fl;Jr~ todot

flu;l1~ng

MELtS~ LAVATORYPF 1<X\9- ~-nm1t19 01.a-~ w11i1 fum overflow


r~J.aJfur:
ma~to1let.
hotBI rtom~

lttby to.Jet~

207

_URJNAL

ADMIRAL P F ~~10
w.all ~ hl11g wa4lrut

unrtal
wrf11 ext~J 9MJ/Js auf
Jnt.fgral flu91 ~pr,g~r

~~~~~~

r,et.ommPnJE.d for :
. mBn $

to1J~t

-?u,t.abJ.e for_hots

COMMODORE. PF G6CXJ
wallhung wa~out urrna/ vv1th
. flu<;rung nrn ahd 111tB;T.al tr.ap.
5Utt.abl~

208

for hot~J attd offrtpt;

60APANO SPONGE
HOLDER

PAPE~

SOAP HbLOER

HOLDER

5HOWER HEAD

TONEL RAIL

209

CHAPTER

- ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
TYPES OF C.ONVENIENCE OU1LET~

TRIPLEX

2.. ~ POLE - Z WIRE


(~INGLE)

e@e.

DUPLE><

.f-RJLE -3WlRE
(~INGLE)

1'YPE5 OF SWITCHES

CUTDOOR WEATHER PROOF


RECEPTACLE

FL.U<;H MOUNTE.O

OD

8
~-GANG

GANG

Z GANG

~[JOOD~
4-GANG

SWtrQ-1 W/ Pl LOT
LIGHT

@
0

pusH 8UTT0tJ

212

PUSH SWITQ-f

ll.JM8L$R c:;WITCH

JUNCTION BOXES

XTAGON BOX

l:.EILING OUTLET
90X c.JRCULAR

RECT~GULAR
.~

BUGHING

CSGUAJC?E

VARIOUS TYPE.~ .OF PORCELAIN


INSULATORS

J:'ORCELAIN TUBE

KNOB IN~ULA~

c;R?OL INSULATOI<

213

..

. ~ ! .

: ' .

GElLING OUTLET

'
LAMP

or;oGKET~

~4RFACE

1'1'l:?E:.

<:;OGKEI

RU88ER WATSRPI<OOF
<;OGK.Er.;. FOR CUTI;IDE
u~t=

PENDANT iYPE <;a.kET

FU~E SYl'/IEk'L

214

C IRCULAR LOON\

ELECTI<ICAL TAPE.

aif
r; ==ijJ

~~

~
TYPE<; C)F CONDUIT FITTING<;

215

c;

FLE.X'\9LE LLIMS (NOll MET.ALU(.)

C.LIP

"TYPE

Wl~e

FLEX18LE

~C.EWAY' OR

MOULDING

GTEEL CCNOOT
~E~EL

RACf:WAY
CONDUCT~

~DUCTOJ2

. FLEX'IBLE AR~ DUPLEX WIRE:.

u:AD

~r=ATH CAB~

~WITCH

21 6

BOX

PS

c.

BULB .. TYPE tl~~l6NAT10N~

MINIATURE

LAMPS
217.

INPIRECI'"
LIGHi

DIRECT
LIGHt

.}
GEN. DIFFUQ:

JNDIFZEC.T

Dli<ELT

~f::MJ-INDIK'ECT

GEN. CLAS51FJCA110N OF LUMINAJRE~

60 WATT<;

THREE:.- tOO

. 100 WATT~
~OWA~

WATT<;

-iOOW16 .

THREE 40 WATI~

THREE 40 WATT~

218

100WAIT~

FIV~

Z.OWTG.

THR~EtOO
WATT~

~OWATTS.

TWO 40 WAIT

100W1.; .

f\.~~t'n'

, ..

FOUR 30WATT

40 WATTs.

fi..UORESO:NT

100WATT~

THREE
TW040WATI~

40

~OWAT12;

WATT~

75-W WAI"t?;

~CJWAT'T~

LAMP

STYLS~

UGED IN

VARIOU~ ~OOMG

219

c HAPTER..

FLOORING MATERIALS
FLOORING MATERIALS
The final wearing surface which is applied over the subfloor.
Factors in Choosing Materials
a. Type of building involved - residential, industrial or commercial.
b. Type of usage to which the floor will be subjected - Light foottraffic, heavy foot
traffic wheeled traffic .
c. Special requirements-sound absorption qualities, resilience, color, smoothness
resistance to chemicals, resistance to abrasion, or ease of maintenance.
d. Cost- includes both labor and material.

.=

- 1_

___,

r~i l~t

rn$1h~na-

c..apaoty of a mat~na1 t~ r~~VJ"


1t~ ongnal <S"tZI! an.d . .;ha~ 21ft~r
dBformat 1011

~ ~lfl/2111
1. WOOD FLOORING -made both in softwood and hardwood.
SOFTWOOD (PINE)
a. Strip Flooring -standard strip is used for residences, offices and schools, heavy
strip is for industrial uses, bowling alleys and dance floors.

tor19u.e znd gf(X)vB locJtM


b~OW

th.a LRrltBr

STANDARD ~RIP

grcov60 for

~hip L~p
HEAVY

222

~!RIP

~plinB.;

HARDWOOD {NARRA, TANGUILE, YACAL}


This material is Kiln dried and made with tongue-and groove edgeS and ends and usually has

a channeled or grooved bottom surface. The purpose of the single or double channel or
groove is to equalize moisture absorption and reduce cupping, thickness is from 3/8 up to
1 11/16 in. width is from 1 1/2, 1 3/4, 2, 2 1/4, 2 1/2, 2 3/4, 3 1/4 in.

::- I

Strip flooring is also available in what is known as colonial plank, strips of various
widths with round inserts of some contrasting wood. Usual thickness is 25/32 in. Widths
trom 3 to 8 in. Edges are tongue-and-grooved and the ends are grooved with splines supplied.

[
b. Parquet Flooring-(Wood Tile) Consist of blocks or fillets of hardwood of various
sizes which can be laid in any number. of patterns such as herringbone basket
weave, and squares, common thicknessis 25/32 in. and dimensions are 2 1/4 X
1 3/4 in 9, 11 1/4, 13 1/2, 15 3/4 and 18 in.; or 18 x 18 or 12 in. x 12 in. Small fillets of
about 3/8" thick by 9/10" width by 41i41ength are assembled into blocks usually
18"' with 16 squares of 3, 4, 5 or 6 fillets each, with a gummed paper backing which
ill later removed upon installation. Parquet glue used for this flooring are the brands
of stickwell.

1e:'

GLOVER OESlGN

J
..

18''---

RANDOM

OftSIGN

223

STAR DIAMOND

c. Block Flooring-Floor blocks are individual pieces of wood with edge-grain face
made in a number of sizes a common one is 2 x 2 x 31/2'in. and laid down in mastic .

gran blot.k
m25""tlL

2. CONCRETE FLOORING
Concrete floors are done in the best of workmanship and materials since they are subjected to every kind of wear and abuse, such as impact, abrasion, attack by salts and aggressive liquids. It is the aggregate which lies at the surface of the floor that absorbs
abrasion and impact, and must withstand the wear and the tear of traffic.
a. Floors may be poured as single monolithic slabs or they may be composed of a base
slab covered by a topping. The base slab must be well roughened surface to provide
a good bonding surface for the topping mix.

b. A particularly hard surface can be achieved by introducing metallic aggregates into


the topping. These consist of especially processed, size-graded iron particles, with
ofte.n a cement dispersal agent added. Metallic aggregates are normally applied to
the freshly ptiured surface as shake worked into the top by float and trowel.

c. Metallic-aggregate topping can be finished to produce a non-skid surface, Finishing with a wooden or cork float produces a surface as shown in the illustration.
Nonskid surfaces can also be produced by using abrasive~t>(pe aggregate such as
aluminum oxide and silicon carbide in the floor topping. This is also done in stair
treads.

f?WL -aGt non ~kiLl LOI1Ll"Et.e


fioor tili! e"x 8"

non ~kiJ

d. Colored concrete floor'S are produced by adding some type of inorganic coloring
agent to the topping mix or by shaking it over the surface and floating it into the
top. One type of coloring agent consist of mineral oxides in powder form. The mix is
10 lb. or less per bag cement.

US.EO

DRIVEWAYS

225

Cobalt oxide produces Blue color.


Brown oxide of iron produc~ Brown color.
Synthetic yellow oxide of iron produces Buffs.
Chromium oxide produces Green
Red oxide of iron produces Reds
Black iron axide produces Grays and Blacks

Another coloring agent consist of a fine grade of silica aggregate synthetic inorganic pigment, and a water reducing agent thoroughly mixed together. This is applied as a shake over the freshly finished floor top at the rate of 1/ 2 lb. ~ square
foot and floated into the surface. Final troweling produces as smooth surface
Metallic aggregates are produced which have a coloring agent added . It is a
synthetic, inorganic metallic oxide, and produces a nonsparking floor.
e. Concrete is also used to make Floor tile (Cement Tile) by forcing the concrete into
molds by hydraulic pressure and by allowing it to set and cure. Sometimes tile are
made in two layers, the upper one being made of mortar with white cement and
marble chips as aggregate. The upper layer can also be made of colored mortar .
After curing, the tiles are surface-ground to produce a smooth f inish.

p211t1 color
~~~

-1''i11Jtk Py

8"X8''

or

1Z1 X1Z''

3. CLAYTILE FLOORING
Clay tile are made by a process similar to manufacturing trick. Tiles are made into either:
a. Glazed Tile-a Tile composed of ceramic materials fused into the body of the Tile.
The body may be nonvitreous, semivitreous or impervious, and either white or colored.
tVITREOUS)-descriptive of that degree of vitrification evidenced by low water ab
sorption; generally signifies less than 0.3 percent absorption except for floor and wall
tiles for which it signifies less than 3.0 percent absorption ..
b. Unglazed Tile -a hard, dense ceramic Tile for floor or walls~ of homogenous composition throughout, deriving its color and texture, from the materials of which the
body is made and from the ~ethod of manufacture.

226

Example is the Vigan brick Tile 1" x 12" x 12" or 16" x 16" _

1"

VITRIFIED TILES
Manufactured by Pioneer Ceramics, Inc.
Advantages:

a. almost diamond hard, no chipping, no cracking or peeling.


b. Slip resistant (Matte Finished)
c. through and true colors (No wearing out)
d. completely waterproofed ,won't absorb moisture, warp or curl}
Grades:

Class A

- These are tiles specially selected from the regular production run for their
superior quality. (no imperfections beyond 1/64"1

Mil/run

- These are tiles from the regular production run. (imperfections between

1/32"1

Sizes:
Tile No.

001

00
0
1

Basic size
41/4" X 41/4"
4 1/4" X 4 1/4"
4 1/4"' X 41/4"
4 1/ 4" X 4 1/ 4"
4 1/ 4" X 41 / 4"

Actual dimension
Greater by 1/16"
Greater by 1/~"
exact size
Smaller by 1/32"
Smaller by 1 / 16"

Products:

1. Vitrified Floor Tiles


a. White Milltun 108 mm x 108 mm (1/4" x 4 1/4" x 4 1/4")
b. Porphery Colors Millrun yellow, blue, green, brown.
c. Matte-Semi glazed tiles, white
d. Matte-Semi glazed, color

e. Round-white and color

2. Grande Series (Dark Red)


a. Hexagonal 10"

b. Octagonal 10"

0
227

c. Diamond 8'"

d . .6 X 12''
t

e. 6" x 6"

f. 8"

12"

a x 8"

g.

h. 4,.x8"'x3/8"

101.6 mm

x 203.3 mm x 9.53 mm

i. 4 1/ 4" X 4 1/4"

3. Semi-Vitffled (Kitchen; Terraces, Din. BR)


a. Patio - 2 1/2" x 8" 63.5 mm x 203.2 mm
b. Romana-3/8" x 4 x 6..
101 .6mmx 152.4mm

c. Morena-41 / 4" x 41/4" {1~mm x 108mm)

4. Quarry Tiles (Unglued)

a. Patio-2 1/2" x 8" x 5/16"


163.5 mm x 203.2 mm x7.9 mm)
b. Padana -2 1/2" x 8" x 5/ 16..

c. Chisel-5/16.. x 8" x 2 1/2


(63.5 mm x 203.2 mm x 7.9 mm)

d . Roman
e. Morena

228

BRICKS
Floor bricks size 5 em x 10 em x 21.3 em

i""""=
F=';

229

..

~rrin~
QtB$

be.d&ng

~mnglxn~,
a1 5~tt.h.Br

tnldular
tAus

DriLk~

11ntlll
D~
1

...._

--

230

r~:zting uri1t

pme-n

beLiding fJLA.s
.;:::::
~

I-

~
~

p..

If

turning

w. itJ

LOrtU?I;

>tr~tz.rw-

f.ate>

1~
~

II

Ll

II

II

II

PRODUCTS OF MARIWASA

. a. Ma tt Floor Tiles
4 1/ 4 x 4 1/4 (108 mm x 108 mm)
White and colored
Millrun-more expensive .
ECO-cheaper

6" x 6" (152 mm x 152 mm)


white and colored

231

b. Vitrified Floor Tiles


4" X 8" (1{)() X 200 X 9.5 mm)

1. White
splashing (white) millrun
Non,,Skid (white) millrun
Earthone (white} millrun

2. Colored
splashing Brown
carpet
Nuvolato
a -Series
Earthtone
Non-Skid regular colors
splashing blue

3. Seliniums
red
red-orange

c. Vitrified Floor 'tiles


8" x 12" {20() x 300 x. 9.5 mm)
same series as above
d. Matt Floor Tiles
6" X 12,.

4. ASPHALT FLOORING
Two types of flooring using asphalt as basic ingredients are:

(screed)- a long narrow strip of


plaster applied .at intervals on a
surface to be plastered, carefully
leveled and trued to act as a
guide for plastering to the specitied thickness.

a. ASPHAlt MASTIC FLOORING-Made by


mixing an emulsified asphalt w ith portland cement, sand and gravel, or crushed stone to form a
plastic mixture . !his is spread over the floor
screeded, compacted, and floated to a depth of
1/2 in.
The mix is usually made in this proportion, 1
bag portland cement or { 1 cu. ft .) is to 2 cu. ft. ( 12
1I 2 gal.) emulsified asphalt, 2 cu. ft. clean sharp
sand, and 4 cu. ft. hard washed gravel chips .
This asphaltic types of mastic flooring can be
applied over a wood, concrete, or steel base. In
each case the base must be primed with the propet type of asphaltic primer. In addition, a tack
coet of asphalt emulsion should be applied over .
the primer, in the case of a wood base.
Asphalt planks can also be made which is
precasted and formed in molds. They are laid on a
solid level base and cemented down w ith an asphaltic bonding preparation.

232

b. ASPHAlTIC TilES-are COI!lPOSed ot asbestos


fibers bound together by a blend of selected asphaltic binders. Pigments are added for color and
in some cases polysterene plastic is added to produce a stonger tile. The ingredients are machinemixed and formed into sheet of i/8 or 3/16 in.
thick under pressure. The sheet are then cut into
tiles of 9 x 9, 12 x 12 in., and 18 x 24 in.
Floor Patterns are done due to unlimited colors and designs. Asphalt tile can be laid over a
wood, asphaltic mastic, or concrete base using an
asphaltic adhesive. The surface must be smooth
and even, those tiles are highly resistant to water
but not to organic acids or petroleum solvents not
preferable for industrial use.

5. TERRAZZO FLOORING
Marble aggregate concrete that is cast in place or precast and ground smooth, used as a de
corative flooring.
A base slab is poured first, reinforced with wire mesh to reduce shrinkage and settle~
ment.of cracks. Next, a layer of cement and sand, mixed very dry, is spread over the base,
worked Flat, and compacted. This forms a cushion on which the terrazzo t~pping is placed.
A grid-work, consisting of thin strips of brass, bronze aluminum or plastic, is laid on the
sand-cement cushion, bedded in and leveled. Standing approximately 1 in. above the
cushion.
The topping mix, consisting of cement, sand and marble chips or an abrassive material
as coarse aggregate is made up. It is mixed dry as is practical for placing. This topping is
spread over the floor and compacted until it is level with the top of the grid strips. After the
topping has cured sufficiently, the surface is ground and polished by machine.
Terrazzo has a tendency to be slippery, so on ramps, elevator entrances, where nonslip
surface is required, abrasive aggregates such as aluminum oxide should be used. By the use
of white cement, colored pigments and carefully chosen marble chips of one or more colors,
a great variety of effects can be produced.

br.a>> 5'trip

lerrAZZO tcp
ma-t.Jr I.JI'I&t~

TERRAZZO SURFACE

SECTION

233

(Granolithic Concnite)-Suitable for use as a wearing surface finish to floors. Made of cement mix with specially selected aggregate (granite chips) of suitable hardness, surface tex-
ture and particul~r shape.

6. PLASTIC FLOORING
Used in several types of flooring, including plastic Terrazzo plastic topping, vinyl-plastic
tiles, vinyl asbestos t iles, and vinyl-cushioned Flooring.
a. Plastic Terrazzo-an epoxy resin is used instead of portland cement paste as a
binder for marble chips a mixture of a liquid epoxyreSin, inert filler pigment, and color
pigment is used as the resin component. Formulation consist of 100 lb. of epoxy
resin, 50 lb. of fine calcium silicate, 2 114 lb. of titanium dioxide; and 314 lb. of
mineral pigment to this is added 10 lb. of a hardening and curing agent, an aliphatic
polymine. In this a'fnount of binder, 450 lb. of small marble chips can be used .
This plastic mixture is spread over the floor about 114 in. thick which weighs
about 3 lb. per sq. ft. 1I 4 in. thick. After hardening (one to two days after application) the topping can be ground smooth and polished . This type of topping can be
applied over wood, concrete or old Terrazzo base. Mixes should be limited to about
100 lb. total because the .plastic has a limited pot life, about 1 to 1 1I 2 hours at 75F.
Metal grid Strips can be secured to the subfloor with an epoxy. resin adhesive.
b. Epoxy resin , are used to produce floor toppings in a variety of colors. The liquid
resin, color pigment, and curing agent are mixed and spread over the surface in
thicknesses of 1/4 to 1/2 in. The material may be troweled smooth or left with a
dimpled finish.
c. Vinyl Tile - is made of a layer of vinyl plastic bonded to a flexible backing. Tiles are 6
x 9 in. and 9 x 9 in. thickness of 3/32, 118 and 81100 in. feature strips 1 x 36 in. and
rolls 54, 46, and V in. wide are also made vinyl Tiles are laid in vinyl cement for con
crete floors on grade, a special waterproof cement is used. Vinyl is highly resistant to
. fats, oils, most acids alkalies, and petroleum derivatives a wide range of colors and
designs available (This is resilient ..,
~..5 )

--== ---

d. Vinyl asbestos 1Tiles are made a composition of thermoplastic vinyl r~in and.plasticizer asbestos fibers, pigments and filler. These are mixed hot and form of into
sheets 1/16 or 1118 in. thick under pressure. Tiles 9 x 9in . and feature strips 1 or 2x
18 in. are cut from these sheets. The same general large of colors is found as in asphalt and vinyl t~e. This tile is lain in an asphaltic base cement, and is highly resistant
to grease, acids and alkalies. (This Tile is nonresilient it breaks but is very durable
when finally laid ~~"'......-> )

e. Vinyl-cushioned flooring is composed of a thick sponge vinyl backing covered with


a layer of closely woven fiber 'glass fabric to provide strength and stabilitY. Over, this
is laid a layer of vinyl plastic imprinted color or colors desired, and finally a surface of
clear vinyl is applied. These layers are bonded together by heat and result in a flexible flooring material of approximately 0.15 in. thick.

This flooring is produced in rolls 54 and 72 in. wide and is laid in a special cement made of the purpose. Adjoining edges are joined with a special cement string
solvents should be used for cleaning and vamish~. shellacs or lacquers should not
be apptied to the surface.

234

f. Vintl inlaid wear-layer constructions (exclusive armstrong brand process called coraon}.

The rolls are done in such a way that vinyl chips or cubes are inlaid, embedded
and bonded together by clear vinyl mortar. In this process, the coior and design of
the wear layer go through the backing. A moisture-resistant hydrocord backing
allows installation on any grade level.
Thesefloorsare made up in rolls six feet wide and up to ninety feet long, wh.ch
greatly reduces-the amount of Seams. Vinyl corlon floors ~an be installed by either the
P&rimiflor or perimiflor plus installation process which uses a special adhesive that
chemicaliy welds the seams to provide a continuous monolithic surface. A small bead
of adheSive is forced into and up through the seam, providing a strong, tight bond.
The seams virtually disappear and are sealed against the penetration of moisture and
dirt. This is accomplished without the use of special tools or heat thus reduCing ir.stallation time am~ cost. This eorlon vinyl sheet flooring is styled for high traffic areas
such as h0$pitals. Schools, commercial and shopping center interiors, lobbies, etc ..

--- hytl-o~- h&.king


-dear Wl'yl rna-t.ar

'~vailable in 5 styles;- the seagate, montina, sandoval, brigantine and palestra.

7. MAGNESITE FLOORING
Made from calcined magnesium oxide and magnesium chloride. These materials are
mixed into a plastic state and applied to the floor in two separate coats, totaling 1/2 to 3/4
in. thick. A considerable quantity of ~oarse, fibrous filler is mixed with the first coat to give it
strength and flexibility. The second coat has no ftber, but color pigment is mixed with it to
produce any color or colors required.
Magnesite flooring is applied over either a wood or concrete base. Sometimes metal
lath is laid over a wood base to produce a better bond. Marble chips may be added to the
freshly poured surface and rolled in to produce magnesite terrazzo such flooring is quiet, resilient, non-slip and fireproof but not completely water resistant.

8. RUBBER FLOORING
These come in the form of tiles. Synthetic rubber is used since it has less tendency to
oxidize than natural rubber. Pigments and plasticizers are mixed with the liquid rubber and
the mixture is rolled into sheets under pressure and cut into 6, 9 and 12 in. squares and 18 x
36 in. rectangles, in thicknesses of 3/32, 1/8 and 3/16 in.

235

Rubber tile is suitable for floors above grade and is latd in a rubber-base cement: It is
very pliable and provides good resilience and relatively good sound absorption.

9. CORK FLOORING
Cork- isused as a basic ingredient in two types of flooring.

a. linoleum -linseed oil is used as the binder in the manufacture of linoleum. It is oxidized by air treatment until it becomes a tough plastic substance somewhat like rub
ber. Powdered cork, resin gum, wood flour, and color pigments are then mixed
with it and the resulting mixture is spread over a burlap backing and rolled into
sheets.
three grades are
grade A
- 3/ 32 in.
grade AA - 1/8 in.
grade AAA - 1/4 in.
It is produced in rolls 6 ft. and as 9 x 9 in. linoleum tiles.
Two types of roll linoleum are made:
Plain -one single color
Inlaid-made ~p . of several colors which extend through the burlap

backing~

linoleum can be laid on any wood Floors above grade and can be laid over sus
pended concrete Floors, providing they are dry.
Two types of linoleum cement abused.
a. Plsin - for ordinary installation.
b. Waterproof-for kitchens and bathrooms.
linoleum and linoleum tile should be laid over a thick feet paper base, which can be
bonded to the subfloor with the same c~ment.
~ ..

b. Cork Tile -Made by mixing cork shavings with resin and compressing the plastic
mixture into molds. Tiles are baked to set the resin. Two thicknesses of tile are
produced, 3/16 and S/ 16 in. sizes include 6, 9 and 12 in. squares and,6 x 12 in. and
12 x 24 in. rectangles.
They are laid on Floors above grade in a special adhesive and rolled down with a
heavy roller. The surface l?f sanded and given a coat of filler and finally waxed.
Cork Tile are warm quiet and resilient but as durable as other materials. They
resist water but not oils and grease.

Resilient Floorings- The group of flooring materials which includes asphalt, vinyt,
yinyl-asbestos, cork, rubber and linoleum (resilience_: The capacity of a material to
recover its original size and shape after deformation)

10. PEBBLE WASHOUT


Pea sized sandstones or pebbles either no. 5, no, 10 or no. 15 are mixed with cement
mortar. This is spread on the surface with or without brass strips . Before the cement dries
water is spread to remove the cement on the surface of the stone or by Rubbing sponge to
seep the water of excess cement. This is done until all the pebble stones are clearly exposed
recommended for balconies, walks, stair ways where slippery floor is being avoided.

236

11. MARBLE
This is a expensive flooring from Marble Stone Cut into one inch thick and sizes of .40 x
.40, .30 x .60, .20 x .40 and other extra special sizes. Laid on the floor with white cement and
when already set, a grinding machine is worked on the surface to smoothen .the face after
waxing is applied.

12. CRAZY CUT MARBLE


With granulithic: Odd shaped broken one inch thick mafbte is laid out on the floor with
mortar. After which the spaces in between will be-filled with granulithic a mixture of granite
chips of white cement. When the setting has hardened the floor is smoothened by using a
grinding machine then waxed.

237

CHAPTER
'

INTERIOR FINISHING MATERIALS


1. WOOD FINISHES
For interior use, there are two basic groups:

A. To cover walls and ceilings.


a-1 Solid wood - Those in the form of boards which are 1/ 4, 3/8, 1I 2 and .1 in. thickness
and widths of from 2 to 12 in. and lengths 4 to 10ft. The face of the boards may be
plain, saw-textured, V-grooved or channeled and edges may be square or tongueand-groove.
a-2 Wood sheets-Made from varietyof soft wood and hardwoods, kiln dried, and
edge-glued to form sheets which are usually 1 in. thick, 3ft. wide, and 8ft. long, in a
variety of face patterns. Surfaces are sanded and sheets may be factory sealed and
prefinished .

a-3 Plywood- See building board chapter for different types. One way of attachment
to studdings is by leaving a f /4" inch space using edge of plywood or a 4 c.w. nail
to separate edges to give an effect of planking.

PLAN

. ELE.VATlO~

B. Those used as trim materials around door and window openings, as baseboard, and as

various decorative moldings.

~
DOORJAMB

MULLION CASING

(:

L)

HANDRAIL

t?

..

CASING

NQS;IN6

'/.
..

:-j
:

COVE.

(J
.

ROJND

w
c.ROWN

QUAQ"ft;R Ra.JNO

BASEBOARD

2. GYPSUM FINISHERS (plaster)


One of the best known types of intE!fior types of interior f inish produced by
plaster in which gypsum is one of the basic ingredients. Plaster surfaces can
be troweled smooth, stippled or sand - finished and can be applied over
gypsum lath, metal lath, fiberboard plaster base, or directly over a masonry
surface. In addition, acousticalplaster, involving the use of lightweight aggregate such as vermiculite or perlite, is used to produce a textured surface
and to provide sound insulation.
Gypsum board is also used as an interior finishing material. It is applied in
'either a single or double layer, using 3/8 in. board for the double or laminated application. Joints and corners are taped and filled with joint filler,
after which .th,e surface is sized. and painted.
Gypsum board interior paneling is also produced with wood-grain printed
surface. Such boards have beveled rather than recessed edges, so .that a
V -groove is produced at joints . Colored nails or gypsum cement is used in
applying the board to a wall surface.

STIPPLED

Square-edged gypsum board covered with a vinyl plastic fabric is also produced as an interior. finish, joints are usually covered with an aluminum,
plastic,
wood batten.

or

~D FIHlSH

241

" ~-

.. ..
~ ''

.. ....

>

1; '
,

~.
~

,.

'

'
#

'

I
I

~~

J.

" r

! ... .... ~ '


'
' ; ,,

:L. _s- rt
I

______

,,....- .

r--

. 3. CLAY FINISHES (bricks and tiles)


Clay products of all kinds can be used for interior finishing. They include common brick, face
brick, glazed brick, structural"tile, gla{ed tile, ceramic veneer, ceramic wall tile, and ceramic
mosaic. In addition, several imitation brick veneer products are made, using lightweight aggregates, cement paste and artificial color.
Common brick is usually used for interior work to 'produce a rustic or roughcast effect
often emphasized with extruded mortar joints.

t<?OI JOttrl

/'

co111mon bnck us.M for

,.

242

4"
flr.epla~

SO\...lO BRIC.K

wall

., ,.
2'

..
WALL PATTERNS:

~~~~~

[
[

I[

]I

JC:

II
IL J[

II
II
II

ll

]I

II

}
1

J
I
J
J

STACK BOND
HERRING~

8~0

.
PROJECTING BRICKS,

.1 .

:101

~DL'

01

IOf

!Dr

I
101
!01
IDC
:=JDI.
101
JOI
I

IOL

: JOC

101

FLEMISH BOND
GAPOEN WAI...L

II

[:

If

II

. n

~DODD DC

~DLJDDDC .
1

ENGLIGH BQND

243

GLAlED TILE -Ceramic tile having a fused impervious glazed surface finish (white or colored or with designs! composed of ceramic materials fused into the body of the tile; the
body may be nonvitreous, semivitreous, or impervious.
Comes in sizes of

4 1/4"' X 4 1/4"'
2 1/2" X 6 1/2"'
6" X 6"
8 1/2'" X S 1/2'"
Ceramic wall die in various sizes and shape~ are usually 3/8 in. thick is used in kitchens,
bathrooms, washrooms, laboratories, for a feature wall, or as a dado or wainscot with ano- ther material covering the upper part' of the wall.
Ceramic mosaic -small pieces of plain or cotored tile mounted on a paper of cloth netbacking-is used for similar purposes.

~0
( 1'1115

244

B
Jl
t.at1

D
I

bA

us.cul for floorn-tq )

GLAZED TILE

ACCE~SORI_,_ _~
, _,;:- -iCC.

.. _,..

'.

CAPPING

245

tl

r'cc. -

lt1tS"lor ~rnsGaPf'lt19

..

res- . tt1tk1a- botttm Mati

EBB- ext~nor

ITB - h1tbnar top ~&d

b.Q2d

ETB - EXtMor

lm'tom

top bJ!U

4. STONE FINISHES
This can be produced by using solid stone walls and exposing the interior as well as the exterior surface.
The other method is to cover the interior surface with thin stone slabs, from 1 to 2 in. thick.
The stone is applied over a backup wall of concrete, concrete block, brick, tile or hollow
blocks and is held in place with some type of stone anchor.

C.~'Z.Y GUT FINISH

I[

l ]

[[

II

D
10

ra:JUlzJr CH 9 Bl..Q';K PATT~

ETI

DP
I

ID

RANDOM FINIGH

5. CONCRETE FINISHES
a. Plain concrete walls may be used by giving them specral treatment to make them as
smooth as possible. This is done by rubbing down with abrasive stone or with an equipment called a sander, and filling the holes and pores with cement grout.

246

b. Precast concrete sandwich panel-One face is finished for interior exposure. The
face may be textured, patterned, or colored, or it may c~si~t of exposed aggregate

. ROPE Fl~\S\1

c. Synthetic stone (adob.e, adobe with


sheii)-Mixture of plaster cement with grounded
adobe stones or sometimes with sea shells are
plastered on a backup wall . After it has .hardened,
the surface is chipped off with an axe or
tomahawk to bring out the aggregates.

d. Pebble washout finish - A mixture of plaster


cement with selected pebbles, white or gray in
color. Sizes are no. 5, no. 10 and no . 15. These
are plastered on a backup wall, usually a hollow
blockwal1 with brown coat. When the proper
sizing up of wall has bee~ done, a spray of water
is applied or in the absence of sprayer. a sponge is
used, to eliminate excess cement plaster to ex-.
pose the pebble stone aggregates.

e. Sandblasting-The final finish is done by mixing


plaster with colored cement or just plain cement.
Thisis placed in a sandblasting contraption which
can be made at the site. When the handle is turned, the plaster mix is blasted and forced to adhere
to the concrete back up wall .

247

6. BUILDING BOARDS
a. Plywood
1/4H x 4' x 8' ordinary
narra veneer
bookmatched
ribbon grained

pre-finished. wood paneling


already comes in color tones
(Danarra brand)
b. Hardboard -(lawanit brand)
See building beard chapter for designs.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.

Insulating fiberboard
Chipboard
Particle bbard
Gypsum board
Straw board
Asbestos-cement board
i. Corkboard
j. Paperboard

Wood slats or wood grilles - This comes in a form of panel screen and used as a wall paneling , ceiling, ventilation, movable room divider, etc. available in a fine selection of kiln
dried philippine woods in standard and special design perforated panels. Widths are 2, 3 and
4 feet, height is 8 and 10 feet, thickness 1/2", 3/4... and 1 1/2 in .

.J011.e by router
248

7. \NALL PAPER
This is produced in a wide range of wood grain, fabric, stone, brick and mural patterns. Wall
papers are produced in single and double rolls 20 to 36 in. wide containing 36 sq. ft. per
single roll. Selvage edges 3/ 4 to 1 in. wide are removed from each end of a roll before hanging. To install with a perfect fit, an overlap of 1 in. or more is done and a vertical straight
edge rs used to cut with a sharp blade.

8. WALL COVERING
The material comes in rolls of 1.00 m wide of either.

a. Wall paper or
b . Wall vinyl (washable)
It also comes in plain, colors, prints wood grain .
mural patterns, or with texture, and about a thousand different designs and colors, or even photograph and view effects.
Method of laying:
Mix wall covering paste (suggested brand is muty. lan) with water and when it is sticky, use a brush
and spread on the back of the wall covering evenly
then make or loose fold with about 1 inch excess
on the ceiling, apply pressure on the meeting corner of the wall and ceiling with a squeegee and let
the wall cover fall freely.

249

The walling must be a smoothened. cured, cemenJ


plastered wall, or a w ell aligned plywood wall, (all
nails and imperfections must be puttied).
The walling must receive a thin coat of brushed wall
covering paste. Immediately squeegee the wallcover
from inside out and from top to bottom to spread and
to SQueegee the paste evenly and remove air. When
there is an air bubble, use a pin to punch a hole or inject with glue. When in place, repeat a second wallcover but this time, allow another inch o_f side overlap. Squeegee all over again and when satisfied, using
a straight edge and a very sharp cutter, cut vertically
at the center of the overlap and remove all excess
while the paste is still quite wet then squeegee again
the joint.

--.
BRUSH

WAl..L PAPER ( 04
...,,
)
WALL VINYL
W CUI~nnq

Be careful that the design of the next piece must


coincide with the first piece to insure continuity of
material design .
Always allow at least one inch excess on all vertical
or horizontal corners and apply pressure at the corner
and edges. Then remove excess with a sharp blade.

,,
1 ex.L./!SS

~=~~~lf~r~
250

NOT THIG

9. GLASS
Glass is used for finishing inside rooms. For light-diffusing or light directing, glass blocks are
used. For interior partitions, room dividers and screens, structural glass is used. Plate glass
mirrors and architectural glass with designs are used for interior decoration and to produce
special effects. Architectural glass comes in thickness of 1/16" or 3/32" and usually 111/2"
x 11 1/2" in. or 24" x 36" and in two types, clear glass mirror plain or black tinted. Glass tile
or panels are available also as a type of wall finish.

'--.....lo--.J

The architectural glass is attached to a backup plywood walling with a rugby glue to form a
pattern. This can also be used for ceilings. (The back portion of architectural glass has a
ctothlike material for the glue to attach quickly).

251.

PATT~RN

10. STEEL
Stael waH tile are made from thin-gauge sheet steel to. give them rigidity and coated with
porcelain enamel in a full range of colors.

~====J
~eC.TION

Common sizes are 41/4 and 6 in. squares and 3 x 6 in. w ith cap, base, outside and inside
corners, feature strips, and others. Special tile adheswes are used to secure tile to smooth
surfaces.
Stainless steel wall tile are produced in 4 1/4, 5, 6,. and 10 in . squares and in 3 x 6 in. rectangles in a polished satin fini.sh. Corners, caps, etc. are available to corresponding to field

sizes.
Galvanized sheet metal casing trim is frequently used in plac of wood casing around door
and window openings.

jamb

252

11.: NON FERROUS METALS


Aluminum, copper, and zinc are all used to make wall tiles. Copper tile are usually supplied
with a burnished finish, while aluminum tile may be enameled or anodized. Zinc tile are
chrome plated.
Cove base and window and door frame trim, are made from aluminum and chrome. These
are trim moldings to cover exterior corners of walls or edges of window stool.

12. PLASTICS
Plastic wall tile in 4 1/4 and 8 1/2 in. squares are maqe from polystyrene and urea formal
dehyde re51ns in a range of colors. Theyare applied with special adhesives, and joints are
pointed with special grout after the tile are in place.
Plastic laminate wall panels in wood grain, stone and mottled finish or patterns, as well as
solid colors, are applied with contact adhesives or as a facing over plywood sheets.
Special mouldings are used as panel dividers, edgings and corner trim.

COVE

DIVl~ION

QIJTGIDE CDRNER

Plastic wall fabrics and films of vinyl are used in much the same way as wall paper.
Molded sheets of plastic reinforced with fiber glass which simulate brick and stone may be
used for either interior of exterior.
Molded plastic acoustical tile, backed by fiber-glass wool, along with opaque plastic ceiling
tile for use with suspended ceiling systems.

253

13. PAINTS
Are used to cover unsightly surfaces, to provide decoration and to prevent absorption of
moisture into the waU, to act as vapor barrier, and to provide a washable surface.
Three grades of paint are produced.

a. Gloss - walls of kitchen, bathrooms, washrooms


b. Semi-gloSs -other rooms
c . .Rat - usually for ceilings.
Two general groups of paint

a. Paints that flow out under a brush or roller to produce a flat smooth surface.
b. Paints that are stiff enough that when applied by rollers, the surface produced is
rough or stippled. This is called "Textured" paint.

Apply roller with sufficient pressure to impress


texture onto surface and roll in an upward motion.

EXfERIOR WALLING MATERIALS


There are three basic functions of walls.
a. As load-bearing component of the structure.
b. To protect the interior from the elements.
c. To present an attractive exterior appearance.

Types of walls
1. One made of a framework of studs and plates and having the upper-floor frame, the..
ceiling frame, and the roof frame attached to it.

CAIt1!1 fram~
.ext~rtor~
~tud~

i.:..:.-:.-:...-:,..-..--~
.

.--+-+-- ~r

_L_-_.........~-t

w.all

ffa?r

.fran~

I f ' - - - - ma~nry

wall

2. A second type consists of a framewall of wooden or steel arches, rigid frames or A


frames, which constitutes both wall and roof framework.

WALL ROOf: A- FRAMe

WALL- ROOF ARCH

255

.
...

3. A soHd unit consisting of some type 9f masonry, hollowblock


wall or solid concrete wall .

...

4. A wall foond in large buildings, where th~~entire skeleton of the


building is made from heavy timbers, steel .or reinforced concrete. The w all materials fills in the spaces between those mem
bers. This is called curtain wall

..... .

Curtain Wall - A no11 bearing exterior wall between piers or


columns, that is not supported by the beams or girders of a skeleton frame.
NOTE-stud walls are normally covered first with some types of sheathing-boards, plywood, insulating fiberboard, or exterior gypsum board. This sheathing helps to give rigidity to
the frame, provides one weather barrier and acts as a base over whict) water proofing paper
and exterior finish are applied.
Often this sheathing is covered with one or.two layers of building paper. Over this is applied
. the exterior finishing material. For this type of wall, it may be stucco, brick veneer, artificial
stone veneer, natural stone veneer, terra-cotta facing, wood siding, boards and battens,
aluminum siding, plywood, insulating fiberboard siding, rolled siding, wood shingles, hardboard siding, asbestos cement siding and siding shingles.

Kinds of exterior finishing material


1. Stucco -a type of plaster made with portland cement which
is applied to exterior surfaces to form a finish coating. Commonly used treatments on finish coat to produce textures are
French trowel, Italian f inish, modern American, spatter dash,
English cottage and travertine.

FRt=.J\ICH

ANA'(

256

TJ:Wn'~L

FINI~li

Stucco can be applied directly to masonry walls, but over


wood sheathing, some type of wire must be used to tie the
sheathing and stucco together.

BROOM

FlNI~H
S.PAiTE~

Two types of wires can be used.

..

c:

..

"

c:

c:

ir

"i

WIR~ ME~H

E)(.PANDED METAL LATH

( HYP.IB)

Stucco is applied in three coats, (or steps) a


base or scr~tch coat, a second or brown coat,
and a final finish coat. All three coats are composed of 1 volume of portland cement to 3 to 5
volumes of clean sharp sand, sometimes 1/ 4
volume of hydrated lime is added to increase
plasticity.
The scratch and brown coat should be applied
about 3/8 in. thick, each coat kept moist for at
least 48 hours. The finish coat should not be
l.ess than 1/ 8 in. thick applied within seven days
after application of the brown coat.

6ASE OR SCRATCH
C::.OAT

rlNAL CCAT

257

2. Brick veneer- Brick veneering over a iight wood frame is done either by using regular
brick taid up to produce as 4 in. thickness of veneer, or by :using thin slabs of brick rna
nufactured for the purpoSe.

A regular 4 in. thickness brick is laid in two methods. One is to lay up the brick over the
sheathing, using metal ties nailed to the sheathing to hold the brick in place. The other
is to cover the studs with paper-backed wire mesh apply a 1 in. thick layer of mortar and
set the brick with their backs in the mortar.

4-' hriGk

,,. ar f.p.!~
c;}JQ;;ft11f179

...

..
..

.- 1''
.

..

IMtaf

tt~

~tu.d~
pl.a~t.41

mt.ar

p.apAr l?.ul<

W1~~}1

~tu&G

plaG+Ar

When thin veneer slabs are used, they are set in a mortar base which is applied over a
stucco wire backing.

mortar

3. Artificial stone veneer-This is sometimes called cast


stone, made by casting colored mortar into molds which
turn out units having faces resembling roughhewn stone.
The units are about 1 in. thick and made in various sizes
such as2x Bin., 2x 16in., 4x 4in., 4x 8 in., 4x 16in., 8x
8 in. and 8 x 16 in. These units are set in a mortar bed
which is applied over a stucco wire backing.

4. Natural stone veneer-Thin slabs of some natural stones such as sandstone, lime
stone, riverstone, adobe, gray and black kermon stone, slate etc. with either regular or
irregular dimensions are laid up in a mortar bed in the same way as artificial stone or
brick.
25~

s:t...AIE

LIMe GT~NE

F= LAT KENNON OR A009E

STONE

ADOBE

.C
'---- 111bi~r

FLAT

5. Terra-Cotta Facing-Most commonly used. for buildings


w ith light frame walls is known as vitrolite. It is made from
china clay in thin s1abs .11 / 32, 7 / 16, a~ 3/ 4 in. thick, Units
are made in 4 to 24 in. squares and 8 x 12 in ., 8 x 16 in ., 12 x
16 in., and up to 30 x 36 in. rectangles. Common colors in
elude white, black, red, tan, blue, green and gray.
Asphaltic mastic is used to attach the vjtrolite units to external surfaces, leaving joints of approximately 1/ 16 in. These are
later buttered with joint c~rnent and painted. Direct contact
with metal concrete, or other hard substances should be
avoided .

jatl1t

~i

af:7~~-~f*laH1C ~~IV2

259

6. Wood Siding-!he common wood specie usect. for sidings are Tanguile, or pinewood.
This is manufactured either in T and G, S-CUT or V~CUT, RIZAL CUT.
This types are either sun dried or kiln dried.
S.~es -1" x_. 4" , 1"x6~' 1"x8", 1"x12"

I ~ G

VCUT
~-LUT

t1r

~HANNEL

RUGTIC.

7. Boards and battens -When boards of various kinds, apitong, Tanguile, pine, rough- .
sawed or planed are applied to a wall vertically with narrow strips of the same material
nailed ovef the vertical joints.
I

PLAN

~LE.VATION

a.

Aluminum siding - Some types consist of a single thickness of metal formed into the
re.quired shape.
\

C..URVr::;.D FACE:
Otilef's have a rigid insulation backing. In addition, a baked on vinyl enamel is u_sed to
produce siding ~th a permanently colored surface in a wide range of colors. The thickness is from 0.02 to 0.025 in. th'ick. Siding is from 9 to 12 in. wide is sections, 12 feet
long, while vertical panels are made J2 and 16 in. wide and 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12, ft. long.

260

9. Metat -made of pre-painted, baked-on zinc coated galvanized. iron used in curtainwall panels. Steel, stainless steel, ah.Jminum, galvanized iron, copper and brass are
.. metals commonly used . Colors are silver, champagne bronze, coppertone, brass. Gauge
range from 0.19" to .040". Gauge no. 3.1 to gauge no. 24.

Three types of colorgrip soandrel by metal forming corp .


2~

'

t:lte SPANDR I: L

lt .o'

em

fd:\Qnala~~

,...

wtd may~

111~:173d ~r2

h<1rizartal s-tw
V4!?rtttal ~tuJ

~~t-+-C::: . H . t3

I
PLAIN GPANDRcL

-~~----------"2
~~G-V

SPANDREL

10. Plywood exterior finish- Marine plywood or waterproofed plywood are used either in
its full size of 4 Y.8 ft . (1.20 x 2.40 m .) with the long edges vertical and the joints covered
with batten. or it can be cut in strips and applied horizontally.

I
'
_I

11. Insulating fiberboard siding - This material is made fro.rn 1/ 2 in. wQ.Od fiberboard with
one face covered with a heavy coating of asphalt. Finely crushed slate is embedded in
the asphalt in patterns imitating brick, stone and wood grain. The board is produced)n
strips 8 to 16 in. wide and 24 to 96 in, long, with shiplap edges.

261

12. Wood shakes and shingles-Jhere are two ways in applying shingles or shakes to
sidewalls
is by single course' and the other one is double course.

one

The maximum recommended exposure for 16 in. shingles on sidewalls is 7 1/2'". for an
18 in. shingle. It is 81/2" in. and for a 24 in. shingle it is 111/2 in. for a shake up to 32 in.
it is 15 in.

.GltfGLE. COURSeD 9De.WALL


s.HINGJ...J:iC;;

262

tx.>llSl..S -CQURQ:D ~WALL


sHIN GL~

13. Hardboard iding-Tempered hardboard cut 12 and 16 in. stdps 4, 8, and 12ft. tong is
used as siding. Three methods of application are used. One consists of applying the
strips in the same way that bevel siding is applied. Another method Is by using a rab. beted wood strip at the bottom of each course to .accentuate the shadow Jine. fn the
third method, preformed metal a strips hold the siding in place and give a deep shadow
line. These metal strips have .holes drilled in their bottom surface to provide ventilation
behind the board.

~~:3-thtng

hllrJ ~3rJ

~-~~~rtJQ,.artf

$ol.diH9

~'11---~lrtg

't'JOQ1 ~trip

14. A1beato1-cement siding and siding lhinglea-Asbestos-cement-siding boards are


made in stripe 12 in .,.vide, 481n. long, and 3/16 thick with a smooth face :and straight
edges. The shingles are 12 x 24 in. with deep vertical wood-grain pattern on the face and
a wavy bottom edge. Both siding and shingles are prepunched for application on 16 in.
centers. Walls are'usually .Strapped
12 in. centers 'and the sh.ingles are fastened with
soft-headed nails, which will not crack the material;

on

4~'

..

.,Asae;TOG a:MB'IIT ~INGL~


DV~ ~APPING

Glbeetoe-Consists of a core of sheet steel which is first dipped in a bath of moltenzinc. Immediately a layer of asbestos felt is applied under great pressure and is bonded
to the zinc coat. The felt is then impregnated with asphalt, ctnd finally a tough, water
proof colored coating is applied to both sides. Galbestos sheets are available in widths of
3Cr and 33 in. in lengths up to 12 ft.

263

15. Curtain walls-Materials which are fastened to the


frame and carry no structural loads themselves. The steel
framewall and floor decks carry the load.
Curtain walls are of masonry materials. Also wood, glass.
concrete and steel.

16. Brick-The wall can be made of face brick over a backup wall of common brick, clay
tile or concrete block.

bukup w/l

17. Tile, ceramic venettr and terra-cotta-Structural tile .and facing tiles are used in various ways in the construction of curtain walls. Structural tile is used as a backup wall for
face brick, facing tile, stone ceramic veneer or ar(;hitectural terra cotta.
Eight-inch through-wall glazed or textured structural tile can be used alone.

.6

,,

THROUGH-WALL TIL~

Two kinds of ceramic venner are produced:


a. Adhesion type -set on the wall in mortar bond only. Slab thickness is limited to a
maximum of 1 1I 4 in. and the face area, which is normally glazed with ceramic colors
is limited to 600 sq. in.

264

( W 1Y~ f.6lr.atn!L

VBM.ei!r

'lz;' mort31 a>at 2J:lPI!lid to

vt;HJu;.r o~ fur~? ~ttwl~

3J4' ~rtar

!bat
1z! ~crJtdt co2t
- - ~/e" h1gh nbbe.d m~tal
1

b. Anchor type -- ceramic veneer is fastened to the backup wall by some type of metal
anchor and supported at intervals by steel angles. Thicknesses vary from 1 1/2 to 3
in. and units are produced in maximum width of 24 in. and maximum length of 36 in.

265.

no

Terra-Cotta is a term used to describe a material consisting of a burned


clay body with some decorativ~ type of face, produced in slab form.
There are two general types, ceramic veneer which is ffat slab and arqhitectural terra-cotta which usually has some sort of sculptured face.

18. Stone (marbla)-Stone facing can be used either over a backupwaU of masonry or
supported by a subframe of aluminum or steel.

..

. ..

. . v:
:

;,

.-

.. 0

....

19. Preca1t concrete slabs-Made up as curtain wall ~nels , using both standard and
lightweight concrete. Blocks may have a smooth, plain concrete surface, plain concrete
with textured surface, or an exposed aggregate surface. A layer of colored aggregates
and white cement is sometimes used on the surface of the panel to produce a terrazzolike finish . .Slabs may also be faced with ceramic veneer.

266

20. Washout finishes-Concrete walls may be finished With either pebble washout, glass
washout, or even shell and granite washout.
The mixture of mortar and pebbles either no. 5, no. 10, or no. 15 is mixed in not too wet
mixture, applied to the brown coat and when the mixture is troweled and not yet dry, a
spray of water is applied to remove the excess cement and expose the stones. The same
procedure is done with glass washout, however white or green or blue colored cement is
used.

-,:: .:.

.::'.Ot1tmi"~

wall

~atd1 ~31. biO'M1 ~


w.a@!t fln1~

21. Synthetic adobe, brick -The final coat is cement plaster mixed with grounded adobe
stones, grounded brick waste, sometimes mixed with\pebbles and sea shellsfor~effect.
.This is. then plastered to the wall from 3/4" to 1 1/4" thickness. When it has hardened, a
regular vertical chipping with an axe is done to expose the aggregate. Colored cement is
sometimes added for effect.

22. Sandblasting-The final finish is done by mixing plaster with colored cement or just
plain cement. This is placed in a sandblasting contraption which can be made at the site.
When the handle is turned, the plaster mix is blasted and forced to adhere to the con
crete backup wall.

w()()J

267

23. Bush-hammered finish-A plastered wall which is hammered from a specially designed hammer.
Bush hammer-A hammer having a serrated face
containing many pyramid-shaped points, used to
dress a conCJete or stone surface; (manual or power
driven).
Finishes:
Bush-hammered concrete - Concrete having an
exposed aggregate finish; usually obtained with a
power-operated bushhammer which rE'moves (by
percussive cutting) the sand-cement matrix . about
the aggregate particles to a depth ranging from 1I 16
to 1/ 4 inch. (1.59 to 6.35 mm.)
Bush-hammer finish-A stone or concrete surface
dressed with a bush-hammer; used decoratively or to
provide a roughened traction surface for treads,
floors, and a pavements.

24. Glass -Glass is used in curtain wall construction in sheet, block and tile form. Glass
blocks are 4 in. thick and comes il') sizes of 6 x 6 in., 8 x 8 in. , 12 x 12 in., and 4 x 12 in.
They are laid in mortar in stack bond. The entire panel must rest on a resilient pad of
some kind so that blocks do not come in contact with the structural frame.

-....;.,~~11 --a:J~t~
.d1211n~l

a>lum11
jamb

~ f1herbo2Jrzl pad
~~;-L ql,a~ biod:..

c~l

'---C~ulkll1_9

25. Plastic - Plastic panels are produced in flat and corrugated sheets. and in sandwich
panels. Many of the sheet type panels are made from fiber-glass-reinforced polyester
plastic. They may be clear, translucent, or colored. Used in factory buildings.

268

26. Logs-Comes from medium si~ed trunks of trees which is either half log or slabs or full
trunk.

OTHEil STUCCO FINI~HE~

W~DTIWWEL.

~ FINI5H

,A,N,.\"f FIN~H (~D91.A~


~e-1

W&Hi GTE!:L-ll?OW!:Ll.ED)

269

~INULA1l:!D

PNEwx:t> FJ".hGH

Bbwfd1 ~ r;Nwood) ~ bru91. t~ff


'Mfl1~) ~g,. AFPY ftntt od, 111.en u~
iMA wald in;t;w.t aftAr~w li;
paoJ) *tt 'IJ(XNd imtt ~ ~ an.d .~
l.8ft1ent 'fin!Q1 wrU 1~ Ida wtcJ.

a'

: .. 0
.

270

. .

..

,.

CEILING AND ACOUSTICAL


MATERIALS
Besides providing an attractive overhead surface in a room or space, ceilings may also be required to:
1. Function as the primary sound-absorption surface in the room.

2. Contain most or all lighting fixtures.


3. Conceal utility services including plumbing, wiring, heating, and air conditioning.
4. Provide outlets for heated and conditioned air.
The most popular system for ceilings in commercial buildings is the suspended ceiling.

~1~ Gt. gaiVAnru..J W!r~

While residential buildings have ceilings generally fastened directly to the floor joists or to a
ceiling joists.

Suspended ceilings c.onsist of a grid of metal track suspended from the structural ceiling
with wires or cables, the grid openings of which are filled with ceiling panels, light fixture's or
other utilities.

272

The space created by lowering the ceiling in this manner is very useful, and is usually neces- .
sary for concealir:lg utility services. Residential construction utilizes attics and crawling
spaces for this purpose. The ceiling panels may be flat or shaped, and available in a wide
range of textures and patterns. Typical panels are 1/ 2 to 1 inch thick and (6() x 601 2 x 2 feet
or 2' x 4' feet !0.60 x 1.20) panels for residential ceilings are usually fi::Jt, and are applied to
plaster, drywall, or wood furring strips.
It is to be remembered tl')at the materials to be used for eaves or outside ceilings must be of
waterproofed plywood, tempered hardboard (Lawanit) flat asbestos sheet, kiln dried wood.
Sometimes the cardboard material egg container is used for decorative ceiling and acoust
ical material.

.. Other material used in suspended ceilings are light diffusers of solid plastic, flat or moulded,
open grid or honeycombed design, or of metal AC louver and stainless steel for ceiling of
banqt.:et halls, lobbies, department stores and screens for shops and restaurants.
One of the most important materials used for c.eiHng panels is:
1. Mineral fiber -a generic term adopted to cover several mineral based materials
used for similar purposes, including asbestos, perlite, vermiculite, and other less
common materials. For ceiling panels, mineral fiber with the addition of a binder may
be molded, pressed, or compacted to whatever density is desired, from a soft absorbent panel to a hard rock-like surface. One of the more common panels, once called
asbestos-cement board, utilizes portland cement as a binder. T',e face of mineral
fiber panels may be left natural, painted, or covered with a variety of materials from
plastic to aluminum. Mineral fiber products are .noncombustible, and thus enjoy a
very good fire rating.

2. Fiberglass - another popuiar material for ceiling panels. Most fiberglass are flat, and
the face side is typically covered with vinyl -paper, or aluminum . These may be obtained with a variety of textures and surfaces.
3 .. Metal wall and ceiling panels are generally perforated for acoustical performance,
and are often backed with fiberglass batts to improve both insulation and acoustic
qualities. Metal panel may be narrow planklike pieces about four inches wide.
Stainless Steei - (Tajima AC louver and S.S. Bishop II). A ready made metal louver with a
wide range of uses, it is light, durable, high precision and non-flammable. For banquet
halls., hotels, lobby ceilings, department stores, grilles and screens for restaurants and
shops.

273

,,

\\ II. t.l.

\.\. \\. .\\ II.

'\\. "

11. \\

"'

II

/L

/1 N N
H 1/
Jl II fL /./H

IL

,,f f

ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
When sound waves strike a surface such as walls or ceilings, they are reflected and the reflected sound, as well as the original. is heard by a listener, resulting .in an increase in sound
intensity. While a sound source is operating, a room become.s filled with reflected sound
waves and when the source is stopped, then r'flected waves continue to travel back and
forth between room surfaces. As a listener picks up these reflected waves, he hears them as
the original sound being prolonged and finalty becoming inaudible as the reflected waves
gradually lose their energy by absorption. This prolongation of sound is called reverberation.
Control of increased intensity and of excessive reverberation are two of the major problema
of sound engineering. Along with them are the problems of control of unwanted sound an.d
of transmission of sound from room to room through walls, floors and ceilings.
A large part of acoustical correction deals with the improvement of hearing conditions and
the reduction of unwanted noise in rooms by reducing the energy of refleeted sound. This is
done mainly by the use of acoustical materials. Materials which have asubstantially greater
ability to absorb sound than such conventional ones as wood, gins, hard plaster, or con
crete.
Tlie percentage of the energy absorbed by a material when a sound wave is reflected from, it
is called the sound absorption coefficient, or acous1ical absorptivity. This absorption coeffi
cient depends on the nature of the material, the frequency of the sound, and the angle at
which the snUnd wave strikes the material. When comparing materials to be used for the im-
provement of hearing conditions, it is common practice to use the coefficient at ~he frequency of 512 cycles. In comparing materials for noise-quieting applications, the noise reduction
coefficient (N .R.C.I which is the average coefficient for the four frequencies of 256, 512,
1,024 and 2,048 cycles is generally used.
Most acoustical materials can be classified in groups:
4

1. ACOUSTICAL TILES
These are made from wood. cane, or asbestos fibers, matted and bonded into sheets of
various thicknesses, ranging from 3/ 16 to 1 1/ 4 in: The shee~ are cut into tiles of several
Size,' ;ncluding 12 x 12 in., 12 x 24 in., 16 x 16 in., 16 x 32 in., Z4 x 2_, in., 24 x 28 in. Edges
nay be square cut, beve4ed or tongue
grooved. ..
.
.

and

274

. These tiles are intended primarily for ceiling applications, they can be applied to solid sur
faces with adhesives, nailed to furring strips attached to a ceiling frame or the underside
of a solid deck, or installed in a suspended ceiling frame..

GL.UEO aR

~JLE:D

SU$PENDED

A great variety of designs, colors and patterns are available. The acoustic openings in the
surface of the tile in themselves provide many different designs. The openings may be
holes drilled in uniform or random patterns or a combination of large drilled holes and tiny
punched ones.

..

.. .
:

C)

o . _o
#

:.

..

..

"

..

C>

-. C!

o ..

" .
...

It

o.

..

... . .
.. 0 ..
".

R1NOCN DRILLED

REGULAR t:J:liLLEO

The openings may be slots, striations, or fissures, or the surface of the tile may be sculp
tured in various patterns, with a factory painted surface so that it does not require paint
ing after installation .

,.. : _..., .

. r

... ": . \ ..

. .. \ ..

'

....
~

'

'

.i

\ ... "\ . . . .. .
. . .. f ..
\. ..~- . ''-'.
. \
.

. . . ~ . . . ..t ' ..
-~. ..;... ..........
' ... .

'.

STRIATeD PA1~

The noise reduction coefficient of tiles of this type is about 0. 70 with some variations, depending on the particular material, the thickness of the tile, and the kind of pattern used.
Asbestos-fiber tiles 12 x 12 x 3/4 in. weigh approximately 1 1/41b.; wood or cane fiber
tiles are slightly lighter.

275'

2. ASS.EMBLED UNITS

as

Consists of some type of sound absorbing material such


a rock-wool or fiber-glass
blanket fastened to an 'acoustically transparent facing. This facing is generally some type
of rigid board, such as hardboard or asbestos board, or a metal sheet. The facings are
perforated to allow the penetration of sound waves.
Such acoustical panels can be fastened to a wall over a frame work of furring strips or
suspended in front of the wall by some mechanical means. .

p.2rf~tAJ h~ti~2A

HbBrgla's 1n~ula'tJOt1

3 . . SPRAYED-ON ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS


There are two types of material used in this sound control application.
a. One type consisting of plaster made with vermiculite or perlite aggregate.
Vermiculite acoustical plaster is generally a premixed product, requiring only the addition of approximately 10 gal. of water per bag of mix. if applied by hand, two coats is
applied, 3/8 in. thick for the first and 1/8 in. for the finish coat.
If applied by machine, two, three or four thin coats are applied so that the total thickness of plaster will be at least 1/2 in.
The noise reduction coefficient for 1'/ 2 in thick vermiculite acoustical plaster applied
by trowel is 0.65, a 1" thick is 0. 75. For machine-applied plaster 1/2 thick the coefficient is 0.55.
Perlite acoustical plaster is usually mixed on the job, using calcined gypsum as the
binder. lt can also be applied either by hand or machine.
The main advantage of using machine spraying as a means of application is that this
method presents no difficulties in plastering over irregular surface.
b. A coating of mineral fiber mixed with an adhesive.
Acoustical treatment with mineral fiber involves the use of specially prepared mineral
wool or asbestos fi,.bers and an adhesive to hold them to the surface.
The fibers are prepared and mixed with an inorganic binding material, which helps to
give them body, and packed in bags ready for application.
The area to be covered is first primed with a thick coat of adhesive, and the fiber is
then sprayed over the surface in one or more coats, depending on the thickness required. For thickness of over 1/2 in. at least two coats are used. Each coat is tamped
to consolidate the fibers. The final surface can be sprayed with sealer or cooler.

276

POPULAR BRANDS FOR SPRAYED ON MATERIALS


1. Sprllrt!JX - usually for hotels, offices and residences.

2. Umplt $pray-usually for theatres, convention halls, radio statior:ts.


Transmission of sound through floors may be either of the im.pact or airborne type. 11"1pact insulation can be prevented by floating floors.

..

Methods for _reducing impact t ransmission through wood-frame floors.

277

.: . ... .

: .

......

4 CORK
a . Acoustical board -a popular material is the corkboard . This is agglomerated cork
from select t~ d cork granules, toasted and mixed with special binders to form into a
mass. The mass is compressed inside moulds and finally baked under controlled temperature. Its characteristics are:
a. efficient insulation

b. great acoustic absorption


c. light in weight, easy to install
d . excellent decorative appearance

e. a nay and rat proof


f . prevents condensation on walls and is
moisture proof
g. density of 6 to 9 Jbs. /cu. ft.
h. coefficient of thermal conductivity 0.29
Btu / sq.ft./h/deg/F/in.
i. specific heat: 0.40 Btullb/deg/F
SIZES:

f / 2H X 12" X 36,. (.0125 X 0.30 X 0 .90)


lH X 12" X 36" (.025 X 0.30 X 0.90)
r X 12" X 36" (.05 X 0.30 X 0 .90)
J " X 12" X 36" (0.075 X 0.3() X 0.90)
Corkboard is installed by glueing (rugby) or nailing.
b. Ceiling board-a popula r brand is the 'WALCORK'. This is made from carefully
selected natural cork on agglomerated cork backing, agglomerated serected cork
granules or a combination of both . Walcork is both sound absorbing and heat insulating. Its natural texture and easy-blending colours make it always delightfully pleasing to the eyes. Best for use in conference rooms, offices, churches, and cQncert
halls. In residential homes, walcork is used f or living room, study room, dens, and
bedrooms. Its characteristics are:

a. decoratiVe
b. sound absorbing
c. heat insulating
d . comes in a variety of patterns and colored de
signs,
e. durable and economical, requiring practically
no maintenance.
SIZES:

available in sheets

2 mm. x 60 em. x 90 em.


3 fl1m. X 60 em. X 90 em.
4 mm . x 60 em. x 90 em.
Walcork is instaUed by using impact adhesive or
contact cement on smooth clear, dry surface from
which all loose paint, grease, wax are removed .

' 78

' .

CEILINGS:

Philippine wallboard corp. -lawanit


Sarmiento industries -plywood
Campos rueda -cork
Stainless steel industries inc.-Tajima stainless
steel

279

CHAPTE~t

ROOF STYLES
a. Common Tyjt8&

SHEO

WINGI=-0 GABLE

GABL~

FLAi

OUTC.H HIP

HIP

MAN~ARO

EUTTERFLY

6ABLE WITH 5Ht=O

282

~BLE

.WITH DORMeR

GABLE: WITH VALLEY

C.LER E~TORY

PLEATED

A- FRAME

c.YUNDR1CAL PARABOLDIO

VAULTED

HYPER80UC

PARABOLOID

coNOID

DOME

PYRAMID

283

: PtTCH a_lll

a PITCH
4/5PITCH

- s
58.

,..

SLOPE

a/c _ ~ 0

12 RUN TO I 'RISE " 4Jf'


12 RuN TO 2 RISE = 9.4
' l2 RUN TO 3 RISE= J4

5!.
~t

45.

12 RUN T04 RtSE

=l&A

12R~NT05RISE

= 22 .,5

l2 RU" TO 8 Rl SE = 26 .s-

. !9.
33..7.

2e.sr22

Ia:!*
14*

gos

-orr
~

24 P,.\RTS RUN

16 ''-

-!

ca/b "6124 OR 1/4 PITCH

..

ROOF GLOPES IN RUN-~ ~ISE t. PITCHES AND . DEGREES

284

ROOFING MATERIALS
There are three components of a roof.
1r

1: Frame or skeleton

2. Rigid inner layer or skin which is fastened to the frame.,and supports the outer layer or
(only used for roofing materials that requires the roof to be waterproofed).
3. Exposed outer layer (roofing rnatenaO.
~~ath111g
W.P. ~~t

rooftdA
@)G./. R~

(no Sh~)

When the roof is flat , the material used to form the inner layer is called a Decking .
When the roof is sloped, the inner skin material is called the roof sheathing.

azmvz nu;;&,npnununnz ~

Materials for roof deckings or sheathings may be boards, plywood, concret e, steel , gypsum,
rigid insulation boards, strawboards, or tile.
The exposed outer, waterproof layer of the roof is known as the rQofing.
Materials for roofing include shingles of all kinds, wooden shakes, clay roofing tile, cement
roofing tile, slate, sheet metal, asbestos cement sheet roofing, asphalt roofing, glass and
plastics.

.-

1. SHINGLES (a roofing unit of wood, asphaltic material, slate, tile, concrete, asbestos cement or other material cut to stock lengths, widths and thickness; used as an exterior co
vering or sloping roofs and side walls; applied in an overlapping fashion .

285

Different kinds of shingles


a. Wood shingles-Made from trees that are light when dry, has high crushing
strength, and slow growing trees which produce narrow ~nnual rings. This in turn,
result in a fine, evenly grained wood with uniform texture. Wood shingles are also
made from large trees with few knots, so lhat shingles free should from blemishes and
distorted grains can be produced in large quantities. The tree should have a low coefficient of expansion and contraction due to changes in moisture conditions, so that
changing. frorn a wet to an air-dry condition, the shingles are less likely to split or
check.

in

Carefully chosen logs are first sawed into 16, 18, or 24 in. lengths. EvefY'effort is made
to produce blocks which have and edge-grain faceupright, machines then saw these .

blocks into shingles, graded. a_nd packed into bundles containing enough shin~les to
cover 25 sq. ft. Shingles are packed green and .may be shipped green or stacked and
air dried or kiln dried.
No shingles is allowed to be wider than 14 in. or less than 3 in. standard lengths are 24,
,
18 and 16 in.
The amount that a roof shingles should be exposed to the weather depends on the
pitch of the roof and the length of shingle used. The maximum exposure on 1/ 8 and
1/6 pitches should be 3 3/4 in . For 16 in . shingles, 4 1/ 4 in . For 18 in . shingles and 5
3/ 4 in. for 24in. shingles. For roofs with a pitch steeper than 1/6, the maximum exposure for 16 in-shingles should be 5 in., for 18 in. shingles 5 1/2 in, and for 24 -in .
shingles 7 1/2 in.

286

1~" -~ure'
1&"' -AX~~
2.411-~.B

b. Wood shskes -Shakes are used for the same purpose as shingles but are split rather
than sawed from the blocks. This produces a much rougher face than in the case with
shingles. .
-

Three types of shakes are made


1. Hand split and resawed- made bY cutting planks of proper thickness and running
them throught a bandsaw diagonally.

~~Wt1Jt~}y

~tt

-two

pt.~.

2. Taper split- Produced by hand-spliting. A shingle like ta!"ler is achieved by reversing the
block end-for-end with each split.

287

3. Straight-split shakes-Similarly done as taper split exceptAh,at


.
splitting is done from one end of the block only.
Hand split and resawed shakes comes in 18, 24 and 32 in . length with
thicknesses of 1/2 to 3/4, 3/4 to l 1/4. The taper split comes in 24 .
in. long from 1/2 to 5 / 8 in. taper. Straight split shakes are made in 18
and 24 and 3/ 8 in. thick .

c. Asplullt shingles - Made frrJITI heavy rag felt, saturated with asphalt and coated w ith high-rnelting point flexible asphalt. Ceramiccoated mineral granules are pr~ into the asphalt coating on the
exposed face to provide . a fire-resistant surface . . A number of
weights and styles of shingles are made, each in a variety of co
.lors. The weights refer to the weight of the quantity of shingles re
quired to cover 100 sq. ft. usually referred to as a square of
shingles. This weight varies from 1351b. for light shingles to 325
lb. for .very heavy ones. Weights are varied by altering the thickness of the felt used,
the amount of asphalt absorbed by the felt, the thickness of asphalt coating and the
amount of mineral used on the surface.
Roof slopes should be at least 4 in., 12 shingles. Broad-headed roofing nails or staples
are used to fasten them down, and corners if exposed tabs should
cemented down
with asphalt roofing gum to prevent damage by wind.

be

SHINGLES STYLES:

n }
TWIN TAB ~/\ 1.2

!10-2'-S /bG .

TRIPL...E TAB 3'"X1Z"'


~10-~(i,s lo~ .

3- lAB HEXAGON
~"X 11 Y3" 1'-5 lb.

g_;.TAB HeXAGON
3~/ X 11 ~~~ 1'511:>.

.INTE"RL-OCKING
f10 lb.

[ n n 1

~HX18,.

INTERL.OC.KING 1'~x 1b ''


1f5"- 1!>5/b .

Asphalt roof shingles are also manufactured with fiber glass self-sealing thermoplastic
agent which when activated by the sun, actoaJly ft.ISeS the shingles_together to form a
" one piece root" no costly cementing operations a~re required. This shingle is firepro9f
since the mat base is fiberglass and coated with high grade waterproof asphalt. This
prevent rotting, curling and oxidation. This shingle also has a ceramic granule surfacing and available in seven different colors.
I

si:ze - 13 1/4 x 39 3/8"


strips per square - 66
weight per square - 225 lbs.
exposure - 5 5/SN
head lap- 2"

lit'\A

r~------~9~--------1

rnai'k ---

-----------------

1(

d. Asbestos cement shingles-Made from a combination of asbestos fibers in portland cement paste. To this mix is added quantities of small colored ceramic granules
to produce permanent colors. The material is rolled into sheets 5/ 32 in thiclc, often
with a wood-grain textured surface. Sheets are cut into shingles of various sizes and
shapes with nail holes predrilled. Because this type of shingle is hard and brittle, heavy
felt underlay is required and soft nails of copper or aiuminum should be used. Cutting
is done with special shear.

3o"x 14"

289

e. Aluminum shingi'es.-Made from sheet aluminum approximately 0.020 in. thick in


the form of a 9 in . square . They are folded on all edges with revers~d folds so that adjacent shingles will interlock. Starters are made by cutting a shingles as shown in the
figure. Each shingles is fastened down with a sjngle nail. This type of shingle may be
used on roofs with a slope of 3 in 12 or steeper. They .are manufactured with a plain
aluminum surface, with an a~odized finish , or with a baked-on vinyl-enamel finish in a
variety of colors.

2. ROOFING TILE
a. Terracotta - Because of jts weight, being a terra-cotta product, wood sheathing and
strong well-braced roof frames are necessary. All of the styles of terra cotta tiles
should be laid over an asphalt felt base and are fastened with copper nails. Elastic cement is use.d to caulk joints that are otherwise not watertight. Sometime corrugated
galvanized sheets are used for sheathing.

STYLES

....-----9-''tLJpp~r <.1r G-.f.n.all


,.,----~2" v.2rt1~al b21tt~n

-1''lt't'' honztJttt.al

.___

b.attM

_ _.I.;)'/. 91Mt

" ; - - - - - - rN.rt
fl. 7JI 6. L rir.Jp tor

'-------rr

~ISH

290

~VAry

lNOUlA

1.00 111 .

A toRR . 61. SHEET SHEATHJNG

_.------------~ 1 X4'' V~rt1~AJ pJfflt]


11

r--- - ---1".x 2" honzontaJ b:att'n


- -- - - - 2." t:op~r tJr G.r. n~1l

-~-fX7" G-1.5Tr~p r1Vi2TD.d -h/G.l.


~tw2t for evs-y 1-c.tl f1.

r-::roof tde

./"-- -r.aft~r
;;-c.__ __

purhn

~~~----torr. 6 -J. roof

~OOF

TILE ON

C~R.6.J.

SHEATHING

r - - - - -- - - - --t'xf"l1orrwntal b.att~M H:aJli)J

,------ - rbaf

t1l~

w3fgprvofmg fAit or pl.a~trc sh~t

'\....-...,,.c;__ _

-~=F--:~-~:..............---:---

1.11X 3'' purhn

tX

1}'1." ~ywa>~ ~thl'g

~....._-----.-- r.aft~r

ROOF" TILE ON PL'fWOOD g..rE4THIN6


291

~2''horlia1tal batt~r
ill~
~x ~/'

pur!IJ1S

- - - - - z"xs' raftAr

FRENCH FLAT TOP


ST.PNDARO 41 )( Z.5an

SWISS SV\No-\RD ROOFING 1ll.J$


43X~an.

Manufactured by ERA Industries Inc. distributed by Rivera Filipina, Inc.

b. Concrete roofing tile-Similar to English tile but have a lug across th8 underside
about 3 in. from one end. They are laid without nails and rely on their weight to hold
them in place. The first course is suppor~ed by horizontal furring strip. Each succeeding tile is supported by the one below.

IDW~~ ttiR

~~L_. .
hoiJIHg sinp

292

111X2"

This type of roofing does not need any sheathing anymore and is laid direct on purlins,
if the slope is 25 or more or less than 25, sheathing is needed~
The first purlin near the Facia is one 1" bigger than all succeeding purlins. The succeeding tile is supported by the weight of the one above.

1"EGULA

1' ytx13''

lug

~low +~ ~t slidJng

(.;C....----~ t.''x4''

ftr>t pur:hrl

. 'the r~ '1.'x?Jif purlll1$

3. SHEET METAL PROOFING -Materials includl!, steel, stainless steel, copper, lead,
zinc, aluminum and galbestos. Joints are necessary between sheets to produce a waterproof skin.

Different types of fabricated joints.


e. Flat seams are used when the roof is flat.
b. Ribbed .seams are used with heavier metal for appearance or where expansion of the
roofing material becomes a significant factor in the roof design.
c. Roofs withe slope over 4 in 12 may have unsolderiKid standing seams.

FLAT SEAM

Rl885.0 OR
BATTEN

s;TANDING

293.

a. Steel -Steel strip is coated with zinc, tin, lead, or combinations of two of these to prodace steel roofing.
a-1 Gslwmized steel-Steel coated with zinc. Produced
in corrugated sheet or in plain sheets.
g.yuges -(thickness) the lower the number, 'the
thicker it is.
gauge no. 16 and no. 18-for water tanks '
GA
GA
GA
GA

no.
no.
no.
no.

20, 22-car bodies


24 -gutters
26-standard for rooting
31 - for low cost housing

inch thicknesses-0.063, 0.051


0.039, 0.033
0.027,
0.021, 0.012
lengths-6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12 feet
-standard lengths
-now up to 43 feet
-long (long span)
widths-32" (. 80) and 36H (901 wide

ACCESSoRIES
DOWNSPCUT

2..'X3'~ ZJ<4''

a~2

.Long span roofing

- either coated with 2 in. only


- or colored, pre-painted
This long Span colored roofing employs a double
coating and double baking of zinc coated G.l. steel
sheets by a special epoxy-acrylic. Anti-corrosion system as its primer coating and polyester as its finishing
coat. The factory delivers this colored roofing from
any size up to 60 feet .

294

Advantage of using colored long span


1. Eliminate painting work and labor costs.
2. Maintenance-free roof with its anti corrosion system that lasts 5 times much lo"nger
than ordinary manually painted sheets:
3. Long span panels up to 60 feet produce eave to ridge lengths which require less
fasteners and do away with wasteful end laps which are sources of leaks.
4. Stronger gauge because it is made of prime steel and the continuity of its length increases rigidity .
.. 5. Different rooting sections available designed to withstand greater load.
6. Colored long span roofing can be roll formed, lock formed, deep drawn, punched or
pressed without suffering from cracking or removal of coating.
7. Comes in weather-resistant colors of red, green beige white and blue.
8. This roofing is also applicable assidings, ceilings, interior and exterior wall partitions,
curtain wall element, shp counters, truck bodies, cabinets and kitchen hoods.

DESIGN SECTIONS
Courtesy of metal forming corp. brand (Goloroof).

RIB GOOR.

(alurnmum )

!---J

r-------~-- .eff.echve

fB-na~

b
11

w!&th ;(7~

wl.dth - zg --- anti-LapdJar"y ~rmv.f!


maiB nb
TWIN R 19

-- --~ovJan

- - - -- - - - - t

- - - r:..w.
ow. 14~"

v- BEAM

295

B4~N ( t.Urh cu.e)

~-"

SOLO U-BEAM

..._,I
CORA
(?." c.orr)
.
( .30 %~'') II
r=Y/. Z7. 75

Lcr.J11?fY corru!jdtRA
~J

,(11 torrugati01 ~ )
( :s2"w)

( e.w. zs")
o.e~(gn s;

frz:m

~ LOOP

1'RI""WA\fe

296

Filp1n2~ ~flJtts-~ Jnt. .

bra1d- (Kok:P;pa-1)

br2lr0 ( LOiorbonJ)

frvm

E.W. - 30 U1 ( 7~0 11'Jr?'l

.....-------~

TRIMDI!K HI -1'eN

CUiitt'OM ORB

D~tgn ii-z,m Mrttla~ s;tul urp. br.anJ ( ~tr ~tJZe.J)

f\__~A.______,{\..___f\

f\~_[\__....JA____f\

~MI

41~

aUAD -RIS
AV2!12bli2 n ~ta1&rJ ( 666 rnrn t:=.r)
211J RtV~IJi;? ( 710 mm E W) con-uqai"la-1
Bright plate- Steel coated with thi
a-4 Temeplate-When coated with a mixture of 75 percent lead and 25 percent tin.

a-3

Gauges and coating weights -0.29, 0. 73 and 1.47 oz. of tih-lead coating per sq.
ft.
b. Stainless steel-When chromium is added during the process of manufacturing
steel, this stainless steel has great resistance to corrosion, and is usually specified for
exterior use. Chromium content is 14 to 20 percent and because of"its high strength,
stainless steel for roofing is produced in relatively thin sheets, and because of its hardness, all fabrication must be done in the shop. It is also expensive, so its use as roofing
is limited usuallY to special conditions.

c. Monel metal-This is an alloy containing about 70 percent nickel, Z7 percent copper,


and 3 percent iron. It is highly corrosion-resistant and does not tarnish easily. It is also
hard requiring shop fabrication, and expensive.
d. Copper-Roofing copper may be soft-roHed which is easily worked, or cold-rolled,
which is stronger, harder, but less ductile . This is produced in four thicknesses or
weights-16, 20, 24 and 32 oz. per sq. ft. and lengths of 8 and 10ft.
Copper is chosen as ths roofing material where dignity, warmth and charm as well as
long life are prime considerations. This is because in m~t locations, an attractive soft
blue-green patina forms on copper so that its beauty is enhance with age.

e.

Lead - is a very pliable and useful roofing material, it can be drawn and stretched to fit
wrapped surfaces. It weathers to a soft, even gray tone and is little affected by acids.

Sheet lead for roofing is usually at least 2 1/ 2 lb. hard lead, which means that it
weights at least 2 1/21b. per sq. ft. and contains between 6 and 7 1/2 percent antimony, dimensions of sheet are limited to 2 x 4ft. A heavy coat of asphalt paint is painted
on the contact side if lead work is in contact with fresh concrete.

297

f. Zinc -Zinc is lighter and stiffer than lead but is affected by acids and has a high coefficient of expansion. Rolled zinc sheet is sometimes used for roofing and flashing, but
zinc has a much wider application as a coating for steel roofing sheets.

g. Aluminum -Aluminum roofing is light,.'loncorrosive, rigid and durable. It has a very


high coefficient of thermal expansion. It is available in both sheets and coils in a
number of thicknesses. It comes in gauges 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22. 24 and 26 thicknesses are 0.081, 0.064; 0.051, 0.040, 0.032, 0.025, 0.020 and p.016.
Sheet range in width from 24 to 48 in. and lengths 4 to 12ft.
Aluminum roofing is produced in natural finish, in polished and oxide finishes, with a
painted finish on one or both sides and in eight different patterns.
Mechanical jointing is the most practical method of joining aluminum sheets. All types
of seams are used, but slip seam joints are used where connections are subject to
thermal expansion and contraction.

ORIGINAL SIZE

WH!:N EXPANSION
OCCURS

h . Galbestos- This is a composite roofing made up of a steel-sheet core covered on


both sides with a layer of zinc. While the zinc is still hot a layer of asbestos felt is pressed to it and the felt is impregnated with asphalt. Finally a color~d waterproof outer
coating is applied.
Sheets aremanufactured in 18, 20, 22 and 24 gauge and are made up into corrugated
panels 30 or 33 in. wide, in lengths up to 12ft. Joints are made by side and end lapping.
4. ASBESTOS-CEMENT SHEET ROOFING
t.

Asbestos fibers and portland cement are combined under pressure to form corrugated
roofing sheets. These sheets are used in the same manner as corrugated metal, asbestoscement sheets may be left unpainted, painted or factory finished with plastic coatings of
various colors.

Some designs from ETERNIT corporation

1. Ardex Lightweight Corrugated Sheet


Especially designed for buildings erected in places that are almost inaccessible and involves transport by manual or else very expensibe means.
a. Standard ardex

7 mrrug21ftdn
298

b. Super ardex

e .w. :>B.35"(o.g7s}

.s.w. 41. 3d ( 1.tJ5

LBngths -a , 10 ;and

12

f.eet

2. 4-V Corrugated Asbestos Sheets

3. Kalantas

Lengths from 12 to 24 feet eliminates trusses, rafters, purlins for low cost housed.

4. Placa Ondula

g~fo/a' ( 1.007m} - ... ..

E.W. -og75
0-813

(:58

--J

-,a")~

m ( 32")
299

brand (Philsteel)

COLOR BOND
Sempura tile, a new roofing concept made of longspan prepainted steel tile but retaining
the features of ceramic tiles, does not crack nor shatter before and during-installation.
The tile has epoxy primer and baked paint. It does not require yearly repainting. It is also
leak proof because it has less seams and overlaps.

5. Built-Up Roofing
A term applied to a type of roofing made by building up successive layers of felt paper
and asphalt over a solid roof deck of some description, with or without insulation.
Five types:

a. Roofing type consisting of asphalted felt paper, asphalt and gravel, or slag and is intended to roof slopes from 1/2 to 3 in. per foot.
With a wood deck, the first step is the application of a single layer of 5-lb dry sheathing paper.. Next two layers of 15-lb asphalt-saturated felt paper is applied dry and
nailed with broad-headed roofing nails. These are followed by three layers of 15-lb
asphalt-saturated felt paper, each layer being sealed in place with approximately 20
lb. of hot asphalt per 100 sq ..ft. Next a layer of hot asphalt is spread over the surface
at the rate of about 65 lb. per 100 sq . ft.
If the slope is 1/8" to 1 in., use l40F asphaltt
If the slope is 1 to 2 in., use 170F asphalt
If the slope is over 2 in., use 210F asphalt
Finally a layer of crushed slag or pea gravel is spread over the asphalt at the rate of
300 lb. per 100 sq. ft. for slag or 400 lb. per 100 sq. ft. for gravel. This type of roof
lasts 20 years.
For non wood d~ks or over an insulated sl.lrface, a similar grade of roofing is applied
by sealing all layers of asphalt-saturated felt paper in hot asphalt.

300

--2.*~1ap

nal

FOUR- PLY BUILT- UP ASPHALT


0\lt:R WOOD DECk

ROOF

b. Roofing type no. 2 consists of tarred felt paper, pitch and gravel. This is intended for
roofs with slope of 0 to 1 in. per foot. Procedure is the same asphalt type.
c. Roofing type no. 3 consists of asbestos felt, asphalt felt, and a smooth flood
coat of asphalt, intended for roofs with a slope of from 1/2 to 8 in. per ft.
Over a wood deck, the dry sheathing paper consists of 9-lb. waxed kraft. A single
layer of 25-lb. asphalt saturated felt paper is laid over this held in place with roofing
nails. Next two layers of 15 lb. asphalt felt are applied, each layer being seated in
place with 20 lb. per 100 sq. ft. mopping of hot asphalt. Next to layers of 15 lb.
asphalt-saturated asbestos paper are applied in the same way. Finally a coat consisting of 251b. of asphalt per 100 sq. ft. is applied, using proper grade of asphalt for
the roof slope.
d. Roofing type no 4 requires heat~Y slate-surfaced roofing paper as well as asphalt-sa~
turated felts and may be used on roofs with slopes from 2 to 18 in. 12. Over a wood
deck, a single layer of 5-lb. dry sheathing paper is first applied. Next comes a single
layer of 15-lb. asphalt sc;~turated felt, held with roofing nails. Over this are laid two
layers of 15-lb. asphalt felt and two layers of 120-lb. Slate-surfaced felt-each of these
is sealed in place with 20 lb. per 100 sq. ft. of 210F. asphalt. This type of roofing is
recommended as a 10-year roof.

301

e. Roofing type no. 5 involves what is known as the cold process. The felts are cold
process felts, saturated with cold asphalt emulsion, and the asphalt top coating is
applied cold. Layers of felt are sealed together with asphalt adhesive. Roofing ot this
type is suita~le for slopes from 1/8 to 8 in-per foot. Over a wood deck, three layers of
cold. process 53-lb. felt. paper are applied, fastened down wiith roofing nails and asphalt adhesive at the rate of about 2 1/2 gal. per 100 sq . ft. This surface is covered
with a layer of asphalt-fibrated emulsion applied cold at the rate of 4 -gal. per 100. sq.
ft. This type of roofing is also considered to have useful life of 20 years.

. 6. Rolled Roofing
This consists of very heavy asphalt-saturated felt paper, with or without finely crushed
slate embedded in one surface, put up is rolls.

Four basic type:


a. Smooth roll-consists of asphalt-saturated felt ranging in weight from 45 to 65 lb.
per 100 sq . ft. covered with a smooth coating of asphalt.

b. Mineral-surface roll ranges from 90 to 120 lb. per 100 sq. ft. and has a layer of
crushed slate embedded in the asphalt surface coating, made in 36 in. wide.
c. Psttsrn-fldge roll-made in 32 and 36 in. and consists of a 105-lb. felt that is mine. rat-surfaced except for a 4 in. band down the center. The roll is semicut on a pattern
along this strip so that a roll produces 16 or 18 in. wide patterned roofing strips.
These are normally lapped 2 in. when being applied to a rooi.
d. The 19"in. selvage roll is made of fr()m felt weighing 140 to 150 lb. per 100 sq. ft. in a
strip 36 in. wide. A 17 in. wide band of this strip is mineralized, and the other 19 in. is
plain. When applied to a roof, each strip is lapped 19 in. over the one below to present a completely mine~lized surface and to provide double coverage. (a popular
brand is John_s Manville)

7. Sprayed-on Asphalt Roofing


This is a new technique for the application of asphalt roofing, using special equipment
for applying the material. A speCial gun with three nozZles and a fiber cutting chamber is
used. Glass fibers are fed into the chamber where they are cut to predetermined lengths
and blown out throught a center nozzle. Two side nozzles each deliver a spray of asphalt
emulsion which coats the glass fibers and carries them to the deck to form a reinforced
film of asphalt. The thickness of the film can be increased by repeated sprayings.
This type of roofing is applied over regular base roofing felts of irregular shapes. This
method gives a monolithics film application over the entire surface, regardless of the
shape or contours.

.302

8. Glass Roofing
Commonly used glass used for roofing are

a. Corrugated glass-made in sheets \rtith corrugations, which correspond with the


metal or asbestos board roofing. The glass is usually .3/8 in. thick, and sheet are
made up to a maximum size of 50 x 144 in. Glass sheets may be interchanged with
the regular roofing sheets to allow the entry of light through the roof. Glass sheets
are fastened in place and made weather proof by elastic caulking compound at side
and end laps.

.b. Wired glails- This is glass which has embedded in it wire mesh with not larger than
7/8 in. openings. The glass in 1/4 in. thick and may have a polished or patterned surface. Sheets are made up to a maJSimum size of 60 x 132 in. This type of glass is held
in metal frames and is commonly used in skylights, etc.

9. Plastic Roofing
Used in three forms for roofing.
a. Corrugsted plastic sheet-made from glass-fiber-reinforced plastics in color or
translucent. Sheets are 34 in. wide and 8, 10, 12ft. long with 2 1/2 or 1 1/4 in. corrugations. Such sheets may be interchanged with corrugated sheet metal, asbestos or
galbestos sheets to allow entry of light.
b. ShHts of cltNtr vinyl plastic used in green houses,conservatories, and factory
buildings. Used for the same purpose as glass sheets. Vinyl sheets can be much
larger because of their great impact strength.
c. Liquid plastic- Also sprayed onto roof decks and is known as the envelope rqofing.
This liquid envelope consists of a pigmented, opaque vinyl plastic which is applied by
means of spray gun tcdorm a continuous film 3Cfto 40 mils. thick. It can be appliec"
over -armos. "any- type roof decK or existing roofing material except root WOOd
shingles. This is 'lery useful for roofs with irregular shapes or very steep slopes.

of

The plastic dries very quickly to form a film which, for a 40 mil thickness, has a tensile
strength of about 500 psi and elongation of 200 percent. The vinyl coat is highly resistant to industrial atmosphere containing dirt, grime and mild acid fumes. It is also
highly resistant to deterioration due to extended exposure to sunlight.

NEW ROOFING DESIGNS: (1986)


10. Milano Design-by Philsteel-this is a long span steel tiles, solid steel sculptured to
match the beauty of ceramic roofing. It is leakproof because it has less seams and overlaps, Polyester paint baked over epoxy primes which is virtually maintenance frrM~ It
consists of steps-better rigidity than ordinary Corrugated Sheets.
The total coated thickness is 0.43 mm (0.017 in)
The weight per unit area is 4.53 kg/m2
per unit length i~ 3.44 kg/ml
coverage is 220 sq. cm/Mt.
available up to 6 meters factory cut-to-ordered lengths. It is packed by strapped bundles
or crated depending on the requirement. The recommended roof slope is 1 in 6 10

30;j

11. Banawe Design -by metal forming corporation. This is a horizontally laid coloredlong
span metal tile.:which has conceafed fastening, cut to size, and most of all, an absence
of purlins which saves on this cost. It has sharp distinct horizontal rib lines and hook
action at overlaps. It prevents capillarity and checks the penetration of rain water with
wind velocity of 60 meters per second or 134.21 miles per hour.

'.

It Completely eJiminates the need for purtins because of its horizo11tal rib design which by
itself acts as the purtin. The intermediate rafters that are to be added are much less in
board feet measurement than
purlins required for the vertical roofing. It is also suitable for sidings, and can easily be replaced or taken out without damaging panel. Allows
construction, installation of a low pitch roof at 3' in 12". .

the

304

DETAIL

a= RIDGE ROLL

o.'l~~

DETAJL OF BANAWE HORIZCNTAL PANEL

305

aanaw.~J

ha-twnt.al partAI
p!at1 91ur~.arts- c.hp

OUT~IDE

GUTTER DETAIL

0 ETAIL CF STARTER cliP

LDNG/1UDlNAL ~ECTJON

/J.11 m
)

U)f

~~

--

0
)

TQp VIEW OF Cl-EAT


306

Chapter

S)~[M][p~@

G6(Q)~[M]~

BILL OF MATERIALS

,_____

I. MOBILIZATION
_ _ _ rolls Sawali Fencing @
_ _ !roll of _ _ x
_ _ size@ P_ _/roll ...
- - - pes. 2"' x 4'" 10' -0' up total
bd.ft. @ ' -I bd.ft. . . .

'---.---

- - - p e s. 2" x3'"
bd.ft. @ ,

, _ _ __

'-----

10'0' up total

bd.ft. ......
_ _ _ pes. 1/4"' x4' x 8' plywood@
, _ f p c. ... .... :..... ..... ...
_ _ _ pes. corrugated G.l. sheet@

, _ _/kilo .....................
- - - kilos 2'" c. w nail@
P_ _lkilo............. ..... ...
- - - pes. drums for water@
P_ _ /drum .. ...... ... .. .....
- - - pes. concrete pail@

, _ _ / pc. .. ...... .. .. .. ... ....

, _ __ _
'----' - -- -'-----

, _ _ __

_ _ _ pes. shovels@
, _ _/pc. .... .. .. ....... .. ... .

- - - p e s. 1" x 6'" x 12'-0.. up total


bd.ft. @P_ _/ bd.ft. .....
Water Connections
& Permit . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .
Electrical Connections
& Permit .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . ...
Septic Tank for Construction

Use.. .........................

' - --

--

P_ __ _
' - --

--

'-----

' - -- --

II. EARTHWORK ........ ..... ....... ... ............................................


- ---'- cu.m. of earth to be removed
_ _ _ hrs: to be used when
bulldozing required @
, _ _ /hr ........... :..........
- - - cu.m. of earth fill @

,_/cu.m ......... ~.. ... ......

' - --

P_ ____.__

--

'----...::;.

_ _ _ pes. of 100 ft . length pile @


, _ _ ! pile .....................
- - - cu.m. stones for riprapping@
P_ _ /cu.m. .......... .... ....

'----' - --

--

ESTIMATING GUIDE
Total cu.m. of Earth Multiply

lt 25%

plus loose volume cu .

= Compact Volume.

Dead load plus live load of building divided by approximately 160,000 lbs. carried by one 100
ft. pite- total numbers of piles. (approx 150 psf).
Riprapping -get total area in aq.m.
1 cu.m. Stone = .1 to 1.6 sq.m. of riprapping depends on thickness

308

,._____

Ul. Cc;>NCRETE WORKS

a) FOOTINGS _ _ cu.m. total


_ _ _ bags cement
_ __

, _ _ __

P
/cu.m. .... . ... ..........
- - - cu.m. gravel@
P
/ cu.m..............-.....
- - - kilos of Steel bar@

'-----

, _ _/kilo ... ..................

' - ----

- -(or

, _ _ /bag .....................
cu .m. stone fill @

' - -- - -

rolls of G.l. Wire #16 @

P_ _ / roll ............. :.:.....


pes. 16 mm +steel bar x 6.00 m
@ , _ _ / pc. .............................

b~ SLABS ON FILL

' - -- - -

, _ _ __

bags cement @ , _ _ /bag


cu.m. stone fill @
P_ _/ cu.m. : .................
- -cu .m. gravel@
P_ _l cu.m. ..................
- -cu.m. 'riversand @
P_ _icu.m. . . ..... .. .. ... .. ..
- - - kilos of steef bar@
P
kilo .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. ..
_ _ _ rolls of G.l. wire #16@

_ __
- - -

'
/ roll .....................
(or No. of pes size of Stee4
Bar x 6.00 m. @ p_ _ / pc. .............

' - ---' - -- - ' - -- --

'-----

P_ _ _ __
, _ _ __

'----

c) COLUMNS A~O STAIRS

_ _ _ bags cement@
, _ _ / bag ..... .. ...... ........
_ _ _ ~ .m. gravel @

P
/ cu.m. .. .. .. .. .. .... ....
- - cu.m. riversand@
P
~ /cu.m.
.. .............
- -- kilos of Steel bar@

, _ _ __
'-----

, _ _/kilo ........ .............


(or _ _ pes. size

+mm x 6.00 m

steetbar@ , _ _/ pc. ... . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. ..

P----P_ _ _ __

, _ _ __

_ __ rolls G.l. Wire-116

@P_ _/roll

................

P----

. d) BEAMS AND GIRDERS


_ _ _ bags cement@
,
bag ............. ... _,...
_ __ cu.m. gravel @

,_
. __/ cu.m. ..................
- --

cu.m.

/cu.m. ..... .............


- - kilos of steelbar 0

' - - - --

riversan<iO

,._ _ __

/kilo . .. .. .. ... . .. ........

P - - - -p._ _ __

(or _ _ pes. size _ _

e mm x

600 m. St. bar @ P_ _l pc. . . . . . . ....


- - - rolis G.l . Wire #16@
p_ _ /roll ;........... .........

' - - -- -

P_ _ __ _

e) SUSPENDED R.C. SLABS

_ __

bags cement@

, _ _ / bag
_ _ _ .. CI,.I.m. gravel@
P_ _/cu.m. ........ ........ ..
- - - cu.m; riversand@
P_ _ /cu.m. ...... ............
_ _ _ kilos steel bar@
P_ _/kilo .....................
(or _ _ pes, size mm X ~ IT!
steel bar
@P_ _ / pc. ........... ...... ..............
_ _ _ rolls G. I. wire #16@
P_ __/roll ........ .............

'~--' -- -- -

P_ _ _ __
P
P_ _ __
' - - - --

ESTIMATING GUIDE
Computations:
cu.m. = length x width x thickness
Class " A" mix generally used for computation
1:2:4
1bag cement: 2 bags sand : 4 bags gravel
for speed of computation with contingency. multiply
cu.m. x 10 = No . of bags cement
cu.m. x 0.5 = Total cu.m. Sand
cu.m. x 1.0 = Total cu .m. gravel

G./. Wire #16


Total Kilos of Steel Bar

2,900
1 roll G.l. Wire
Length

No . of Rolls of

G.l. Wire
Kilos

STEEL BARS WEIGHT

SIZES

310

kg /l. m.

# 2 or 2/8"
II 3 or 3/8"
# 4 or 4/8"
# 5 or 5/8..
# 6 or 6/ 8"
# 7 or 7/ 8 ..
I 8 or 8/ 8 "
# 9 or 9/8"

#10.or 10/8..
#11 or 11/8..
#12 or 12/8..

=
=
=

1/ 4'"+ or 6mm
3/ B"+ or 10 mm.
1/2"+ or 12 mm

5/8.. or 16 mm
3/4"+ .or 20 mm
7/ 8"+ or 22 mm
or 25mm
1 1i'8"+ or 28 mm
1 1/4"+ or 32 mm
1 3/4"+
1 1/2"+ or36mm

,...

0 .248
0 .616
1.007

1.'579
2.466
3.041
3.854
6.028
6.313
8.938

IV. FORMWORKS .... ... . ......... .. ... . .. . .. .. .... . .. ..... .. ... .. . .. . .. . . .. ..... ..

'----

a) R.C. Slab, beams, columns, stairs

_ _ _ pes. 1/2" X 4' X 8' plywood@

, _ _/pc. . .. . ... .... .. .. ..... .

, _ _ __

(or _ _ pes. 1" x 6" T and G


Form) _ _ total bd.ft.
@ , _ _/ bd.ft . ................................. '-~-- - - pes. 2" x 4" x12'-0" up
Apitong _ _ total bd.ft.@

, _ _lbd.ft. .......... ........


- - - pes. 2" X 3" X 12'..()'" Up
_ _ total and bd.ft.@
, _ _/ bd .ft. ..................

'---~

, _ _ __

_ _ _ kegs. 2" c.w. Nail @

, _ _/keg .... . ........ ... . ....

, _ __ _

_ _ _ kegs. 4"' c.w. nal@

, _ _/keg .....................

, _ _ __

_ _ _ gallons fonii oil @

, _ _/gal. .. ............... ....

'----

ESTIMAT1NG GUIDE

= 4' X 8' .,;. 32 sq. ft. a~


total area in SF = No. of pes. of 4' x 8'

Plywood

1/2'" p4ywood

32

Total area of
Plywood x 60%
== Total BF of 2" x 3"
(.60) = Apitong Fonn Lumber
Total area of
Plywood x 150% ::: Total BF of 2" x 4"'
(1 .501 = Apitong form Lumber

Nlls:
Total Area of Plywood

2,500

= No. of Kegs of 2" c.w. nail


(here 1 keg. = 80 plywood)

Total BF of Form Lumber

2,000

= No. of Kegs. of 4'" c.w. nail

Form Oil:
Total Area of Plywood

2,500

= gallons of oil

V. MASONRYWORK

....

'- ---

a) HOLLOW BLOCKS

- - - pes. 4" x a 16" CHB@


, _ _/pc. .................. ...
- - - pes. 6" X a 16" CHB@
_ _._ l pc. .... ... ......... .....

' - -- - '-

--311

_ __

pes. 10 mm t> steel bar

x 6.00 m @ P_ _ / pc.... ... .


_ _ ___: kilos G.l. wire #16@
, _ _ /kilos ......... .... .... .
_ _ _ bags cement for mortar@

, _ _ / bag .... .... ............ .


_ _ _ cu.m . sand@
P
cu.m ................. ..

...

b) WALL FOOTING
_ __

bags cement@
P_ _ / bag .... .... ........ . .. ..
_ _ _ cu .m. gravel @
P_ _ /cu .m .. ............... ..
_ _ _ cu.m. sand@
P_ _ /cu.m ....... ........... .
_ _ _ pes. 12 mm x 6.00 steel bar
@P_ _ /pc ......... ....... .. .
_ _ _ pes. 10 mm x 6.00 m. steel

+
+

bat@ P_ _/ pc . . ......... ..
_ _ _ kilos #16 G. I. Wire #16@
P_ _ / kilo .................... .
c)

PLAIN CEMENT FLOOR TOPPING


Total Area _ _ sq. m.
x thickness _ _ cu.m.
_ __
bags cement@
P_ _ / bag .. ........... . .. .. .. .
_ __ cu.m. riversand@
P_ _ /cu.m.................. .

d) Plaster _ _ sq.m. total


_ _ cu.m. total
_ _ L.M . Total
_ _ _ bags cement@
, _ _ / bag .............. ..... . .
_ _ _ cu.m. sand@

P_ _ / bag .......... .......... .


_ _ _ bags lime@
P_ _ / bag ........... ... .... .. .

.,
,
,
,

el Decorative Blocks _ _ sq.m.


- -pes . 20 )( .30@
, _ _ / pc. ....... ..............

,
,
p

,
,
,
,_____
,_____

,_____
,_____
_____

,.

' - -- - -

f) Pea Gravel Washout Finish

_ _ _

Total _ _ sq.m.
cans #5, #10 or #15
black pebbles @

_ __

P_ _/ can ....... , .. . . ..... .. ..


bags cement@
, _ _/ bag .......... . ..... . . .. .

_ __

cu.m. riversand@

- --

312

P_ _ __ _
, _ _ _ __

P_ _/cu.m. ...... ............

' -- - --

lineal meter 1/8" x 2" brass


strip@ P_ _ /l.m. . ... .. . .. . .

P_ _ ___.__

..

..

g) Synthetic Adobe Finish

_ _ _
_ __

Total Area. _ _ sq.m.


cans crushed adobe stones@
!'_ _l ean .. ........ ..... .. .. . .
cu .m. riversand@
P_ _ /cu.m ... .... .......... . .

,_____
,_____

h) Bricks Walling

Total Area _ _ sq.m.


- - - pes. 2'" X 4 X 8"" @
P_ _ /pc.
- - - pes. 2H )( 2" X 8" @
, _ _/ pc . .... ........... ... .. .

_ _ _

~-

- --

, _ _lpc . ... . .. .. ....... .. ... .


pes. 2" X 4"' X 8"' chipped

1'"x2x a @

or decorative @

, _ _lpc . .......... .......... .


i) Adobe Stone Walling
Total Area _ _ sq.m.
_ _ _ cu.m. dressed stone@
P_ _ / cu.m . ....... .... ... .. ..
_ _ _ cu .m. rough stone @
1'_ _ /cu.m . ..... .... ... ..... .
_ _ _ bags cement@
, _ _ /bag ........ .. .. ... .... ..
_ _ _ cu.m. sand@
P_ _/bag ............. ... .... .

j} Baguio Stones or other Walling Stones


Total Area _ _ sq. m.
,...__ _ cu.m . dressed stone~

P_ _

/ cu.m . ....... .. .. . : .... .


_ _ _ cu.m. rough stone@
P_ _/cu.m ... ............... .
_ __ bags cement@

P_ _ /bag ...... .......... ... . .


_ __

cu.m. riversand@
P_ _ /cu.m ... ......... .. ... ..

,_____
,_____

,_____

,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____

,_____
,_____

...

_____

,.
,.___....,....._

ESTIMATING GUIDE

On Hollow Blocks
Compute total sq.m. of Walling then divide by 13 pes. sq. m. you get total No. of
Hollow Blocks including breakages .
To get the bags of cement and cu.m.
Sand for MORTAR.
For or
x 8'" X16" CHB 3 cells
.003 cu.m. x 16 bags
No. bags cement

.003 cu.m. x 0.8 cu.m. sand


.003 cu.m. /hollow b&ock

= _ _. _ cu.m. sand

313

For a 4'" x 8" X 1.6.. CHB


.001 cu.m./ hollow block
.001 cu.m. x 16 bags
.001 cu.m. x 0.8 cu.m. sand

=_ _

bags cement
cu .m. sand

To get number of STEEL BAR reinforcement, measure the total runs in meter for horizontal
and vertical bars + by 6 .00 m. to get the number of pieces then multiply x factor of kg/m to
get the weight In kilos.

to

the number of vertical bars multiplied by 0.30


For G.I. Wire, multiply the hori:zontal bars
meters to get total length of G.l . Wire required, then convert into kilos.
For PLASTER ING: max imum (.015 m thick) one face
For a 6 .. x 8" x 16..
CHB
.0012 cu.m. / block
For 6"' x 8 .. 16..
CHB
.0012 cu .m./block
(all single Face)
Multiply .0012 x No. of Hollow Blocks = Total cu.m.
Multiply cu.m. x 16 bags for cement
Multiply cu.m. x 0.8 cu .m . for sand
For pea gravel (pebble washout)
Measure total L M of brass strip
divide by 3:00 to get No. pes . @ 3.00 m length
Get total area in sq.m. for pebble washout. Use one (l) can of pebble stones to one sq .m.
Area to be covered. Mix 1 bag cement to 4 bags pebble mixture.
For Synthetic Adobe

Mix 1 bag cement to one bag sand and two cans synthetic adobe .
For bricks, and t iles, get total area in sq . meters then divide by the area in sq.m. of one brick
or the total area in sq. feet divide by the area in sq. ft. of one brick to get the number of
pieces.

,_____

VI. WOODWORK
a) posts Yacal or Guijo
_ _ _ pes. of 6 .. x 6"' x 10'..()"
_ _ bd.ft.@
, _ _ / bd.ft. ..... ........ .... .
_,___ _ pes. of 4" x 4" x 10'-0"
_ _ bd .ft.@
, _ _ / bd.ft. ................. .

,_

,_

,_

,_ _

,_

,_ _

b) Girder Apitong

8" X 12' -0 6 @
. , _ _ / bd.ft. ..... .............
--pes. 3,. X 10"' X 12'-0" bcf .ft.@
,
bd.ft .. ............... :.

- - - pes, 3'"

c) Floor Joists Apitong

X 6" X 10'..(),. bd .ft. @


, _ _ / bd.ft. ........ ....... ... .
- - pes. 2" JC: 8" x 10'-0" bct.ft.@
, _ _ / bd.ft. .. ........ ........

- - pes. 2 "

d) Rooring-kiln dried tanguile

--pes. 1" X 4" X 12'-0" bd .ft.@


, _ _ / bd.ft. . . ....... ... . .... .

_ _ _ pes. 1" x 6" 12'..0" bd.ft.

, _l bd.ft. .. ... .......... ...

314

,_ _ _ _

,_ _ _ _

e) Base Board

- - - pes. 1" X 6" X 12'..(),. bd.ft.@


, _ _/ bd.ft..... .......... ....

, _ _ __

f) Studding Apitong

- - -

pes. 2" X 4" X 10'-0" bd .ft.@


, _ _/bd.ft.... ..... .... . .....

, _ _ __

g) Stairs: Tanguile Red


Stringers:
_ __

pes. 3" x 14" x 16'-0'" bd.ft. @

/bd.ft. .. .. ... .... .. . ....

, _ _ __

pes. 2'" x 12" 12'-0'" bd.ft.@


, _ _ / bd .ft....... .. ... ... ....

, _ _ __

Treads:

_ __

Risers :
- - - pes. 11/2"

X 8" X 12'-0"
bd.ft.@ , _ _ /bd.ft. .. .. ..

, _ _ __

Balusters:

- --

pes. 2" X 2" X 2'-Q" bd.ft.@


, _ _/bd.ft. ........ ... .......

, _ _ __

- - - pes. 3 X 5'" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@


, _ _ / bd.ft ......... ....... ".

, _ _ __

Handrails:

Newel Posts:

- - - p e s . 3'" X 3" X 3'-6"' bd.ft.@


, _ _ /bd.ft......... ... :......

, _ _ __

h) Balcony Yaeal or Guijo


(Joists)
____ pes. 3" x 6" x 8'-0" bd.ft.@

bd.ft. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. ..

, _ _ _ __

(Flooring)

- - - pes. 1 1/ 2" X 3"

X 12'0'"
bd .ft. @ , _ _ / bd .ft. .. .. ..

, _ _ __

(Baluster)
_ _ _ pes. 2'" x 2" x 12'-0" bd.ft.@

,_ _
(Railing)
_ __

/bd.ft. ............. .....

, _ _ _ __

pes. 3" x 6"' x 12'-0" bd.ft.@

, _ _/ bd.ft. .............. ... :

, _ _ __

i) Ceiling Joists Apitong Ro.


---pes. 2'" X 2" X 12'-0"' bd .ft.@

, _ _/bd.ft. ..... ........ .....

, _ _ __

- - - pes. 2"' X 2" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@


-

, _ _ /bd.ft...... ... ...... ....


- - pes. 2" X 3" X 12'~0" bd.ft.@
, _ _ /bd.ft. ........ ..........

j) Girt Apitong Ro.


- -- pes. 3'" X 8" X 14'..()'" bd.ft.@
, _ _ / bd.ft ..... " ......... ".
- - -pes. 3"' .x 6" X 14' -0 bd.ft.@
_ _ /bd .ft. ............ .... ..

, _ _ __
, _ _ __

,_....;.__

, _ _ __

315 ..

k) Rafter Exposed Pinewood

s..s

X 16'-0" bd.ft. ~
/bd.ft. ... .. .... ...... ....

pes. 2" X 8"


'

, _ _ __

I) Roof Truss Apitong ro.

Bottom chord

- - - p e s . 3"' X 6.. 12'..()" bd.ft. @


,_,bd.ft... .. ...... .. .... ..
Diagonal and vertical braces

, _ _ __

,_,bd.ft......... . . .. .,. '----

- - - pes. 2'"'

4'"

8' -0" bd.ft. @

Top Chord

- - - pes. 3 .. X 6" X 12'..()'" bd.ft. @


,_,bd.ft. .. .............. ;.
m) Purtins Apitong ro.
X 3"' X 14'-Q" bd.ft.@
, _ _/bd.ft . ..... "' ....... . ..
pes. 2'" X 3" Jt 11 -0" bd.ft. @
- - - , _ _/bd.ft... ......... .......

'----

- - - pes, 2"'

, _ _ __

~--- - - -

n) Door Jambs S4S Yacal on Concrete


Wall (Tanguile Apitong on Wood)
- - - pes. 2" X 6'" X 8'-0"' bd .ft.@

/ bd.ft. ....... ....... .. . .

- - - pes. 2"' X 6" X 10'-0'" bd.ft.@


, _ _ lbd.ft . ............... ;. .

, _ _ __

'~
----

. o) WindoW Jambs S4S Yacal on Concrete


(Tanguile, Apitong on Wood)
p) Cabinets and Shelves

--:--- pes. 11/ 2" X 2" X 10'-{)"


bd. ft.@ , _ _l bd.ft. .....

, _ _ __

- - - pes, 1"' X 12" X 12'-0"' bd.ft,


@P~/bd.ft ... .. t. .. ......

tt____

q) Wall Paneling ($2S) Pinewood

- - - pes. 1" :x $" X 10' -0'" bd.ft. @


,
/bd.ft. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. .. ..
- - - pes. t" a x 1o..o" bd .tt.@
, _ _ /bd.ft.. .................
- - - pes. 1"' X 10.. X 10'-0" bd.ft.
@,
bd.ft. ........ ... .. ..

'---, _ _ __
'----

r) Fascia Board Tanguile S2S


---pes. 11/2'* ~ 12"

X 14'-0"
bd.ft.@P_ _ /bd.ft........

P_ _ __

s) Sidings-Tanguile S2S

_ _ _ pes. 1" x6" x 12'-Q" v-cut


bel.ft . @ P_ _ /bd.ft. .....
---pes. 1"' x 6" x 12'-0" e-cut
bd.ft. @ , _ _lbd.ft. .. .. ..

' - - --

'----

ESTIMATING GUIDE
For str:ucturals like post, Girders, joists, and ~ I"A88sure the total length in plan but do
not stop on <:enter to center. Add aUowance for overtaps.

316

For flooring and sidings divide the total width in feet by the proposed thickness ~ one
inch. Suppostng- you will use a 4 inch flooring use 3 1/ 2 factor for safety on t he T & G joint.
For Fascia board. Measure the total length divide by 24 feet.
For jambs, measure the leng.:ns and widths with allowances.
For studdings,

measure and count all

verticals and horizontals {spacing @ 0.60)

For stringers, handrails and rafters. Measure the total lineal feet as it inctines and not as per

top new plan.

,_____

VII. ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES


1. TILEWORt<S

(,_ _ __

a) Vinyl Tiles either 118", 3/ 32"', '1/ 16"


- - - pes. 1/ 8" X 9" X 9" Vinyl Tile_
@,_ _ / pc. ..................
- -- ~ 1/ 8" X 12'" X 12' Vinyl
Tile@ P_ _ l pe. . ....... , ..

' - -- - -

P_ _ __

_ _ _ liter vinyl glue or rugby@


P_ _/liter .. . .. .............

'-

----

b) Narra Parquet or Woodtile


Total-sq.ft. area
_ _ _ sq.ft. Woodtile @
_ __

_ __
_ __

, _ _ /sq.ft . ....... -..... ... ..

, _ _ __

gallons woodtlle glue@


, _ _/sq .ft. .. . ....... .. .. ....
sq.ft. sandpaper@

, _ _ _ __

, _ _/ sq.ft . .. ... .. . .. .... .. ..

, _ __ _

gallons wax @
P_ _/gal.

.... 00... ..... ....

' -

----''--

' -

----

c) Glazed Tiles 1/4" thick


_ _ _ pes. 4 l / 4" x 41 / 4" white

- --

tiles@ P_ _ / pc .......... 00
pes. 41 /.4" X 4 1/4"' colored
tiles@ P_ __ l pc. .. .. . .. . .. .
pes. mouldings
P_ _/pc. .... ...

' - - - --

00 . . . . . . . . . 0 0 .

' --

- --

d) Unglazed Tiles .

_ _ _

_ _ _

pes. 4 1/ 4'" x 4 1/ 4"' white


Tiles@ P_ _ / pe... . ... .....
pes. 4 1/ 4" x 4 1/ 4" colored

P_

Tiles@P_ _

P_ _ __

Ipc~ ... ..... ...

_ __

e) Semivitrified Tites
_ _ _ pes. 4" x 8"' Colored Tiles@

p_
. __/ pc ...

oo . . ,

. ... . .

...... . .

pes. 6~" x 6" colored Tiles@


, _ _/ pc. 000 ---- " " " " "
_ _ pes. 12" x 12" colored Tlles@
, _ _/pc. .. ..... ....... ..... ..

'

- - - -

- -_

, _

, _ _ __

317

fl Marble Tiles

- - - pes. 1 X 4 X 8'" colored


marble@ P_ _ / pc. . . . .. . . .
- - - pes. 1" x 12" x 24" colored
marble@ P_ _/pc ...... ....
- -- pes. 1,. X 24* X 24" @
P_ _._ / pc. . .. . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . . .
- -- pes. 1 X 36 X 36"@
p_ _ / pc. ......... .. ..... .. . . .
g) Crazy Cut Marble _ _ sq.m. total
_ __ cu.m. crazy cut@
P_ _ /cu.m.. ..... .......... ..
_ _ _ Cans granulithic stones @
, _ _ / cans .. .. ..............
- - - b8gs white cement @

P_ _

/bag

.. ................

' - -- - -

P_ __ _ _
' - -- - ' - -- - -

P_ _ __ _
' -

--

P--,- - -

h) Vigan Bricktiles

pes . 1" )( 12" X 12"@


, _ _ /pc. . . . . .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. .

- - - pes . 1 1/.2" X 16" X 16


, _ _ / pc . .. . ...... ..

'-"---- --

, _ _ __

il Cement Tiles
_ __ pes. 1"' x 8" x 8" plain color @

P_ _
- --

pes. 1

/pc........ ...... ........


a X 8" decorative@

' -- -- -

, __ tpc. :..............

j.......

, _

ESTIMATING GUIDE
Get tt-e total area of in sq.m. divide by the size of material in metric size:
If in sq.ft. total area, divldeby feet area of one material.
2. FENESTRATION

(P_ _ __

a) Windows
_ __

sq.m . steel window


casement@ P_ _ /sq.m.
- -sq.m. steel window awnings@
, _ _/sq.m... ... ... ... .. . .. ..
- - - sq.m. window grilles@
P_ _ /sq.m ...... ..... . .. .. .. .
- - - sq .m. aluminum window@
p_ _ / sq.m............... ... .
- - - sq.m. jalousie window@
P_ _ /sq.m. .. ............ ....
(sq.ft. is sometimes used)

' -- -- ' - -- - ' - -- - ' - -- - p_ __ __

b) Glass
_ __

sq .m. 1 + 8"' glass@


p_ _ / sq.m. ..................
- -- sq.m. 3/16"' gJass@
p_
. _/sq.m.. ......... ... . .. ..
- -sq.m. 7/32"' glass@
. p_ _/sq.m ... .. :.............
- - - kilo glass putty@
, _ _ / kilo ..... :........ .......

318

' - --

--

' - --

--

'-

--

' - -- --

c) Doors
- - - pes..70 x 2.10 Flush door
for toilet 1 side W .P. @
, _ _/pc. ..... ................
- - - pes .. 00 x 2.10 Flush door for
bedroom@ P_ _ / pc. .... .
- - - pes .. 90 X 2.10 Flush door
kitchen, balcony, guest @

' --

--

' - -- - -

, _ _/ pc. .....................
- - - pes..90 X 2.10 panel door .

'-----

narra@ , _ _ /pc. .. . . . . .. ..
- - - sq.m. aluminum Sliding
Glass door@ tt_ _ /sq.m.
- -sq.m. W.t. Steel Gate@
p_ _ /sq.m...................

'----' - - -- '-----

d) Screen Door and Windows

_ __

sq.m. screen with aluminum


frame@ , _ _ /sq.m. ... .. .

3. Shelves, Closets and Cabinets

' -- -- -

(,_ _ _ __

- - - pes. 1/2" X 4'. X 8' Plywood @

,_ _
- --

/pc. . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .....

' - -- - -

pes. 3/4'" x 4'" X 8' Plywood@

tt_ _ lpc. .... .. . .......... ....

'-----

- - - sq.ft. persiana or louver


door@ P_ _ / sq.ft..... ... .
- - - sq.ft. panel cabinet doors@

"-----

, _ _/sq.ft. .... :.............

, _ _ _ __

pes. 1/4n x 4~ x 8' ordinary


plywood@ P_ _ / pc . .. . . .
pes. 1/4" x 4' x 8' narra or

'-----

dao decorative plywood@


P
/pc. . . .. . .. ..... . . ... ....
- - - pes. 1/4'" x 4' x 8' Lawanit@

' - - -- -

4. Partitions
_ __
-

,_ _

lpc. . . .. . . ... ...... .. ... .

_ _ _ pes. 1/2" x 4' x 8' particle


bOard @ fl_ _/ pG. . .. . . . . . .

, _ _ __

' - -- -

5. Decorative Wall
_ _ _ sq.m. wall paper vinyl@
, _ _/sq.m.. ....... .... .. . . . .
- -packs walt paper glue@
P
. pack . . .. .. . . . . ... . .. ..

'-

----

"- -- - -

6. Wood Grilles

_ _ _ sq.m. wood grille@


, _ _ /sq.m. ..... ....... ......

'----319

7. Ceilings Interior
- - - pes. 1/4'" X 4' X 8' plywood @
,
fpc. .. ............ .. .... .
_ _ _ pes. 1' x 12" ceiling

,._ _ __

Tile@P_ _ /Pc,.

, _____

...........

8. Ceiling Eaves Exterior


_ _ _ pes. 1/4" x 4' x 8'-0" Marine
or waterproof Plywood @

, _ _/pc. . . .. ...... ... .. . . .. ..


- - - p e s . 1/4.. X 4' X 8'-0"'
temPEtf8d or W.P. Lawanit@
, _ _/pc. .....................

,._ _ __

, _ _ __

9. Fireplace

300 pes. @ 2" x 4' x 8' Firebricks


, _ _/pc......................
,._ _ __
_ _ _ bags cement@
, _ _/bag ..................
'---- - - cu.m. Sand@
P__~_/cu.m...................

""

_ _ _ pes. 6'" CHB@


, _ _ /pc ................,.....
_ _ _ pes. 12 mm +bars@
, _ _/pc......................

p._ _ _ __

,._ _ _ __
,._ _ __

VIII. HAROWARES . . . . . ... .. ... . . . .... ...... .. . .. .......... ............... ...... .. . .

A. ROUGH
_ _ _ kegs4" C.W. Nail@
, _ _/keg.....................
_ _ _ kegs 3'" C.W. Nail@
, _ _ /keg.....................
_ _ _ kegs 2" C.W. Nail@
, _ _ /keg.....................
_ _ _ kegs 1" finishing Nail@

, _____

, _ _/keg.....................

,._ _ __

_ _ _ kilos concrete nails@


, _ _ /kilo.....................
- - - rolls G. I. Wire #16@
, _ _/roll .. ............... ....

, _ _ __

,._ _ __

'----,._ _ _ __

_ _ _ pes. 5/8" x 7" bolts with


nuts and screWs @

, _ _ lpc. .....................
- - - pes. 1/2" x 24'" tension bar
for truss@
, _ _ /pc.......................
- - - p e s , 1/4H X 2" X 24,. pOst
strap with bolts C.P.@
, _ _ /pc. . .. . .. .. ..... .. . .. .. .

(Steel bars, see concreting

world

320

'---, ______

'----

p._ _ __

B. FINISHING

1. Hinges
_ __

pes. 4"' x 4"' Joose pin 'hinges@


, _ _ f pc . . ,...................
- -- pes. 3 X 3 loose pin hinges@
p_ _ /pc. . . . .. ... . .. . . . . .. .. ..
- - - pes. 2 x 2" closet hinges@
, _ _ /pc. .. ............ .......
- - - pes. 1"' x t closet hinges@

, _ _/pc. .. .. .. ...... . ... .....


cps. washangton hinges @
, _ _l pc. .. ... ...........~.. ..
_ _ _ 1 in. ft. piano hinges @
, _ _ /.pc. ........... ..........

,._ _ __

' - - -- ' - - --

, _ _ __

_ __

,._ _ __
' - - - --

2. Locksets
_ _ _ pes. toilet Jockset buttom
.. press without key@
, _ _/pc..... .......... ..... ..
_ __

_ _ _

bedroom lockset buttom


lockset button press with key@

, _ _/ pc, .................... .
pes, main door ~OGksets with
special handle and key @
P_ _ / pc . .................... .

- -- Pes: night latch @

, _ _ /pc .................... ..

3. Closet and Cabinets

_ __
_ __

pes. pullers@
, _ _lpc .....................
pes. drawer knobs @
, _ _l pc .....................

4. Automatic Door Closers


_ _ _ pes. door closers @
, _ _/ pc. .. . .. ...... .. .. ......
5. Sliding

,
,
,
,
,
,

...........

, _ __ _

Door Track

6.

_ _ _ pes. door track@>


, _ _/pc. .. .. . .. . . .. ... .. .... .
_ __ pes. friction catches @

7.

_ __

, _ _/pc. .................... .
pes. door stoppers@
,
pc. .. : ................. .

' - - --

'---- -

,_____

IX. ROOFING .............. ,.. .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. .. .

P_ _ __

A. Corrugated G.t. Sheet G.A. 26


- --

pes. 32 X 6'..()"@
, _ _fpc. .. . .. ..... .. .........

- - pes. 32 X 7'..()" @
, _ _/pc. ........ .. ......... .....
- - - pes. 32'" X 8'..()"''@
,
pc.

, _ _ __

- -- pes, :Jr X 12'-0"'@


, _ _ / pc. .....................

, _ _ __ _
, _ __ __

,._ _ _ _

321

B. Plain Galvanized Iron Straps GA. 26

_ _ _ pes. as x a-o @
, _ _ / pc. .... :.................

,
For 2" x 3"' cut
into 1"

xs

C. G.l. Roof Flashing$, ridge


rolls and Valleys
__.__ _ pes. 36" X 8'-0'"@

, _ _ /pc. .. ..... .. ..... .... . ..

, _ _ __

0. G.l. Gutter
_ _ _ pes. 8' -0" length @
P_ _
E.

G .l ~

lpc. .. ... ................

downspout

pes. 2" X 4" X 8' -0" @

, _ _ lpc. .....................

, _ _ _ __

kilos rivets@

,_____

F. G.l. Rivets
_ _ _

P_ _ _ __

, _ _ / kil~

G. G.l. Washer
_ _ _ kilos washer@

P_ _ /kilo .. .. ... .. . .... .......

P_ __ _ _

H. Lead Washer
_ _ _

kilo lead washer@

P_ _

/ kilo .....................

I. _ _ _ kilos roofing nail @


P_

/kilo ............... .... ..

J. Nicolite Bar
_ _ _ pes. nicolite lead@
, _ _l pc. ....... ...... . .. .....

' - --

--

,_____
' - -- - -

K. Muriatic Acid
_ _ _

bottles@

P_ _

/ bot. .....................

' - - -- -

L. Copper rivet for copper


rivets @ P
box
- - - box copper rivets@
P_ _/box . .. ...... . .. . ..... .. .

' -- - - ' ---'----

ESnMATING GUIDE

Guide the sloped Section of the roofing, with a 0.30 (12.) overlap. Count the number of
pieces of roofing using corresponding lengths 1ess 12~. If 8'-()" length is used, effective
length is 7' .()". To get the number of pes. sidewise, divide the total width in inches by V"
(effective width) using a 32" corrugated sheet.

Iron Straps- one 36.. x 8'-0" plain G.l. can produce 380 pes. of 1" x 9'" strap for 2" x 3"' purlin and 340 pes. of 1"

x 10" for a 2"' x 4 .. purlin.

Roofing Nail - 102 pcs./k.g


Rivets
- 180 pcs/kil~gram

a . 6'-0" corrugated roofing wiU use 6 rivet/sheet


8'-0 corrugated roofing wit! use 9 rivets/sheet
12'
corrugated roofing will use 12 rivets/sheet

-o

322

Nicolite bar-count the number of joints to be-soldered 1 joint will use 1/ 4 of a bar.

Muriatic acid-use 10 cc per nicolite bar.


B. Tegula Cement Tile Roof
_ __ pes. 16 1/ 2 ..

x 13.. @

, _ _lpc. . . ... . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . .

- - -

' - - -- -

pes. 10 1/2" x 15 3/4* ridge


roll @ P_ _ /pc. .. .. .... . .. .

' - - - --

C. Spanish Tile Roof

pes. 31 em x 31 em @
, _ _/ pc. ..... .... .. ..... .... .
- - - pes. top ridge 29 x 27' em @
, _ _ /pc. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ....

' - -- - -

, _ _ __ _

D. Wood Shingles

- pes. - 3/8 .. X 3,. X 18.. @


, _ _/pc. .....................

, _ _ __

_ _ _ sq.m. asphalt felt paper@

P_ _/sq.m. ..... .. . .. ... .. .. .

' - - - --

- --kilos 11/4" G.l. Nail@

P_ _ / kilo .. .. . . . . .. . . . . .......
E. Long Span Colored Roof
_ _ _ pes. 32" x any length @
P_ _/ L.M. ............. .....
_ _ _ kilos rivets@

P_ _/kilo ........ .... ... :. ....


kilos washers@
, _ _ /tube .. ..... .... .. .... .
- - - sealant@
P_ _/tube .............. ....
- - - L.M . gutter@
P_ _/ L.M . ..................
_ __ L.M. ridge roll@
fi_ _/ LM ....... .... .. ........

ft_ __ __

P_ _ __

' - - --

- --

' - -- - ' - -- --

P_ __ _
P_ _ __

ESTIMATING GUIDE
Tegula: 11 tiles/Sq.m. (5 kilos/pc.)
Spanish Ti/e-16 tiles/sq.m. (2.75 kg./sheet}
Long Span - effective width is 2B 1/2'"
length up to 60 feet

Wood Shingle -.approx. 50 pes. of 3x 18. / sq.m.


comes from 3" to 14" width
and 16" and 18.. length

Use 6 .. exposure.
X. SPECIAL TREATMENTS . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. ..

_ __
- --

liter soil poisoning liquid @


P_ _/liter . . .. .... .. .. .. . .. .
liters wood preservative @
,
-Itt. . . . ... .. .. . ..........

P_ _ __

' - -- --

, _ _ __

323

~.

_ _ _ liters silicone clear for


covering of brick wat
and/or synthetic watt @
P_ _ /liter ................ ..
_ __ rolls cemvattlene waterproofing asphalt sheets @

, _ _ !roll ................. ,.. .


or total sq.m. @
p_ _/ sq.m .................. .
_ __ sq.m. polyethylene sheets
for damprooflng stab on fitl
and basement wall touching
the soil@
P_ /sq.m . ....... .......... .
_ _ _ liters fire retardant@
, _ _/ gal. ................. .
- -liters coal tar@
P_ _lliter .... ....... ..... . .

'

'--~--

,__ __
,____
__,_

,_____
,_____
,_____

,_____

XI. PLUMBING
1. FIXTURES

a) Water Closets
1. Master elongated W.C. Colored with

Tank@P_/pc. .....................
2 pes. children's W.C. colored@
, _ _/pes................. . ..... ........
1 pc. guest w.c. colored @
, _ _ /pc .. .. .... .. .... .. . . .. ... .. .. . ..
1 pc. maid's w .c. white@
,
/pc. ........... .... ........ ...... .
b)

Lavatories

, _ __ _
, _ _ _ __

, _ _ _ __

1 - lavatory for maid's @


.
P
/ unit ............................. .

,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____

1 - Bathtub for masters@


, _ _ /unit . . ..... .. .... .. . .... .. .. .. . .. .

' - --

1 - lavatory for master's @


p_ _/unit .... ...... ....... ... ......... .
1 - lavatori for boy's @
P....---.:-/unit ..... .... ................... ..
1 - lavatory for girl's @

P
/unit ............................ ..
1 - lavatory for guest @
P_ _ /unit ............ : .............. .. .

c)

' - -- -

--

d) Kitchen sink

324

1 - stainless k.s. double bowl @


, _ _/ unit .. . .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .

'-----

1 - 16 x 24'" enamel type k.s. @


P___/unit .............. ...... ..........

'-----

e. Shower Heads &f'!d Values


1 - 3 way diverter value and U.S.
multi-adjuster shower head for
master's@ ft_ _
/unit ........ .......
3 - hot and cold shower valve and
head for children's guest @
P_ _ /unit .............. .. ..............
1 - single .cold shower valve and
head @p_ _ /unit ..................

' - - -- -

p
'-

---

2. G.l. PIPES AND FITTINGS


pes. 2"

+
+

x 6.00 m sch. 40@


P_ _ /pc . .................... .
_ _ _ pes. 1" x 6.00 m sch . 40@

_ __

p_ _ / pc ..................... .
pes. 3/4" x 6.00 m sch. 40

_ __

@P_ _ /pc ........... ....... .


pes. 1/2" x 6.00 m sch. 40

+
+

@ f' _ _ /pc .. ................. .


_ _ _ pes. coupling 2" +
p_ _ / pc ... .................. .
_ __ pes. coupling 1"

+
+
+

p_ _/pc. . : .................. .
_ __ pes. coupling 3/4"
P_ _ /pc . ... .... .... :........ .
_ _ _ pes. coupling 1/2"
, _ _/pc .................... ..

+
+ .

_ _ _ pes. Tee 2..


P_ _ / pc ... ........... ...... ..
_ _ _ pes. Tee 1"
P_ _/pc.... , ........ ........ .
_ _ _ pes. Tee 3/4"@
p_ _ /pc ... ......... .......... .
_ _ _ Tee 1/2"
, _ _/ pe ..................... .

- - - pes. elbow r
p_ _ /pc . .............. ..... ..
_ _ _ pes. elbow 1,.

, _ _fpc . ............. .... :~ ..


_ _ _ pes. elbow 3/4*

'

pc . ................. ... .

- - pes. elbow 1/2"


P_ _/pc . ; .................. ..
_ __ pes. street elbow 2"
p_ _ /pc..................... .
_ _ _ pes. street elbow 1"'+@
p_ _ /pc . .. ........ :......... .

_ _ _ pes. street elbow 3/4~


p_ _ / pc............. ... ..... ..
_ _ _ pes. street elbow 112

, _ _ /pe.,............. ....... ..
_ _ _ pes. bushing 2,; +
' _ _fpc ..........................

,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,

,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
325

+@
_ _ _ pes. bushing 3/4" t@

_ _ _ pes. bushing 1

, _ _ lpc. ............ ....... ..

, _ _ __ _

, _ _ /pc. .....................
- - - pes. bushing 1/2"
p_ _ /pc. .. ......... ... .......

' - -- - -

NIPPLES - 2", 3", 4", 5", 6",


_ _ _ pes. short nipple 2" x 3", @.
p_ _ / pc. . . ...... .. .. .. ... .. ..
- - - pes. short nipple 1" x 3", @
-

+
+
p_ _ /pc. . .... .. .. .. .. ........
- - pes. short nipple 3/4 +x 3",
@ p_ _ /pc. .. . .. . . . ... .. .. .. .
- - pes. short nipple 1/2" +x 3",

@ , _ _ l pc. .... ..... .. .. . ....


_ _ _ union patented 2" @

/pc. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .

' - -- --

' - -- -'----'---, _ __ _

p_ __ __

- - - union patended 1"@


-

. P_ _ /pc. ........... :... ......


union patented 3/4"
, _ _/ pc. .. ............ .. .....
pes. union patented 1/2"
P_ _/ pc. ........ ..... ........

' - - -- -

' - -- - ' - -- - -

rolls teflon tape @


P_ _ /roll ............. .. .... ..
or _ _ oz. white lead@

, _ _!oz. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .

, _ __ _ _

3. VALVES
_ _ _ stop cock 1/2" USP @

p_ _

/pc. ........... .. .. . .. .. .

' - -- --

- - - check valve swing type 1/2"@

p_ _

/pc. ................. .. ..

' - -- --

- - - gate valve 1" USP@

p_ _ / pc ................. ... . :

'-----

- - - gate vavle 3/4" USP @

p_ _ /pc. ............ :.........

' - -- - -

4. SOIL PIPES AND FITTINGS (05. and .10 x 1.5 em)


_ _ _ pes. 4" x 5'-0" Double Hub
Pipe@ P_ _ /pc .. , .........
_ _ _ pes. 4" x 5'-0" Double Hub
Pipe@ P_ _/ pe ........ ..
_ _ _ pes. 2" x 5'-0" D.H. Pipe@

P_ _ lpc............... .... .. .
_ _ _ pes. 4"' x 4" wye@

P_ _ /pc .................... ..
_ _ _ pes. 2" x 2" wye@
p_ _ / pc . .. .... ....... .... .. ..
_ _ _ pes. 4 x 4" Sanitary Fee @

, _ _/pc: .............. ....... .


_ _ _ pes. 4"' x 2'" Sanitary Fee @

,_ _

/pc..................... .

_ _ _ pes. 1/4bend

_326

,
,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____
,_____
/

, _ _ l pc.... ... ..... ... .. .....


pes. 1/ 4 bend @
, _ _ /pc. .................. ...
- -pes. 1/8 bend@
P_ _ /pc. .. . .. .. ... .. . . . .. .. . .
- - - pes. 1/ 16 bend @

, _ _ _ __

_ __

, _ _ / pc. .... ...... ..... ......


- --

pes . 1/ 16 bend @ .

_ __

kilos Oakum@
P_ _ /kilo... ... ... ...... ......
kilos pig lead@
, _ _ / kilo .. ... .... .. . ..... ... .
or _ _ liters A and 8
epoxy adh,"$ive pipe caulking@
, _ _! lit. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .

P_ _ / pc. ..... ...... ... .. .... .


_ __

' -- - - ' - ----

' - -- - ' -- ---'


P_ _ __ _
P_ _ __ _

, _ _ __ _

5. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL OF PVC


Plastic Vinyl Pipes
(.05 and . 10 x 3.00 m)

pes. 4H x 10' ~" pvc. pipe @


, _ _ /pc ...... ... . .. .....
- -pes. 2" x 10'"0" pvc pipe @
, _ _ /pe. .. ..... .. ......... ...
- - - p e s . 1/ 4 bend pvc 4" @
, _ _ / pe. . . . . . ..... ... ..... ...
_ __ pes. 1/ 4 bend pvc 2" @
P_ _ / pc. ....... ........... ...
- - - pes. 1/8 bend pvc 4'' @
P_ _ /pc.-.... . .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . .
- - - pes. 1/8 bend pvc 2" @
, _ _ / pc. .... . . . . . . . .... .. . . ..
- -- peS. 1/ 16 bend pvc 4"@
, _ _ f pc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ..
- -pes. 1/16 bend pvc 2" @
,._ _ /pc. .... .. ........ .......
- -pes. 4" x 4" wye pvc@
,._ _ /pc. .. ... .. .... .. .. ... ....
_ __

- - - pes. 4"
,_ _
_ __ pes. 2"
,_ _

x 2" wye pvc @


l pe. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. ... .. ..
x 2" wye pvc @
/pc ... ........ ... :. ..... .

' -' --

- --

,_ _ _ _

' -- - - -

' -- - - ' - -- - ' - ---' - ----

' - - --, _ _ _ __

' -- - - -

- - - pes. pvc elbow 4" @

P_ _
- --

/pc. .. . . . .... . . . .. ... ....

' -- - - -

pes . pvc elbow 2" @

, _ _ / pe. . . .. .... .. .. .. . .. .. ..
_ _ _ pes. pvc sanitary Tee 4"@

, _ _ __ _

, _ _ / pc. .................... .

' - - -- -

- - - pes. Sanitary Tee 2"@


, _ _ /pc ........... : ..... .. . ..

'-

---

- - - pes. P-Trap 2"@

, _ _ fpc . .. ...... .. .. ..... . .. .

' - - ---

327

<: ,"":.(" .. .. .

_ __

_ __

pes. pvc plug 4"'@


P_ _ / pc. . ............... .....
pes. pvc plug 2"@

P_ _ lpc. ........... .... .. ... .


_ _ ....;\....; liters solvent cement sealant @
P_ _ lliter .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. .

,_._ _ __

' - - -- ' - -- - -

6 . OTHER ITEMS

1 pc. water meter@


p_ _/pc. ................. ...... ..........
1 unit 30 gallons water heater @
, _ _ /pc .... ..... ................. .. .... ..
1 unit 1,000 gal. G. I. #16 water
tank @ P_ _ / tank ............ ... , . .. ..
1 unit urinal @
P_ _ /item .... ............................ .
- - - units bidet@

P_ _ lunit ............ ......


_ _ _

' - -- -' --

' - -' --

---

P_ _ _ __

pes. Toilet paper holder @

, _ _ /pc. .. .. .... .... .... .... .

, _ _ __

_ _ _ pes. soap holder@

p_ _ /pc. .............. .......


- --

' - - -- -

pes. curtain rods @

, _ _/pc................... .. ..

, -

--

- - - pes. towel rack@

, _ _ /pc. ................. ....


-

' -- - - -

- - pes. medicine cabinet@

, _ _ / pc. ... .. .......... ... ...


_ _ _ pes. toothbrush holder &
Tumbler@ , _ _ /pc. . ....

, _ __ _
P

7. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE


-

- - unit septic tank hollow

blocks steelbars, cement,


sand gravel formworks,

etc .................... .'........ ..


- - - pes. 0.60 x 1.00 m
concrete pipe @
, _ _ / pc . ....... .. .. .. ... .. . ..
- -pes. 0.45 x 1.00 m
concrete pipe @
, _ _ /pc. .......... ...... .. .. .
- -pcs.0.30+ x 1.00m
concrete pipe @
, _ _ /pc. ................. ....
_ _ _ pes. 0.20 x 1.00 m

' - - -- ' - -- - -

' - -- , _ __ _

cement pipe @

, _ _ /pc .. ... ......... .....:.


_ _ pcs.0.1S+x 1.00m

,_ _ _ _ _

cement pipe@

328

, _ _/pc. .. .. .. .... . .. .. .. ....


_ _ pcs . 0.10+x1.00m@
, _ _ /pc . .. ;........ .... .. ....

,_ _ _ _
, _ __ _

......................................................... ................ .

XII. ELECTRICAL

,._____

A . FIXTURES
_ _ _ pes. chandelier @
ft_ _
- - - pes. pintights @
P_ _
_ _ _ pes. ceiling lights @ P_ _

' - -- - P_ __ _ _
p._ __ _ _

_ _ _ pes. light switch single gang@

, _ _/pc. .... .. ..... .. ........


_ _ _ pes. -convenience outlets@
, _ _ /pc. .. .. ...... .. .........
- - pes. weatherproof conv.
outlets @ P_ _ / pc.........
- - - pes . twa gang light switch @

P_ _ / pc. .....................
-

- -

- - -

, _ _ __
' - - - --

' - - - -' - -- - -

pes. three gang light switch @

,_
. _ _ /pc. .. ................ ...

' - - -- -

pes. three-way light switch @


p_ _/pc ..... ,.. ........... ...
pes. range outlet 3 prongs@

' - - -- -

, _ _ /pc.. .... ....... ..........

, _ _ __

B. RIGID CONDUIT PIPES & FITTINGS


_ _ _

+x 10'0" conduit
pes. 3/4" +x 10' -0 " conduit

~ - 1/2"

pipe@ P_ _ / pc . .. ... .. .. .. .

' - - -- -

pipe@P_ _ / pc . ... .........


- - - pes. locknut 1/2"@
p_ _/pc. ....... ... .... .. .....
- - pes. 1/2" 0 coupling@
p_ _ /pc. ......... ...........
_ _ _ pes. 1/2N coupling @
'f_ _ / pc. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
_ __ pes. 1" x 10'-0 " conduit
pipe@ P_ _ /pc. .. .. ...... ..
- - pes. 3/ 4" +coupling@
p_ _ /pc. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
- - pes. 1" +coupling@
, _ _ /pc. ......... . .... . . .. . ..
- - pes. 1/2" Locknut@

' - - -- -

- -

, _ _ /pc.. ....................
_ _ _ pes. 3/4" Locknut @
p_ _/ pc. ... .. .. .. ..... .. .. . ..
_ _ _ pes. 1 Locknut @
-

P_.lpc. ..... .. .... ........ ..


pes. 1/2" bushing @

p_ _/pc. .. ...... .. ... ... .. .. .


- --pes. 3/4" bushing@

p_ _ /pc. ........ .. ...........


- - - pes. 1" bushing@
p_ _/pc. .. ..... ... ...... .. .. .

' - - - --

p._ __ _ _

, _ __ __
' - - -- -

'---' - -- - -

, _ __ _
p._ _ __ _

' - - -' -- --

' - - - -' - - --

C. WIRING- Stranded

_ _ _

rolls No. 14' T.W. Wire@


p_
_ / roll .. ... ... .. .. .. ...... .

P_ _ _ __

329

_ _ _ rolls No.' 12 T.W. Wire@

'- _ /roll ..... .-- . ... .. ..


- - - rolls No. 10 T.W. Wire@
, _ _ /roll.......... ........ .....
- --rolls No.8 T.W. Wire@
, _ _ /roll ........... ~.. .... ...
- -rolls No.6 T.W. Wire@>
P_ _ /rot1 ... .. . .. ... ... .. ... ..
- - - rolls plastic tape M2@
P_ _ /roll .. ... .. ..... .. .. .. .. .
- - - rolls rubber tape M2@

' - -- - ' -- --

' - - - -'----' - --

--

, _ _ /roll...... ........ .......

' -- - -

pes. 4" x 6" x 6" with cover


@P_ _ /pc. .................
- - pes. 4" x
x 10" with cover

'----

@ P_ _ lpc. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .

'--~-

D. PULL BOXES
~--

E. JUNCTION BOXES
_ _ _ pes. 2" x 4" x 4" with 1/2"
knockout @ P_ _ /pc. . .. .
_ _ _.. pes. 2" x 4 .. x 4" with 3/4"
k.o.@P_ _ /pe...... .. .....

- - - pc. 2" x 4" x 4" with 1" k.o.@


, _ _ / pc. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

'--~--

' --

- --

, _ _ _ __

F. UTILITY BOX

_ _ _ pes. 2" x 2" x 4" with 1/ 2"


k.o.@ fl_

/pc. .... .. .. .. .

' - --

G. OTHERS
_ _ _ pes. service entrance cap

2 1/2@ P_ _ l pc. .. .. ..... .


-

' --

- - pes. secondary rack 3 poles


with 3 spools @

P_ _ tpc .... ......... .. .. ... :.

' -- - - -

H . . CIRCUIT BREAKER
Example:

70 at main 3 poles with panel board

6 branches-2 at 15- AT -2 p .
2 at 20 - AT -2 p
1 at 20 - AT -2 p
1 at 40- AT -2 p

or alternative Fuse Cutouts


J. Substitute Alternative PVC electric pipes

XIII. PAINTING ...... .......... .......... .. ... ....... ..................................


_ _ _ pes. sandpaper@

P_ _
-

330

/pc. .. ... .. ... . .. .. .. ... .

- - pes. sandpaper@
, _ _ /pe.. .., ... :.. ..... ... . .

' -- - -'-----

5'----- -

_ _ _ liters red lead @


, _ _ /lit............ ...... ....
_ _ _ liters neutralizer@
, _ _/lit. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
_ _ _ kilos concrete putty fillers @
, _ _ / kg . ....... .. .. ..........
_ _ _ kilos wood paste filler@
,
lit. .. .. .. .. .......... ...
_ _ _ liters sanding sealers @
, _ _ / lit. .. . . . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .
_ _ _ liters lacquer thinner
_ _ _ liters turpentine
_ _ _ liters spar varnish
_ _ _ small cans tinting colors@
, _ _ lean................ .....
- - - liters roofing paint
liters exterior wood paint @
, _ _ /lit. .. ... .. .
_ _ _ liters .exterior concrete paint @
P_ _/ltr. ................. .. ..
_ _ _ liters steel window paint @
P_ _ /ltr. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
- - - liters interior concrete paint @
p_._/ltr. .....................
- - - liters textured paint @
P_ _/ltr. ..... .. ..... .. ... ....

, _ _ __ _
, _ __ _ _
, _ __ __
, _ _ _ __
' - - - - -

'-

---

, _ _ __ _

P_ _ __ _
' - - -- ' - --

--

' - - -- -

ESTIMATtNG GUIDE
Solve area in sq . meter to be painted
It is safe to use 25 to 30 sq. m. coverage per 4 liters or 1 gallon to a 250 to 300 sq. ft.

area.
For textured paint-from 5 to 12 sq.
to 20 sq. m. coverage per 4 liters.

m. coverage per 41iters for sealers, putty,etc. -from 10

XIV. PERMITS AND LICENCES


a. Zoning . . .. .. .. . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . . . . . .

' - - --

b . Fire departments@ P1.00/P1 ,000 cos . . .. ..

P_ _ __ _

c. Building Officials . .. .. . .... .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .

P_ _ __ _

Electrical@ P1.00/per outlet .. .. .... .. .... .

' - --

Plumbing @ P3.00/ per fixture . . .. . . . . . . . .

' - - --

architectural@ P3.00/sq.m. .. ........ ..


mechanical@ P30.00/ Ton A. C. .. .. ..

' - - - -P_ _ __ _

elevator@ 3,500 .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ..

p__ _ _ __

excavation@ 1.00/ cu.m . .... ...... .. ...

P_ _ __ _

Fencing@ 1.00/ 1 in. meter ...... ..... .

' - - -- -

331

. .-.. .,. -.
. ~.::-.- ~::,:

'\ '

..

SUMMARY
I.

MOBILIZATION ........................ ...................................... .

II.

EARTHWORKS .......... ............. ......... .... .... .... ......... .......... .

Ill. CONCRETE WORKS ....................................................... ..


IV~

FORMWORKS .. ..... ... ...... .. ..... ... ...... ........ ... ...... . ... .... ..... .

tV.

MASONRY WORKS ............................... .. '

VI.

WOOOWORKS ................... .. .................... ......................


. .

VII.

ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES ........ ..... .... ........ ......... ... ..... .. .

VIII.

HAROWARES ............................................ .... : .... .. ....... .

IX.

ROOFING .... .... ... ..... .... ... .. ... .... ..... ... ...... .. ..... ... ...... .. ... ..

X.

SPECIAL TREATMENTS .... ~............................. :... ............. .

XI.

PLUMBING

XII.

ELECTRICAL .... ........ ........ ..... ... ....... ....... .. ....... ..... : .... .... .

XIII.

PAINTING ............................. :....................................... .

XIV.

PERMITS AND LICENSES

.. ..... ... .. ....................... .............................. .

MATERI.~LS

XV.

TOTAL .. .... ..... ...... ........................... .

PLUS 5% CONTINGENCIES ..... .. ... .. . .. .. ... ... ........ .... ... .. : . .'..
PLUS

LABOR Approx. 40% ...... : ................ .......


SUB-TOTAL ...... ;.......................
PLUS Approx. ;2% PROFIT .. .. . ... . .. .. . .. .. . ..

,.____
,.____

,___ _
,'~--____
,____
,____

, ____

,_ _ _ _

,._ _ _ _

,___ _
,.___ _
,___ _
,____

,____
,____
'== = =
P_ __ _

'== = =

SUB-TOTAL ........ ....... .. .............

P_ _ _ _

PLUS3% CONTRACTORS TAX .......... .... .

P_ _ _ _

TOTAL APPROX. COST .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . ..

332

'

'== = =

OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS

333

SUBJECT

SPECIFICATION

OWNER

MR. and MRS. JOHNNY BALANGCOD

ADDRESS

NO. 69 ClAMOR STREET


SUYAT GARDENS, BAGUIO CITY

PROJECT

TWO-STOREY RESIDENCE

LOCATION

NO. 2 ASSUMPTION ROAD


BAGUIO CITY

ARCHITECT

GEORGES. SALVAN

LICENSE NO.

1939

PTA
ADDRESS

334

NO. 30 MASINI STREET


BAGUIO CITY

OUTLINE. SPECIFICATIONS
I. SITE WORK
A. WORK INCLUDED
1. Staking out of building, establishment of lines, grades and benchmarks.
2. All excavation work including all neceSsary shoring bracing, and drainage of storm
water from site.
3. All backfilling, filling and grading, removal of excess material from site.
4. Protection of property, work and structures, workmen, and other people from damage and injury.

B. LINES, GRADES AND BENCHMARKS


1. Stake out accurately the lines of the building and of the other structures included in
the contract, and establish grades therefore, after which secure approval by Architect before any excavation work is commenced.
2. Erect basic batter boards and basic ref_!!rence marks, at such places where they will
not be disturbed during the construction of the foundations.

C. EXCAVATION
1. Structural Excavations- Excavations shall be to the depths indicated bearing
values. Excavations for footings and foundations carried below required depths shall
be filled with concrete, and bottom of such shall be level. All structural excavations
shall extend a sufficient distance from the walls and .footings to allow for proper
erection and dismantling of forms, for installation of service and for inspection. All
excavations shall be inspected and approved before pouring any concrete, laying
underground services or placing select fill materials.
The Contractor shall control the grading in the vicinity of all excavated areas to prevent surface drainage running into excavations. Water which accumulates in excavated areas shall be removed by pumping before fill or concrete in placed therein.

D. FILLINGS AND BACKFILUNG


1. After forms have been removed from footings, pi_ers, foundations, walls, etc. and
when concrete work is hard enough to resist pressure resulting from fill, backfilling
may then be done. Materials-excavated may be used for backfilling. All filling shall
.be placed in layers not exceeding six (61 inches in thickness, each layer being thoroughly compacted and rammed by wetting, tamping, rolling.

E. PLACING AND COMPACTING FILL


1. Common Fill-shall be approved site-excavated material free from roots, stumps
and other perishable or objectionable matter.
2. Select FUI -shall be placed where indicated and shall consist of crushed gravel
crushed rock, or a combinations thereof. The material shall be free from adobe, vegetable matters and _shall be thoroughly tamped after placing.

335

3. Before placing fill material, the surface upon whiCh it will be placed shallbe cleared .
of all brush roots, vegetable matter and debris, scarified and thoroughly wetted to
insure good bonding between the ground.
F. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIALS

1. Any excess material remaining after completion of the earthwork shall be disposed
of by hauling and spreading in nearby spoil areas designated by the OWNER. Exca
vated material deposited in spoil areas shall be Graded to a uniform surface.

II. CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE:

A.

GENERAL

1. Unless otherwise specified herein, concrete work shall conform to the requirements
of the ACI Building Code. Full cooperation shall be given other t rades to install embedded items. Provisio'ns shall be made for setting items not placed in the forms .
Before concrete is placed, embedded items shall have been inspected and tested for
concrete aggregates and other materials shall have been done.
B. MATERIALS

1. Cement for the concrete shall conform to the requirements of specifications for
Portland Cement (ASTM C-150) .
2. Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from other injurious amounts
of oUs, acids, alkaline, organic materials or ot her substances that may be deleterious
to concrete or steel.

3. Rne Aggregates shall consist of hard, tough, durable, uncoateq particles. The
shape of the particles shall be generally rounded or cubicle and reasonably free from
flat or elongated particles. The stipulated percentages of fines in the sand shall be
obtained either bythe processing of natural sand or by the product ion of a suitably
graded manufactured sahd.
'

4. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel or rock, or a combination


of gravel and rock, coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, tough, durable, clean
and uncoated particles. "'fhe sizes of coarse aggrega.tes to be used in the various
parts of the work shall be in accordance with the following:
Size -

3/ 4" for all concreting work

5~ Reinforcing Bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM standard specifications for Billet Steel Bars for concrete reinforcement (A 15-625) and to Specrtication
for minimum requirements for the deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement
(A 3()5.56).

All secondary ties such as stirrups, spirals and inserts may be plain bars. The main
reinforcing bars shall be as follows :

336

No. 4

(1 / 2") 12 mm

No. 3
No.5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8

(3/ 8") 10 mm
(5/8.. ) 16 mm
(3/ 8'") 20 mm
(7/8") 22 mm
( 1"') 25 mm

fy - 33,000 psi
fy - 40,000 psi

C. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING


1. Proportions of all materials entering into the concrete shall be as follows:
Class "A"

Cement

Sand

Gravel

Class " 8 "


Class "C"

1
1
1

2
2 1/2"
3

4
5
6

2. Class of Concrete-concrete shall have a 28-day cylinder.strength of 3,000 psi, for


all concrete work, unless otherwise indicated in the plans.

3. Mixing-concrete shall be machine.mixed. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes


after the cement has been added to the aggregates. In the absence of
mixer, manual mixing is allowed.

a concrete

D. FORMS
1. General- Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and
shape it to the required lines, or to insure the concrete of contamination with materials caving from adjacent, excavated surfaces. Forms shall have sufficient strength
to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete,
and shall be maintained rigidly in correct position . Forms shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. Forms for expo~ surfaces against which
backfill is not be pia~ shall be lines with a form grade plywood.

2. Cleaning and oiling of Form-Before placing the concrete, the contact surfaces
of the form shall be cleaned of encrustations of mortar, the grout or other foreign
material, and shall be coated with a commercial form oil that will effectively prevent
sticking and w ill not stain the concrete surfaces.

3. Removal of Forms-forms whall be removed in a manner which will prevent dam~


age to be concrete. Forms shall not be removed withqut approval. Any repairs of
surface imperfections shall be performed at once and airing shalt be started as soon
as the surface is sufficiently hard to permit it without further damage.

E. PLACING REINFORCEMENT:
1. General-Steel reinforcement shall be provided as indicated, together with all necessary wire ties, -chairs, spacer1, supported and ou.r devices necessary to instaH
and secure the (einforcement property. All reinforcement, when placed, shall be free
from loose, flaky rust and scale, oil grease, clay and other coating and foreign substances that would reduce or destroy its bond with concrete.

Reinforcement shall be pieced accurately and secured in place by use of metat or


concrete supports, spacers and ties. Such supports shall be of sufficient strength to
maintain the operation. The supports shall be used in such manner that they will not
be exposed or contribute in any way, to the discoloration or deterioration of the concrete.

F. CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE:


1. Conveying - concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable, by methods which will prevent segr~tion, or loss of ingredients. There wifl

be no vertical drop .greater than 1.5 meters except where 5uitabl~ equipment is pro-

vided to prevent segregation and where specifically authorized.

337.

2. Placing -Concrete shall be worked readily into the corners and angles of the forms
and around all reinforcement and embedded items without permitting the material
to segregate. Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its final position in.
the forms so that flow within the mass does not exceed two (2) meters and consequent segregation is reduced to a minimum near forms or embedded items, or elsewhere as directed, the discharge shall be so controlled that the concrete may beeffectively compacted into horizontal layers not exceeding 30 centimeters in depth
within the maximum lateral movement specified.

3. T ime interval between imixing and placing. Concrete shall be placed before initial
set has occuted and t>etore it has contained its water content for more than 46
minutes.

4. Consolidation of Concrete-Concrete shall be consolidated with the aid of mechanical vibrating equipment and supplemented by handspading and tamping . Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower coursed that have commenced initial set; and
reinforcement embedded in concepts beginning to set or already set shall not be disturbed by vibrators. Consolidation around major embedded parts shall be by hand
spading and tamping and vibrators shall not be used.

5. Placing concrete through reinforcement . In placing concrete through reinforcement, care shall be taken that no segregation of the coarse aggregate occurs. On
the bottom of beams and slabs, where the congestion of steel near the forms makes
placing difficult, a layer of mortar of the same cement-sand ratios as used in concrete shall be first deposited to cover the surfaces.

G. CURING:
1. General: All concrete shall be moist cured for a period not less than seven (7) consecutive days by an approved method or combination applicable to local conditions.

2. Moist Curing-The surface of the concrete shall be kept continuously wet by covering with burlap plastic or other approved materials thoroughly saturated with
water and keeping the covering wet spraying or intermittent hosing.

H. FINISHING
1. Concrete surfaces shall not be plastered unless otherwise indicated. Exposed concrete surfaces shall be formed w;th plywood, and after removal of forms, the surfaces shall be smooth, true to line and shall present or finished appearance except
for minor defects which can be easily be repaired with patching with cement mortar,
or can be grounded to a smooth surface to remove all joint marks of the form work.
2. Concrete slabs on Fill. The concrete slabs on fill shall be laid on a prepared foundation consisting of subgrade and granular .till with thickness equal to the thickness of
overlaying slab except as indicated otherwise.

Ill. MASONRY WORKS


A. MATERIALS

1. Concrete Hollow Blocka shall have a minimum face shell thickness of 1" (.025).
Nominal size shall be
follows:

x 8'" x 16" minimum compressive strength shall be as


I

'338

Class A - 900 psi


Class B - 750 psi
All units shall be stored \for a period of not less than 28 days (including curing .
'period) and shall not be delivered to the job site prior to that time unless the
st~engths equal or exceed those mentioned il'l these specifications.

2. Wall Reinforcement shall be No. 3 (3/8") or 10 mm

steel bars.

3. Sand shalt be river sand, well screened, clean, hard, sharp sillicious, free from loam,
silt or other impurities, composed of grains of varying sizes within the following
limits:

Sieve No.
9
16
100

Percent

Passing
Retained
Retained

100
5
95

4. Cement shall be standard portland cement, ASTM C- 150-68 Type 1.


5. Mortar-Mix Mortar from 3 to 5 minutes in such quantities as needed for immediate use. Retampering will not be permitted if mortar stiffens because of premature setting. Discard such materials as well as those which have not been used
within one hour after mixing.
Proportioning: Cement mortar shall be one 11) part portland cement and two (2)
parts sand by volume but not more than one 11) part pbrtland cement and three (3)
parts sand by volume.

B. ERECTION
1. All masonry shall be laid plumb, ~rue to line, with level and accurately spaced
courses, and with each course breaking joint with the source below. Bond shall be
kept plumb throughout; corners and reveals shall be plumb and true. Units with
greater than 12 percent absorption shall be wet before laying. Work required to be
built in with masonry, including anchors, wall plugs and accessories, shall be built in
as the erection progresses.
2. Masonry Units Each course shall be solidly bedded in portland cement mortar. All
units shall be damp when laid units shall be showed into place not laid, in a fun bed
of unfurrowed mortar. All horizontal and vertical points shall be completely filled
with mortar when and as laid. Each course shall be bonded at corners and intersec
tions. No cells shall be left open in face surfaces. All cells shall be filled up with mor
tar for exterior walls. Units terminating against beam or slab soffits shall be wedged
tight with mortar. Do not lay cracked, broken or defaced block.
3. Lintels shall be of concrete and shall be enforced as shown in the drawings. Untels
shall have a minimum depth of 0.20 (8") and shall extend at least 0.20 (8"') on each
side of opening.

C. WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALlATION:


1. Plastering: Clean and evenly wet surfaces. Apply scratch coat with sufficient force
to form good keys. Cross scratch coat upon attaining its initial set; keep damp. Ap
ply brown coat after scratch coat has set at least 24 hours after scratch coa~ application. Ughtly scratch brown coat; keep moist for 2 days; allow to dry out. Oo not apply finish until browr:t coat has seasoned for 7 days. JuSt before applying coat, wet

339

brown coat again . Aoat finish coat to true even surface; troweJ in mannerthat will
force sand particles down into plaster; with final traweling, leave surfaces bamished
smooth, free from rough areas, trowel marks, cheeks, other blemishes. Keep finish
coat moist for at least 2 days; thereafter protect against rapid drying until properly,
thoroughly cured.

2. Pea Gravel Washout: Before start o1 work, provide Qesired pitch for drainage.
Roughen concrete surface with pick or similar tool. Clean off looSe particles and
other materials which may prevent bond, keep surface wet for at least 4 hours
before applying. Scratch coat of mortar. Coat not more than 3/4" thick. Apply mi~
ture of pea gravel and portland cement .w ith pressure to obtain solid adhesion .
Trowel pea gravel to hard, smoot h, even plane and rod and float to uniform surface
of even texture. When surface is semi-dry evenly spray surfaces with clean water
with spray machine to wash out loose cement to part exposed pea gravel . Remove
and wash down remaining cement paste with soft brush, to leave pea gravel in its
natural texture and appearance. Before applying pea gravel finish, sut.lit samples
to owner for approval.

D. SCAFFOLDING
Provide all scaffolding required for masonry work, including cleaning down on completion, remove.

E. VITRIFIED FLOOR TILE INSTALlATION:


1. Do not start floor tiling oceuring in space requiring both floor and wall tile setting
has been completed.

2. Before spreading setting bed, establish border lines center wires in both directions
to permit laying pattern with minimum of cut tiles. Lay floors without borders from
center line outward. Make adjustment at walls.

3. Clean concrete sub floor an~ moisten jt without soaking . Sprinkle dry cement over
surfa~. Spread setting bed mortar on concrete and tamp to assure good bond over
the entire area then screed to smooth, level bed. Set average setting bed thickness
at 3/4'" but never less than 1/2".

F. WALL TILE INSTALLATIONS:

1. Scratch coat for application as foundation coat shall be at most 1/2". While still

or

plastic, deeply score scratch coat scratch and cross scratch. Protect scratch coat
and keep reasonably moist within seasoning period. Use mortar for scratch, float
. coats, within one hour after mixing. Retempering of partially hardened mortar is not
permitted. Set scratch coat shall be cured for at least 2 days before starting tile setting.
2. For float coat use one part portland cement, one part hydrated lime (optional), 3 1/2

parts sand.
3. Setting Wall Tiles: soak wall tilll thoroughly in clean water before setting. Set
wall tile by trowelling neat portland cement skim coat on float coat or apply skim
coat to back of each ti!e unit. Immediately float tile in place. Make joints straight,
level and perpendicular. Maintain vertical joints plumb.
-

340

4. Grouting: Grout joints in wall tile with neat white cement immediately after suitable
area of tile has been ~t. Tool joints slightly concave, cut off excess mortar and
wipe from face tile. Roughen interstices of depressions. In mortar joints after grout
~s been cleaned from surface. Fill to line of cushion tile bases or covers with mortar. Make joints between wall ~ile, plumbing and other built in fixtures with light co
lored caulking. Immediately after grout has had its initial set, give t ile wan surfaces
protec1ive coat of non-corrosive soap.

IV. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORK


A. MATERIALS
1. Quality of Lumber: Lumber shall be the approved quality of the respective kinds
for the various parts of the work, well seasoned, thoroughly dry, and free from
large, loose, or unsound knots, sups, shakes, and other imperfections impairing its
strength, durability or appearance. All finishing lumber to be used shall be completely dried and shall not contain more than 14% moisture. All flooring, tongue and
grooved shall be kiln dried .

2. Treatment of the Lumber:

a. All concealed lumber shall be sprayed w ith. anti-anay or bukbok liquid.


b. Surface in contact with masonry and concrete coated with creosote or equivalent.

3. Door Sashes: All door sashes shall be well seasoned, flush type, semi-hollow core
and solid core, tanguile plywood veneers on both sides. Exterior doors shall be of
kiln dried Tanguile panel doors. ""'

4. Kind of Lumber:
All unexposed lumber for framings shall be of Apitong.
All window and door jambs shall be of Apitong or Tanguile.
Balcony railings, flooring, girder and joints shall be of S4S Yacal.
All interior flooring shall be of Kiln dried T and G Tanguile.
Living room wood panels at the second floor shall be of 1,. thick pinewood.
Eaves shall be of kiln dried T and G Tanguile S4S.
Exterior sidings shall be seasoned sun dried V-Cut Tanguile.

B. WORKMANSHIP
1. Execute rough carpentry in best, substantial, workmen like manner. Erect framing
true to line, levels and dimensions, squared, aligned, plumbed , well-spliced and
nailed, and adequately braced., properly fitted using mortise and tenon joists.

2. Millwork-accurately milled to details, clean cut moldings profiles, lines, scrape,


sand smooth; mortise, tenon, splice, join, bl.ock, nail screw, bolt together, asapproved, in manner to allow free play of panels; avoid swelling, shrinkage, ensure
work remaining in place without warping, splitting opening or joints. Do not install
mill work and case until concrete and masonry work have been cured .and will not
release moisture harmful to woodwork .

. 3: Secure work to grounds, otherwise fasten in position to hold correct surfaces, lines
and levels. Make finished work flat, plumb, true.

V. ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES SCHEDULE


A. FLOORING
1. All

interi~r flooring shall be 1" x 4'" tongue and groove (T &

G Tanguile, kiln dried) .

.341

2. Toilet floors shall be vitrified 4 1/4" x 4 1/4,. white or beige in color, rnariwasa
brand .
3. Balcony floors shall be of 1 x 4" Yacal set on a 1/4" open joint and nailed on Yacal
Floor joist. All balcony railings shall be Yacal.

4. Concrete Floor fronting the street shall be finished with 12" x 12" Vigan tiles with
black pebb!e washout as border aft around.

B. WALLING:
1. All interior partitions shall be of 1/4" x 4' x 8' plywood. Joints of partitions shall have
a V-Cut Joint.
2. Interior paneling of second floor living room shall be ,. .. x 8'" pine wood:

3. Exterior walling shall be 1 .. x 6" V-cut tanguile.


4. CHB Walling shall be plastered and lined with 1/4 nail strip.
5. Toilet wall finish shaM be of 41 / 4" x 4 1/ 4" white glazed tiles.

C. CEILINGS:
1. AJI interior ceilings shall be of 1/ 4" x 4' x 8' plywood with mouldings.
2. Outside ceiling eaves shalt be of 1" x 4* T and G Kiln dried tanguile, with air Vents
covered with screen.

D. DOORS
1. All interior, bedroom doors shall be hollow core flushed door using plywood veneer.
2. All toilet doors shall have one side using waterproofed plywood facing inside. Bring
float coat flush with screeds or temporary guide strips placed to give true and even

surface at proper distance from the tile finished face. .


3. All exterior doors shall be solid panel. doors.

E. WINDOWS:
1. All windows shall be steel windows casement and awning type with simple 1/2"
square wrought iron railings and secured with screen.

2. Other windows as indiCated in the plan shall be glass jalousie.


3. Glass and glazing: All windows shall be glazed on the outside with steel casement
putty. Glass Shaft be puttied and face.:puttled in neat trim line manner, with steei
glazing ships. Use 3/16" thick cleaner gJasa.
4. Provide louvers below the ceiling and wall partition of bedrooms withoot exterior
window access.

F. FINISHING HARDWARES:
1. Butt Hinges-unless otherwise approved, Use brass, polished and finely finished,
mortise ball bearings 5 knuckles, non rising loose pins as manufactured by Stanley
or corbin for aU interior wood doors .
Use one and one-half pairs (3 pes.) of hinges per leaf of doors more than 1.8> m
high, loose pin butt for room doors, fixed pin butt for closets.

C. LOCKSETS:

1. Cylindrical locks-all interior doors shall be equipped with high grade heavy or
standard duty Cas required) cylindrical locksets. The mechanism shall be heavy
gauge, cold rolled steel contained in sturdy cylindrical housing with all parts zinc
plated and dichromated for maximum resistance against rust and corrosion. Exposed
parts shall be brass heavily plated as manufactured by schlage, yale or approved
equivalent.

2. Keying and Keys-locks shall be keyed in sets and sub sets to provide maximum expansion. All sets shall be grand master keyed, and all entrance locks shall be great
grand master keyed per unit.

H. RIM BOLTS-Rim bolts and keeper shan be chrome f inish.

I. DOOR BUMPERS-where vvooden doors shall strike an object during opening, provide door bumpers.

J . Cabinet hinges shall be 'Washington" type or piano hinges heavily chrome or nickel
plated.
K. Cabinet and Closet catches shall be plastic roller types.

L. Provide Yale door closets for all swing exterior doors.


M. Provide heavy-duty head and foot bolt for the three (3; main entrance doors.

VI. ROOFING AND TINSMITHING WORKS

A. MATERIALS:
1. Roof Sheethlng -shatl be COfTUgatad galvanized Iron sheet guage 26.
Gutters, downspouts and Flashings shall be of guage .26 plain G.l. sheets

343

8. INSTALLATION WORKMANSHIP:
1. Sheathing - layout the roofing sheets in a manner that the side overlap faces away
from the prevailing wind. Provide no~ less than 0.30 m develop on ends and not less
than 1 1/2 corrugation on side laps on both sides. Secure the roofing sheets to purfins by using G.l. rivets and 1" wide G.L Ties.
2. Gutter -a connection of gutters shall be made by using brass rivets and fully
jointed by nikolite lead. Provide a minimum of 1% slope towards the downspouts.
3. Oownspout-shail be 2" x 4'" plain G.l. sheets or colored pvc pipe as approved by
the Architect.

4. Flashing -shall be plain G.l. sheet over corrugated roofing of not less than 0.30
overlap extend G.l. Flashing until it covers the top portion of the firewall . .

VII. PLUMBING WORKS:

A. GENERAL:
1. All work shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed plu~ber and in
strict accordance with these specification and of the methods as prescnbed by the
National Plumbing Code of the Philippines.

B. MATERIALS:
1. Cast iron soil pipe for sewer and cement drainage pipes T and G ASTM C-14 and
ASTM-75 respectively.
2. Cast. iron sewer pipes and fittings-ASTM A-74 for soil, waste and vent pipes.
3. Caulking lead-Federal spec. OQ-56 or epoxy mix A and B.
4. Bronze gate values - Federal spec. WW-V-58. .
5. Galvanized iron pipes and fittings- Schedule 40 for all hot and cold water lines.
6. Water Closet-Saniwares brand. All toilets shall be of ventura model or compton
except the second floor owners toilet which shall be saternina or cadet type.
Vitreous china " price pfister" angle valves. White in color.
7. Lavatories - Saniwares Ventura and Diana (or new comrade) vitreous China, com
ptete with all chromard finish ''price pfistor". Fittings and accessories.
8. Kitchen Sink-Northern Hill Classic cast iron acid-resisting enamelled finish inside.
With back complete with chromard finish U.S. fittings and accessories.
9.. soap and Tissue holders-Vitreous China.
10. Towel bars and hooks-bras chrome plated.
11 . Drains: Ao0r drains shall be high grade strong, tough and even-grained metals with
adjustable screwed cover nickel plated.
12. Showerhead and Valvea. For owner's toilet, use P.F. with "marquis" 3-velve divester.
b. For other toilets-uSe shower head with plastic, -and 2-valve divester.

344

C. ALTERNATE MATERIALS:
1. Alternate material allowed, provided such alternate is approved by Architect such as
PVC pipes for sewer and drainage pipes.

2. Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture and device used in plumbing system shall
have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it, manufacturer's trademark or name
weight, type and classes or product when so required.

0. INSTALLATION:
1. Install plumbing fixtures free and open to afford easy access for cleaning.
drawings~ furnishing ali brackets, cleats,
plates and anchors required to support fixtures rigidly in place.

2. Install plumbing fixtures as indicated on

3. Install all fixtures and accessories in locations directed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing pipe fittings.

4. Protect items with approval means to maintain perfect conditions. Remove work
damaged or defective and replace with perfect work without extra cost to OWNER.

5. All G.l. soil and drainage ~ipes shall have a minimum slope of 1o/o.

6. Vertical pipes shall be secured strongly by hooks to building framing. Provide suitable bracket or chairs at the floors from which they start.
Where an end or circuit vent pipe from any fixtures or line of fixtures is connected to

a vent line serving other fixtures, connection shall be at least four (4) feet 1.20 M
above floor in which fixtures are located, to prevent use of any vent line as a waste.
Horizontal pipes shall be supported by well secured strap hangers.

7. Connection of water closets to soil pipes shall be made by means of flanged Plates
and asbestos packing without use of rubber putty or cement.

8. Make all joints air and water-tight; for jointing pipes, the following shall be used.
a. For bell and spigot jointed cast iron and wao;te pipes, cau!k with oakum or jute
and soft pig lead.
b. Lead to cast iron pipes use brass ferrule wiped on lead side and caulked into ball
of cast iron soil pipe.
c. Concrete pipes: bell and spigot ot tongue and groove use yarning matorial and
cement mortar.
d. G.l. Pipes-Use Teflon Tape or white lead when tightening threaded joints.

E.

ROUGH~IN

1. Provide correctly located opening of proper sizes where required in walls and floors
for passed of pipes.

2. All times to be embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly clean and free from all
rust, scale and paint.
3. All changes in pipe sizes on soil, wash and drain lines shall be provjded with reducing fittings or recesses reducers. For changes in pipe sizes provide reducing fittings.
4. High corrosive nature ground within site shall be taken into account by plumber.
Protective features shall be installed to prevent corrosion or all water pipes inStalled
underground.
5. Extend piping to all fixtures, outlets and equipment from gate valves installed in the
branch near the riser.

345

6. All pipes shatl be cut accurately to measurements, and worked into place without
springing or forcing.
7. Care shall be taken as not to weaker structural portion of the buildin9.

VIII. ELECTRICAL WORKS

A. SCOPE OF WORK:
1. The work consist of furnishing of all materials and labor, tolls and equipment and aH
necessary services to complete the electrical work ready for operation as shown in
the drawings and specified as follows:
a. Supply and installation of the main and sub-feeders from etectrical panelboards
up to service entrance.
b. Supply and installation of electrical panel boards, gutters, pull box and accesso
box as required.

nes

c. Supply of wiring devices porcelain receptacles, outlets, switches, etc. complete


with suitable cover plates as per specifications.
d. Supply and installation for all branch feeders circuits from panelboards up to all
outlets; swltches, control~ or other loads; other wiring as shown in plan.
e. Installation of all owners fum,.hed materials such as lightings fixtures and electrical control.

f. Grounding system as per EE requirements.


g. The contractor shall secure and pay for all electrical installation fees and permits,
but Owner shall pay for the necessary deposit.

B. CODES AND REGULATIONS:


The Electrical work shall be done in accordance .w ith .all the requirements of the latest
issue Philippine Eleotrical Code, with rules and regulations and Ordinances of the local
enforcing authorities of Baguio City and the requltements of the Local Power Company

C. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFiCATIONS:


1. All installation shall be done in a work-manlike manner and shall include all necessary works that may not be clearly indicated in the plans or schematic but necessary
to attain the purpose or intent of the design scheme.
2. The plan indicate the general layout of the system and the location of outlets are diagrammatic, and may be adjusted as required by the Architect before installation;

as

3. The contractor sha!l record all accomplishments


work progresses fn a set of
records plan. Three (3) sets of as built drawings shatl be duly signed and sealed by
the supervisor..jn~harge of construction shall be submitted for the owners and Ar
chitect's references and maintenahce purposes.

346

D. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:


All materials to be supplied shaH be new and of high quality suitable for the location and
. purpose. Materials shaU be standard products of reputabte manufacturers.

E. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Power service: 115/230 volts, single phase, 3 wire solid neutral60 hertz._
. 2. Wiring methods: all power and control wiring shall be in rigid mild steei conduit.
3. Grounding:
Panelboards, raceways, gutters, metallic conduits and other non-current carrying
metal parts of .equipment, beaters, motor frames, shall be provided with effective
grounding connection to a grounded cold centef pipt,.

4. Main and Branch Feeders:


Conductors and complete conduit systems shall be provided as shown in drawings
and no change, in sizes shall be made without approval by the Architect or his
authorized representative.

5. Panel Board:
Furnish and installs the electrical panelboards as shown in plan. Disconnect switch
es and magnetic starters shall be provided by motor equipment supplier.

6. Receptacles, swithces, Outlets:


a. Provide as indicated in drawings, the switches and receptacles with proper cover
plates . Switches shall be -of the quiet-matic type,- " NATIONAL'' or approved
equal.
b. Receptacles shall be duplex with proper cover plates, rated 10 amp. min. 250
V.A.C., "Eagle" or approved equal.

c. Lighting outlet at ceiling shall be provided with 4" octagonal box ga. 18 min.
Connections from fixtures to boxes''be nade by using TW wire C.HB in flexibte
conduit.

7. Light Fixtures:
a. All lighting fixtures shaH be furnished by owner and installed by the Contractor.
Detail of fixture design when not standard shall be shown in the Architectural
Drawings.
b. Fluorescentifixtures if any shall be complete set with lamps and ballast of high
quality, Philips G.E. Philec or approved equal.

8. Wires and Cables:


a. Wires shall be Phelp Dodge, duraflex, Far East Wires or approyed equivalent.

b. No wires shal be drawn into. a raceway until it is complete with all necessary fittings, boxes supports. Connections shall be securely fastened such as-not to
loosen under vibration and normal strain. All connections, splices shall be made
with approved methods.

'

IX. PAINTING WORK:


A. SCOPE

c WORK:

1. Consists of furnishing all items, articles, m~terials tools, equipment, labor scaffoldings, ladders, methods and other incidentals necessary and required fbr the satisfactory completion ot the work.

347

2.

1~ covers complete painting and finishing of wood, plasters, concrete, metal or other
surfaces exterior or interior of building.

B. GENERAL PAINTING and Surface Finishing shall be interpreted to ~ean and inclu~e
sea,ers, primers, fillers, intermediate and finish coats, emulsions, varntsh, shellac, sta1n
or enamels.
1 . All paint and accessOI)' materials incorporated in or fo~min~ hpart thherdeoffb s~all:,e
subject to the prior approval and selection for color, ttnt, f1ms _
o r s a e Y t e r-

chitect.
2. In conne~tion with the Architect's determination of color or ti ~t of ~nytpartic~a~
surface, the depth of any color or tint selected or required sha an no ms ance
subject for an additional cost of the owner.

11

3. Painting of all surfaces, except as otherwise specified shall be three (3) coat work,
one primer and a finish cost.

C. MATERIALS:

1. All paint materials shall meet the requirements of paint materials under classification class "A'~ as prepared by the institute of Science, Manila, use "BOYSEN" or
"Fuller" Paints or equivalent.
2. All paint shall be recommended by the manufacturer for t~e use intended and shalt
be delivered to the jobsite in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact.
3. Painting materials such as Linseed oil, turpentine, thinners, shellac, lacquer, etc.
shall be pure and of the highest quality obtainable and shall bear the manufacturer's
label on each container or package.
4. Except for ready mixed materials in original containers, ali mixing shall be done in
the jobsite. No materials are to be reduced, changed or mixed except as specified by
manufacturer of sa_id materials.
5. S.torage and Protection
The resident Architect shall designate a place for the storage of paint materials
~never it may be necessary to change this designated storage place, the contractor shall promptly more to the new location. The storage space shall be adequate
protected from damage and paint. Paint shall be covered at all times and safeguards
taken to prevent fire.

D. MATERIALS:

1. All surfaces to be painted shall be examined carefully before beginning any work
and see that all work of other trades or subcontractor's are installed in workmanlike
condition to receive paint, stain or particular finish.
2. Before proceeding with aoy painting or finishing, thoroughly clean, sand, and seal if
necessary by removigg from all surfaces all dust, dirt, grease, or other foreign subStances which would affect eithAr the satisfactory execution or permanency of the
work. Such cleaning of shall be done after the general cleaning executed under the
separate division of the work.

348

..
3. No work shall be done l.lnder conditions that are unsuitable for the production of
good results, nor at any time when the plastering is in progress or is being cured, or
not dry.

4. Only skilled painters shall be employed in the work .. All wo!i(manship shaH be executed in accordance with the best acceptable practices.

5. Finish hardware, lighting fixtures, plates and other similar items shall be removed by
workmen skilled in these trades, or otherwise protected during painting operati<>.ns
and reposition upon completion of each space.
6. Neither paint nor any other finish treatment shall be applied over wet or damp surfaces. Allow at least two 121 days for drying preceeding coat before applying
succeeding coat.

7. Begin work only when resident Architect has inspected and approved prepared sur~
face otherwise no credit for coat applied shall be given. The contractor shall as8ume
responsibility to recoat work in question. Noti.f v Architect when particular coat applied is complete, ready for inspection and approval.

E. PREPARATION OF SURFACES:

..

1. For bricks, concrete, cement or concrete blocks; cut out scratches, cracks abrasion
in plaster surfaces, openings and adjoining trim as required. Fill flustl adjoining
plaster surface. When dry; and smooth and seal before priming coat application.

2. T int plasterpriming coat to approximate shade of final coat. Touch up section spots
in plaster or cement after first coat application, before applying second coat, to produce even result in finish coat. Secure color schedules for rooms before priming
walls.

3. In cases of presence of high alkali conditions, neutfalize surfaces by washing with


zinc sulphate solution (3 pounds to a gallon of water). Allow to dry thoroughly,
brush free of crystals before priming.

4. Prime with mixture of equal parts by volume ot l & S Portland cement paint and
5244 improved Alkali proof. seal or its equivalent as may be approved by the Architect.

5. Brush one or more finish coats of l & S thinned if necessary with mineral spirits or
turpentine.

F. WOODWORK TO BE PAINTED:

1. Touch up knots, pitch, streaks, sappy spots with shellac.


2. Do necessary puttying of nail holes, cracks etc. after first coat with putty of color to
match that of finish. Bring putty w ith adjoining surface in neat, wotkmanlike man~
ner.

3. Wipe paste wood fillers, applied in open grain wood, when "set", across wood
grain. Then with grafn to secure clean surface.

4. Cover surfaces to be stained with uniform stain coat.


5. Tiny undercoats of paint and enamel to same or approximate coat shade.
6. Sand smoothly woodwork to be finished with enamel or vamishi clean surface
before proceeding with first coat application. Use fine sand paper between coats on
enamel or varnish finish applied' to wood to produce even .smooth finish.

349

G. VARNISHING:
1. Sand wood surfaces with fine grade sand paper.

2. Wipe duSt off with

ct8an Cloth dampened with lacquer. ininner

3. Apply wood filler as per manufacturer's specifidations.


4. Apply approved stain in uniform .coats until desired shade is achieved.
5. Apply finish coat as per manufacturer's specifications.

X. FIRE CODE REQUIREMENTS


AU interior wooden structures shall be applied with resistA-Fiame Fire Retardant solution
applied as per manufacturer's specifications. All other requirement as of the fire code of the
Philippines as far as they relate to this project shall likewise be complied with.

GEORGES. SALVAN
' .
Architect

350

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Materials of ConstJuction . .. . . ... .. . . .. .. . . . . .. .. ... . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .


E & V Far East Trading .. .. .. . . . ... . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. ..
Campos Rueda ................. ; . .. . . .. .. . . .. . ... . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .
Republic Glass Corpc:ntion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Milwaukee International Marketing Inc. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .
Johns Manville (Membranetype) .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . ... .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .
Weatherkote-Shel .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .... .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .
Cemvathane Membnll1e ..... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chevron S.F. U.S.A. ............................................................
Mutytan Paste ................................... :. . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . ... .. . .. . . . . .. ..
Metat Forming Corporation . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .
Etemit Corporation ............................................................. ~.
Phitsteel Corp. .............................................. .......................
Metal Forming Corporation .. ... . . . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . ... . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . ... .
ERA Industries Inc. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . .. ... . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. ..
Sunset . . . . ... . . .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . .
Practical Electricity .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .
Mechanical and Electrical Equipments for Buildings 6th Edition . . . . . . . . .

Smith, Ronald
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Brochure
Magazine
Audels

Me Guinness,
Stein, Reynolds

Sinclair Paints . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .
Sherwin-Williams . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . .. .. . .
Boysen Paints .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. ..
Dutch Boy Paint . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . .
Fuller Paints . ... . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .

Product Catalogue
Product Catalogue
Product Cat8/ogue
Product Catalogue
Product Catalogue
Stenrnan, A-8, U.S.A............................................................. Catalogue
EFCO Manufacturing Com. Pty. LTD. . . . . . ... ... ... . . . . . . .... . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . Catalogue
American Hardware Corp., California .. .. . .. . .... . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. Brochure
Shell Philippines ............... :. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. Brochure

35~

INDEX

A
Accelerators .. .. . ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ ... , . . . . . .
5
Accordfon door ... ......... .. .. .. .. ............ .. . ... 162
Acoustical board . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Acoustical tiles . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . 274
Adhesion types .. .......... .. . ... ... , .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Acrylic floorfinish . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
128
Air drying .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .
36
Air-entraining agents ................... ....... . ...
5
Aggregates used in concrete . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Aluminum . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .... ... . .. , .. . . . 83, 61, 298
Alkyd paints . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . ... . .. . .... . . . . . . . . . 133
Alloy Steels . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .
56
Aluminum shingles . . . . . . .. . . .. ... .. . . . . ... . . . . . . 290
Aluminum siding . . . . ... . ... . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . 260
"Anav" proofing . .. . .. .. ... . .. .. . ........ .... ... .. .. 117
AnchOJ type .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. 265
Animalglue ....... ....... ... .. .. ... ......... .........
78
Architecturallamp .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 217
Ardex lightweight corrugated sheets . . . . . ... . ... 298
Artificial stone veneer . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Asbestos... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .
90
Asbestos-cement sheeuoofing . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . 298
Asbestos -cement-siding and
siding shingles .. . ...... ..... ........ ..... ... 259, 289
Asbestos fittings . . .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. . .. ... . . .... . . .. .. 196
Asbestos pipe .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. ... ... . . .. . . ... . . ... . . 196
Aspt\alts .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .
52
Asphalts, cement .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . ..
78

Asphah paving ument ......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Asphalt shingles ..... ....... . ......... ... , .. .. .. ..
Asphaltic mastic flooring .. .... ........ :.. .. .. .. . .. .
Asphal1ic tiles.............. .............. ..............
Automatic door closer ..... ....... .. ...... ..

53
288
232
233
178

B
Balloon type ceiling . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 255
Banauedesign .............. ....... ...... . ........... 304
Barrelbolt ...... ........ .............. ... ...... ........ 173
Batts ......... .... ..... ............ .... .... ... ...........
88
Bibrous loose fill . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 187
Bi-folding door .. ........ ". ... .. ... .... .. .. ........ 163
Blanket insulation .................... , .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
87
Block flooring .. .. ....... .... ...... .... . .. .............. 224
Block or rigid slab insulation .. ,.. .. ...... ...... . ....
88
Blood-aluminum gule ....... ............ .. .. . .. ... .
78
Blow moulding process . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .
72
Board and bettens ...... .. .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 260
Bolts and nuts .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . 59, 170
Bonding agents ..... ................ ...... , .. .. .. . .. .
7
Bored lock .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 176
Bored latch ........ ...... .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . 177

Bowl .. ......... ......................... ........ ........ 206

352

Bracket ........ .... ... .. ... ........ .. .. ............ ... 186


Brick.. .... ...... ............... ..... .... 242,264, 229, 16
Brick veneer . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. 258
Brick bonds ... .. ..... .. . .... .. . .. ... .. .. .... . .. .. ..
17
Brick texture .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
16
Bright plate. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2fJ7
Building boards, stone ........... ...... .. , .. .. . 42, 24
Bullet latch .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 187
Built-up roofing .. .... .. ....... ....... ........ .... . .... 300
Bumpers ........ .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Bush-hummer .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. . .. 266
Bush-hummer concrete ... .. ....... .. ... , .. .. .. . .. 268
Bushhummerfinish ... ......... .. ..... ..... .. .... .. 268
But hinge .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 164, 181
By-passing sliding door ........... , .. .... .. ...... ..... 163

c
Cabinet doors.................... .......... ....... ... .. 100
Calendaring process ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... ..... ... ..
73
Casein glue .. .. .... .......... . .. .. .... ............
78
Cast iron pipes and fittings . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 190
Cast stone .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . 10
Casting ........ ..... ..... .. ......... . . .. .. ... .. .. ...
73
Cathedral and figured glass .... .... ... .. ... ..... .. .
65
Ceiling board .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. ...... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 278
Cellular glass insulation...................... ... . ....
89
Cellular concrete blocks .. ............... ,. ... . ....
11
Cellulose cement .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. ...
78
Cement tile .......... .. .. ............ ..... .. . .. .. . . . .. .. 226
Cements......... .......... .. ............ .... .. ......... 2
Cemvathene brand .. .. ....... . .... ... ...... , . .. .. . 101
Ceramic mosaic . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Ceramic veneer .. .. .. . .. .... . .. . .. .... . .. .. .. .. . 264: 21
Ceramic wall tile.... .... .... .... ... .. .... ........ ..... 244
Chain door fastener .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . 173
Chesterton descaler and chemical cleaner .... .. t'lfJ
Chesterton paintstripper .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. 12JJ
Chesterton urethane enamels ..... ....... .. ... ... . 128
Chipboard ........ ........ .................. . ...... ... .
46
ChiOi'inated-rubber adhesive ..... .. ............ ..
78
CIM ............ ....... ....... . ............ ........ ..... . 110
Clear silicone water repellant .. .. ....... . ... .. .. . . li6
Clover design .. . .... .... ........ .. ...... .. .. ..... . ... . . 223
Coal tar pitch .. . .... .... .... .............. , ........ .. . .
52
Cold galvanizing compound ............. .... ...... . 124
Cold-rolled sheets . ............. .. ....... ... .... .. .. ..
56
Color coding . ..... ....... .............. .. ... ... , . .... . 195
Colored concrete floOJs ............... ......... .. . 22S
Colourless ...... .... ...... ... . ..... .... ...... ...... .. .. 1.20
COITIPI'essive molding ....... .. ........ . ...... .. .. . .
73
Compressive strength test ......... ............. ..
4
Concrete block ... .. ................... .. ........ . .. ..
9
Concrete colouring agents ............. . ...... .. ..
7
Concrete floor slab . .. .. . .. .. .. . . ........ .. .... .. . 224
Concrete form paper .. ... , .................. . ....... .
50

1~.

Concrete roofing tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


Concrete milces . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . .
62
Concrete water proofers . ...... ....... .. ... . .... .:.
6
Conduit fittings . ... . . .. . . . .. .. . .... .... . ... . ..... .... . 215
Consuuction equipments .......... .... . ..
12
Control projectand manage .... ... . ...
129
Convenience outlet s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Copper . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 56, 62, 297
Cork board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 47
Cone tile flooring . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . 236
Corrugated asbestos (4-VI . .. . .. . . .. .. .. ... .. .. . 299
Corrugated glass . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Corrugated plastic sheet ... ...... . .. . . --~ . . .. . . .. . . 303
Curtain wall . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .... .. .. . . .. .. ..... 273
Cushioning paper .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .
49

D
Damproofers .. .. ............ ... .. ... .. .... ... ... .....
Decorative or architectural glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decking .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Dispersal agents .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. ..
Door stoppers .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . .
Driers .... . . ........... . .. ....... .. ....... ...... .
Dry-standpipe system .. ............ .. ... .. .. .. . .. ..
Dutch door ............. .... ................... .. .... . ...

6
68
286

5
188
132
122
164

E
Elastomark product .... .... .. .. . ........ .... ........ 103
Elastomastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
Elastomers .. ................... .... .. .. .. ...... .. ......
82
Electrical wires ......... ................. ........ .. .. . 216
Enamels . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 136
End matching ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
English bond .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 243
Envelope paper ........... .... ... .. .. ..... ... .. ... .. ..
50
81
Epoxy-resin formulation .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .... . ..
EpoxyresinL . .. ........ : ............... .. ......... 79,235
Estimated qualities of material$ required . . . . . . 106
Estimates .............. .. ............ .. ... ......... ... 307
Expandable bead molding ........ ...... -.. ..........
Exterior & interior painting .... .. .. .......... . ..... 145
Extefior painting .... .. ... ... ...... .. ......... .. .... . 139
Exteriorbrown ....... ............... ........... ,..... 120
Extrusion forming . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. .. ... .. ..
73
Eyeandturnbuckle .. .. . .... .. ................ ...... 172

Foamed-in-place insulat ion .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .


Foamed plastics.......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
French door .. ~ .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. ..
Friction latch .. . ...... .................-.............
Full surface hin ~ . .. .. .. .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .
Functional blocks .... ..... .. ..... ..... .. ... ..... ....
Fuses ....... .......... .... ... ... ...... . .. ... ...... . ... .

90

73

164
184
166

68
214

G
Galvanized iron protection system .. .. . . .. 123, 125
Galvanized metal water tanks .. .. .. .. ..
. ..125
Galvanized sheet metal .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .
252
Galvanized steel pipe fittings .. .. .... ... ... .. .
199
Galvanizedsteel..... ... .. .. .. ... ...................... 294
Galvestos .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. 298, 263
Garden wall . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . 243
Gas forming agents .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .
8
Glass.......... ..................... ...... ..... 64,251,268
Glass blocks .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .
68
Glass roofing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 303
Glazed tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Glazed tile accessories .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . 244
Glue laminated lumber .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .
37
Glues .. ...... . .. .. ......... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........
78
Glue uses In laminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Grab bar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. ... .. . .. 186
Grande series (vitrif ied tiles I ............ .... ........ 227.
Granules . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. . .
87

Gypsum.. ............. ...... ......... . . ....... . 241 ,

46

Gypsum .... ....... ................. :.. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .


Gv~MSum precast wall panels ...... . ... ..... .. .......
GY!M!Um tile .. ... ................. ........... ....... ...

29
31

30

H
Hand split and resawed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '1Jf7
Hard board ... .... .'........ .. ... ........ .. .. . .. .. 44, 248
Hard board siding . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .
268
Hardwood .. ... .. ......................... ...... . 248,34
Hardeners ..... ........ .......... ..................... .
5
Hasp ...................... .............................
Hasp lock ............. . ..................... .. .. ......
Heat absorbing plate glass . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ..
66
Heavy sheet glass . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
67
Hexagonal random . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 223
Hinges for cabinets ... .. .. .. .. . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 181
Hook and eves ......... .... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 187, 172
H~ital arm pull .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. . 187

1n
1n

F
Fastpinhinge ............... ..... .......... .... ........ 165
Ferrous ........... ............ ......... .......... ...... 56
Fiber glass .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 273
Fire IJroofing .. ...................... ...... .. .... .. .... 121
Fire proofing paper .. . .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. ...... ......
50
Flemish bond ........ .... ... , ...... .. .. ..... .... ...... 243
Float glass .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 64
Flocculate .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . 5
Floorsealer.............. .. .. ........... ... . . . . .. . 12 1
Floor varnishes .............. ...... .. .......... ....... 134
Fluid .. .. .. .. .... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. ................... !16, 102
Flush counter h inge .......................... ... _.. . 184
Flush bolt ....... ...... .... .. ..................... ..... 173
Flush door ................ ............ ----.. .. ........ 18>

Injection molding process. ..................... .... . .


Integral type ...: .......... ..... .. .... ... ..... . "......
95
Interior worl< (painting 1.. ...................... 147, 153
Intumescent paint ......... .. .. ......... . ........... .. 133
lnsutating fiber board ......... .. , .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. ..
46
Insulating fiber board siding.. .... ............... . 261
Insulating glass . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
67
Insulating paper.. ..... ........... .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ..
49
Invisible hinges .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . 183

J
Joinery brackets ........ ............ ........ ....... _ 171
Junction boxes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 213

353

K
Kalantaa .. ... . . .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

299

Kev pedloctt

1n

.. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. ..
Kiln-drying .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .

:rJ
Knobs .... ................ ............................... 185

L
Lacquers .. ... .. .... .. ............. .. ,... .. ....... ....... 135
Laminating paper .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 49
Laminating process .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Laminated safety glass . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .

73
66
Latch ... .. .... ..... ...... .... .... .... ...... .. .. .. ..... .. 174
Lavatories .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 206
lead .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . '191. 62
lift latch . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... ...... ....... .... .. ... 175

Ught diffusing block .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ..

68

light direction block .. ....... . .. ... .... . .. ... . .... .. 68


Lignin .. ..... ...... .... ...... .... . .... ..... ... .. ... ...... 44
Limplt $PT8Y .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 2n

236
Linseed oil ..... ... .. .. .... .. .. .. :. :.. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ..
82

Linoleum,.. .. ................ . .... ... ..... .......... .. ..

liquid asphalt... .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. ..
Liquid fillet .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. ..
Liquid paving asphalt .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .
Liquid plastic ............. . ......... ... .. ... .. .... .....
Liquid silicones . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . .. .. . .

80

137
53

303
~

lockeet .. .. .. ....... ..... .. ... .. ...... .. .... .. .... ..... 174


logs ............ ...... ... ..... ..... ...... .... .... .. .... 269
Long span roofing .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . '194
Loose fill . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . 86
Loose joint hinges .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. 166
Loose pin hinge .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . 166
luminescent paint.. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 133

Non grain-raising stains ...... .. .. , . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 136


Non-skid .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 81, 235
Nuts ... ......... .. ........ .. .. .... . ..... .... .... .. ... .. 170

0
Offset hinges .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 181
Oil paint .. . ... . .. . ... .. ... . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ...
Oils and turpentines .. ............................. ..
Olive knuckle hinge . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ... . . . . .. . ... ..
Open web steel joints .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .

1n

132
81

166
59
Ovemead rolklp garage door . .. . ... .. ... .. .. . .. . . 162
Overhead swing. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .... .. .. . ... . . 161

p
Paints .. ..... .. .. .... .... . .. .. .. .. .. .........

132, 157,254
161

Panel door ..... ... .. ..... .... ...... ... ....... .. . ...... .
Panic exit device . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
Pans and domes . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
Paper board . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. ..
Paper holder ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ....... ....... ... ..... ..
Parquet flooring .. .. .. .. .... :.. ... ..... .. .. ..... ...... .
Particle board ....... .... ..... . .... ..... .... ...... .. ....
Paste fillers .......... .......... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pneumelle hinge .. .... . .. .. .. :.. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . ..

187

60
47

210

2.23
46
137

166

Pebble, washout .... . .. . .. .. .. .. . ............ 236, 247


Penetrating oil stains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pictu re glass .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . 87
Pigment . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . 132
Pigment wiping stains . .. ... .. ... :.. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. 137
Pitches .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .

Magnetic latch . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . 184


MaGnetic padlock .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ... . . ... . .. . ..
Magnesite flooring .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 235
Manganese steel . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .
16

52., 284

Pivot hinges .... .. ..... .... .... .. .... ...... . .. .. 182, 167
Plain concrete wall . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. 246
Place ondula .. .... .......... .... .. ....... ... :.. .... ... 299

Marble ... ...... .. .. ... ... .... .... ..... .... ............... 237

Plasters .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. 29
Plastic$ . .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 72., 253, 268, 82, 303

Marine and spar varnish .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .

Plastic fittings

134

.. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . ..

196
48

Mariwasa products .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 231


Mas1ics .. .... ... ... ....... . .... ... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... . 82

Plastic foamboards .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .
Plastic pipes . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. ..

125

Mastic compound .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .
Melamine resins .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ..
Membfane types ... .... ......... ..... ..... :.. . .. . .. .
Metal . .'. : .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .
Metal wall . .. .. ... .. . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .

Plastic roofing .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

303

82

19
96

Plastic terrazo .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 235


Plate glass . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 64

261

Plywood ...... ... .... ..... ....... .............. ... 240,248

273

Plywood exterior finish .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 261


. Polybutylena fitting IP.e I .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 196
Polyvinyl chloride fittings I P .V .C.I ... .. . .. .. . .. 196
Polyvinyl-resin adhesives ....... . .. ... ....... ...... ,
19

Metallic paint... .. ......... .... ..... .... ..... .... ...... 133
Melano design .... . .'.. ...... .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. 303
Mineral fiber .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. 273
Mineral fibefground .. .. ...... , .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 48
Mocfrfied natural .................... ....... ......... 135
Moisture wood .... ....... ........ .. .... .... .: .. .. .. ..

35

Monel mecal . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. ... . .. .. .. ... . .. .. Z!1


Mortar bond
18

N
Nails ......... ... ...... .. ...... .. .... .. .. ....... .... .. ..
Natural-resin varnishes ...... ... .. .... .... ... . .......
Natural rubbetadhesives ... ... .. .... .. ......... :: ..

354

Natural stone veneer.. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 258


Neoprane:.robber adhesive , .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . 19
Nidc.le stHI .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. ..
56
Night latch ...... ..... .'................... .... .... ....... 174
Nitrile or buna N rubber adhesive . .. . . .. .. .. .. ..
78
Non-ferrous metals .. .. . .. ..... :. .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. . 253

lEIS
134
18

Polyester~poxy

coatings .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

134

Polyethylene film .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. ..

114

Polyerethanefloorvamistl .. .... .... .. .. ... :.. .... 12B


Polysutfide polyrned .... .. .. .. ....... .. .. .. .. .. . . ....
~
Porcelaininsula~ .. .. .... ........ ............. ... . 213
P~oland admixtures .. ..... ... . ........... .. : .. .. . 9
Pnenolic Resin glues........... .. .. .. .... .. .... ... ...
79
Precast facing slabs .. ... ... .. ...... ........ .. .. .. . ..
10
Precast concrete ..... ........... , .. . .. .. .. . .. . 266, 247
Precast n0081<id concrete .. .... .. .... :. .. . , . . . . . . . . . 225
Pre-1uated lumbef .. .. .. . .. . .. ..... . .. ... .. . .. .. .. . .. . 121

.-

Price list ............. . .. ..... .. ~-. ...... .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . .


Products name interior and exteriof paint . .... .
Projection bricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prop8tler oupid&r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .
Properties of wood .... .. .... ...... :...............
Properties o'f caulking materials. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .

Plywood ... .... ....... .. .... ..... ... .... ... .. .... ... .. ..
' Pulls

.. ............. . ..... ..... . ... . ............... ... .

114
138
243
223

42

Sockets ....... ............ ................. .......... ..

186

175
223

226
123
243
64
89
246
58

119
Resilience .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 222
Resilient flooring . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 236
Resin ...... ....... ........ ........ .............. .. ...... 133
RMOI'cinol resins .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. ..
79
Retarders .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .
5
Revolving door ..... ........... :.. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . 163
Rigid insulation .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. 89
Roll--t~p ............. ..... .. ....... ..... ........ .... . .. . 162
Rolled roofing .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 302
Rolled and rough cast glau .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .. .. 65
Rolled structural shapes . .... .... .. .......... .. ....
fil
Roller latch ...... ................................. . , . . .. 176
Root stylet; .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . 282
Roof slopes in run, rise .. .. . ..... ... .. ... . .. .. . .. .. .. 284
Roofing papers .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Roofing tilts .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. ..
Rotation of molding .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ..
Rubber flooring .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . ..

72
236

Rust-proofing. ...... ...... ............... .. .

123

48
96

s
Sandblasting ........ .. .. .... .. , .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . 247
Saturated felts . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ..
52
Sawlli or chevron ~n .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. 224
Screws ...... .................... ..... ................. 189
Screen door latch .. .... ........... : ................. : tn
Sealers .. .. ...... .... .... . .. ........ .. .. ...... .. ... . 79, 137
Semi-vitrified .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. 228
Sempura tile .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 300

Set-inhiting agents . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ..

285
64
293
Sheet ping .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 57
Sheet steel .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . S>
Shellac ........ .............. ...... . ................ ... 135
Shop lumt. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. ... 36

Sheeting........ ..... . ........ ..... .... ........ .........


S"-t glass ..... ..... .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . . .
~t ....... roofing ........ ........ ...... .... ... ....

sna--...- .....................:....................

137

184
163
UKI
164

210

214
Sodium silicate, adhesives .. .............. ...... ..
79
Soft wood ................... .. ... ...... :........ 34, 222
Solid glass brick . .. .. .... .... .. ... .. ... . .... .......... .
68

Solidwood ....... .... ....... .... .......... ........... . 240


228

R
Rabbeted lock .. . .. .. . ... .... . .. ...... ... . .. ... . .... .
Random design . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .
Random finish .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. ... .. ..
Rat-proofing .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . .
Rattrap bond .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ..
Reflective glass .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ..
Reflective insulation .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ..
Regular hollow blocks P~tttem .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
Reinforcing steel . . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .
Rentc)l(il termite proofing ..... . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .

.......... .................................... ..

81

42

a .
Quarry tiles ................. . .. ......... ..... ...... .. ..

s~

Sliding cabinet doors ................... ......... ..


Sliding door ................ ......... ............... ..
Sliding door tracks ... .... .......... ........... ... ..
Sliding pocket door ......... .... .. ...... ........... .
Sopa holders ............... ........ ......... ........ ..

210

Solignum .. .................... ....................... 120


Special cast iron fittings . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 194
Specifications when buying lumber .. .. .. .. .. ..
37
Specifications sample form .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Speclticalions for 3-ply 15 lbs. asbest06
felt on asbestos cement for con<:rete

gutter

.................. .................... .......

98

Specification for built-.t~p


footing ........ ...... ............ : .. .. .. .. . 99. 100, 98
Specification tor concrete tank ........ ..... 101, 110
Sprayed-on acousticalt"l'l<lterials .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. 276
Spraytex . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 251

Spring hinge$.... ...... ...... ..... .. .. ..... ............

166

Spring door closer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


SprinldM syst"em .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

186

121
Stack bond ....... .... .......... ... .. .. .. .... ......... .. 243
Stains ......... _......... ....... .... ...... ... ...... ....... 136
Stainless steel

.. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .

252, 273, 247

Staples .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .

168

Starch and dextrin glues .... ........... ............ ... 78


Star diamond .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..
224
Star red design .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. ..... 22;J

Steel ..... .. ............ ........................ 252; 29i(W


Steeipipe ...... .............. ............. : ...........
fil
Steel strapping ........ ... ..... . ... ................. .. ... ...59
Steel studs .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 60
Steel wire .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 59
Stones .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 246, 25
Straight split shakes ... .... .. . .. .. .. ..... ............ 288
Straw board .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . 88, 48
Strip flooring ...... .. .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . 222
Stucco ......... ............ .... ... ....... ...... ..... .. 256
Structural insulation board .. .. . .. .... .. .. .... ... ..
88
Strucrurallumber ...... ... ............. ....... .... ..
36
Surface bolt . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . 173
Surface sealing agents .. .. .. ... ... .. .. . .. .. . .. ... .. . 8
SuSDended ceiling . ... ..................... ........... 272

Switches.. ....... ... ...... ... ..... ... .... .. .... ......... 212
Switch box .. .. ....... ...... ...... ............. . .. ... ... 216
Swinging door .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 161
Synthetic .... ................. , . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 247, 2fj}
Synthetic plastic products . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 181
Synthetic-resin varnishes ... . .. .. ............ . . . . . . . 136

T
Taper split ............................................. 'JH7
Tar .... .... ......... ...... .... .. .... .............. .... ...
52
Tempered plate glass .. . .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
66
Tennis Court surfacing ........... ................... 127
Temaplate .................................... .._.... :.. 2fij7
T&rracotta .................. ~. ........ .... 264,290,259
Terranoflooring .... ...... , ... ...... ..... ........... 233

355

Thermal insulation........ ..........................


Thermosetting plastics .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ..
Thin solution ofanimal . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. ..

86

72
81

Thinner .............................................. :.

132
Thoroseal .............. ,.............................. 113
Threaded rod .................... :.............. . . .. . . 188
Tile . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . 18, 204
Tower. rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 210
transfer molding

................. :.. ..

.. . ..

73

u
Unglazed1ile .. .. . . . . . . . . . ... .. . .. ..
Unit of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Urea formal-dehyde resin glues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

226

37
79

v
Vaporbarriers ............. ..
Vapor barrier paper .. .. .. . .. .. .... ..
Vitreous colored plate ............................ .
Vitrified clay pipes ............................. .
Vitrified floor tiles ...................... .

Vinyl ...................... : ................

356

114

49
66
197
'27

234, 235, 303

w
Wallcovering .......................................... 249
Wallroof ................................................ 255
Wallpaper ....................................... 50,249
Washers ................................................ 170
Washout finishes .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 267
Water closets.......................................... 204
Water proofing treatment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Water plug . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . 112
Water saver .... ........ ................ ... .. ......... 111
Water soluble stains . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 136
Water reducing admixtures .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ..
6
Wax compounds .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .
80

Wears creed ... . .. ... .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 126


Weatherkote ............................... 103,105
Weathering steel . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 56
Welded wire fabric .................................
58
Windowglass ....................................... 67
Wired glass . ......... ............ . . ......... 65,301
34
'td .................. .. .........................
Wooapreservation ............................. 119
'.,od shakes, andst-;~ -..
262, 286, 287
,.._. : '' . ;; :'
.. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. .. . '240
w~vd

i;r;-.r:

~~: . -: :,:d~ ..... ;,;~:.}(~'~

Wrought iron......

!''

~.

............ -.. .. .. .. . 260


248

-.-...... . . . . . . .. ...

........ .... ....... ....

56

You might also like